Primordial Cosmology Patrick Peter and Jean-Philippe Uzan Institut d' Astrophysique de Par-is
Translated by Jasna Bruj ic and Claudia de Rham
,
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Great C la rendon Street, Oxford OX2 6DP Oxford Univers ity Press is a d epartment of t he University of Oxford. It furthers the University 's object ive of excellence in research , scholarship, and education by publishing worldwide in Oxford New York Auckla nd Cap e Town D a r es Sa laam Hong Kong Karachi Kuala Lumpur Madrid Melbourne Mexico C ity Nairobi New Delhi Shanghai Ta ipei Toronto With offices in A rgentina Austria Brazil Chile C zech Repu blic France Greece G u atem a la Hungary Italy Japan Pola nd Portuga l Singapore South K orea Switzerland Thailand Turkey Ukraine Vietnam Oxford is a registered tra de mark of Oxford University Press in the UK a nd in certain other count ries Published in the United States by Oxford Universit y Press Inc. , New York Edition originale: "Cosmologie primordia le" © Editions Belin-Pa ris, 2005
English translation © Oxford U ni vers ity Press 2009 O uv rage publ ie avec Ie concours du Ministere fr an~ais ch a rge de la culture - Centre nationa l du livre The moral rights of the a uthors have b een assert ed D atabase right Ox ford University P ress (m aker) First Published in English 2009 All rights reserved. No p a rt of this publication may be reproduced , stored in a retrieval syst em, or tra nsmitted , in any form or by any means, without the prior permission in writing of Oxford University Press, or as expressly permitted by law , or under terms agreed with the appropriate reprographics rights organization. Enquiries concerning reproduction outside t he scope of the ab ove should be sent t o t he Rights Department , Oxford U niversity Press , at the address above You must not circulate this book in a ny other bind ing or cover a nd you must impose t he same condit ion on any acquirer B ritish Library Cataloguing in P ub lication D a t a Data available Library of Congress Cataloging in Publicat ion Data Data available Printed in G reat Britain on acid-free paper by C PI , Chippenham, Wilts ISB N 978- 0- 19-920991 - 0 1 3 5 7 9 10 8 6 4 2
Foreword to the English edition We live at a very special time. The universe was born about 14 billion years ago. We began to study it by very primitive tools only several t housand years ago. Less than a hundred years ago we learned about the existence of other galaxies. F inally, during the last two decades we entered the era of precision cosmology. We are able to study with incredible accuracy the structure of the observable part of the universe, finding imprints of what happened in the first milliseconds after the big bang. But this precision would not help much without the development of new tools which previously were unavailable to cosmologist s. For a long time we did not know how to study matter at densities much greater than nuclear density. This limited our ability to study physical processes in the very early universe. The st andard approach was to make various assumpt ions about superdense matter and then study consequences of these assumptions. The sit uation changed in the beginning of t he 1970s, when we learned that not only the temperature and density, but also t he properties of elementary particles in t he early universe were quite different from what we see now. In particular, according to the theory of t he cosmological phase transitions, during the first 10- 10 seconds after the big bang there was not much difference between weak and electromagnetic interactions. The next important step was t he discovery of the asymptotic freedom , which implied t hat the strength of interactions between elementary particles decreases at large density. This allowed us to investigate physical processes very close to the big bang, at densities almost eighty orders of magnitude higher than the nuclear density. These discoveries culminated in the invention of inflationary theory, which helped to explain why our universe is so large and flat , why it is homogeneous and isotropic, why its different parts started their expansion simultaneously. According to t his theory, the early universe experienced a period of exponentially r apid expansion (inflation) in a slowly changing vacuum-like state. All elementary particles surrounding us now were produced as a result of t he decay of this vacuum-like state at the end of inflation. Inflation stretched away all previously existing inhomogeneities, but simultaneously it produced new inhomogeneities from t iny quantum fluctuations amplified during the exponential growth of t he universe. These fluctuations served as seeds for the subsequent process of galaxy formation. In certain cases, these quantum fluctuations may become so large that they can be responsible not only for t he formation of galaxies, but also for the formation of new exponentially large parts of t he universe with different laws of low-energy physics operating in each of them . Instead of being a sphere, our universe became an eternally growing fractal, a multiverse consisting of different exponentially large parts. In the beginning, inflationary theory could seem too radical to be true , but during the last two decades many of its predictions were confirmed by cosmological observa-
vi
Foreword to the English edition
tions, and many cosmologists accepted it as a part of the new cosmological par Moreover, after the progress with vacuum st abilization in string theory achi few years ago, the picture of an eternally growing inflationary multiverse consis many exponentially large parts with different properties became a part of what called 'the string theory landscape'. It is clear that further development of cosmology will require knowledge o subjects which traditionally did not belong to the toolbox of a cosmologist. One know not only the general theory of relativity, but also the modern theory of elem particles, quantum field theory, and basic elements of string theory. An add challenge is to relate the new cosmological theory and the rapidly growing observational data. This book by Patrick P et er and J ean-Philippe Uzan successfully solves thi cult problem . It begins with an int roduction to general relativity and modern p physics, which received a powerful boost in the beginning of the 1970s. In Pa the book they describe cosmological theory of a homogeneous and of a sligh homogeneous universe. Then they describe inflationary cosmology. This includ classical theory of a homogeneous inflationary universe , t he theory of inflationa turbations, and t he theory of reheating, which is responsible for the formation elementary particles after inflation. The authors bring it all together in P art III, they discuss grand unification , baryogenesis , supersymmet ry and supergravity, logical phase transitions, various models of inflation, and elements of string This provides an excellent background for further independent studies of t heo and observational cosmology and of the recent work on inflation in string theo on the string t heory landscape. The book is well written , well illustrated and very user-friendly. I am sure will be appreciated not only by students who enter this exciting field of knowled also by experts in cosmology who will be happy to see a unique source of infor covering every important aspect of modern cosmology.
Andrei Linde Stanford University USA
Foreword to the French edition Scientific cosmology was one of the most fascinating intellectual adventures of the twentieth century, and it still is in the twenty-first. It began in the early part of the century when the theoretical work of Albert Einstein, Alexandre Friedmann, and Georges Lemaitre came together with the observational discoveries of Vesto Slipher, Henrietta Leavitt, and Edwin Hubble. But, for many years afterwards, the small quantity and low degree of precision of the observational data was insufficient grist to the mill for theorists, and cosmology made slow progress. This situation began to change during the latter part of the twentieth century. Some remarkable, and often unexpected, observational discoveries - like the detection of cosmic background radiation and the confirmation of the 'dark matter problem' - as well as the gradual increase in the precision of observational data, led to fruitful exchanges between theory and experiment. Interest in cosmology increased at the end of the century when new theoretical paradigms blossomed (e.g. cold dark matter and inflation) together with experimental discoveries that were b eginning to come thick and fast , accompanied by an incredible increase in precision (e.g. anisotropies of the microwave background, the discovery of the acceleration of the rate of expansion). At the present time , cosmology is one of the most active areas of science. In its rapid advance, it mobilizes all the resources of the latest theoretical physics (general relativity, the quantum theory of fields , superstring theory) as well as those of observation (large telescopes, satellites). The present work provides the reader with an invaluable means of access to state-of-the-art cosmology. It only requires very elementary knowledge of the basics (special relativity, non-relativistic quantum mechanics) , and explains in detail all the theoretical tools underpinning modern cosmological research: general relativity, the classic and quantum theories of fields , particle physics, the theories of grand unification. It even includes an introduction to the extensions of standard theories such as, for example, supersymmetric theories, the theory of strings , and brane cosmology. Furthermore, it teaches the reader - in great detail - about the main applications of the most recent theoretical frameworks for the description of fundamental objects of cosmology: the theory of cosmological perturbations , fluctuations in the background radiation , gravitational lenses , the generation of quantum fluctuation during inflation, and topological defects. I have no doubt that this remarkable book by Patrick Peter and Jean-Philippe Uzan will b e of enormous value to a wide readership: students who are beginning research into cosmology or into astroparticle physics; experienced researchers who wish to update their knowledge; and teachers who want a synthesis of the present state of our knowledge of cosmology. All of them will find a great amount of detailed information, presented in a way that is clear and easy to understand. Finally, this is a work written by two bright young researchers that not only transmits the knowledge
viii
Foreword to the French edition
that is necessary in order to understand modern theoretical cosmology and enable i to progress, but also communicates the enthusiasm generated by taking part in a exceptional intellectual adventure whose future promises to be as exciting as its past
Thibault Damour Institut des Hautes Etudes Scientifiques Academy of Sciences France
Acknowledgements We would like to thank our colleagues and collaborators, in particular t hose from the Astrophysics Instit ute in P aris (Institut d 'Astrophysique de Paris). The numerous discussions we shared with them have helped us in clarifying many important issues. We particularly want to thank K arim Benabed , Francis Bernardeau, Fran<;ois Bouchet , 1hstan Brunier , Christos Charmousis, Chris Clarkson, Alain Coc, Cedric Deffayet , Nathalie Deruelle, P eter Dunsby, Ruth Durrer , George Ellis, Gilles Esposito-Farese, Ted J acobson, Lev Kofman , David Langlois, J ean-Pierre Lasota, Roland Lehoucq, Martin Lemoine, Keith Olive, Thiago P ereira , Nelson Pinto-Neto, Alain Riazuelo , Christophe Ringeval, Carlo Schimd , Joe Silk, Ismael Tereno, Alberto Vallinotto, Ludovic van Waerbeke, Filippo Vernizzi and J effrey Weeks. This book would not have been of the same quality without the dedication of some of our colleagues in proofreading and edit ing of t he first manuscript. We thank Nabila Aghanim, Philippe Brax, Bernard Fort , Marc Lilley, J erome Martin, Yannick Mellier , Renaud Parentani , Cyril Pitrou, Simon Prunet, Alain Riazuelo, Jonathan Rocher , Carlo Schimd , Frederic Vincent, and Elisabeth Vangioni , Annick Lesne and Patrizia Castiglione for t heir comments and their help in putt ing together the final version, as well as Laurent Vigroux and t he Institut d 'Astrophysique de Paris for all the support in publishing this book. We would also like to thank Andrei Linde and Thibault Damour for giving us the honour of writing t he forewords t o the English and French editions respectively. We also largely benefited from t heir useful and improving comments.
Contents Foreword to the English edition
v
Foreword to the French edition
vii
Acknowledgements
ix
Introduction Cosmology: an ancient yet contemporary subject The specifics of cosmology Primordial cosmology Organization and objective of this b ook Warnings References PART I
1
1 1 2 2 3
5 6
OVERVIEW OF THE THEORETICAL BASIS
General relativity 1.1 Space-time and gravity 1.1.1 Absolute space and time of Newtonian physics 1.1.2 Space-time of special relativity 1.1.3 General relativity a nd curved space-time 1. 2 Elements of differential geometry 1.2.1 Manifolds and tensors 1.2.2 Geodesic equat ions and Christoffel symbols 1.2.3 Covariant derivative, parallel transport a nd Lie derivative 1.2.4 Curvature 1.2.5 Covariant approach 1.3 Equations of motion 1.3.1 E instein's equ ations 1.3.2 Conservation equations 1.3.3 ADM Hamiltonian formulation 1.4 Geodesics in a curved space-time 1.4.1 Conserved quantities along a geodesic 1.4.2 Geodesic deviation equation 1.5 Weak-field regime 1.5.1 Newtonian limit 1.5.2 Gravit ational waves in an empty space-time 1.6 Tests of general relativity 1.6.1 Test of t he equivalence principle 1.6.2 Tests in the Solar System
11 11 11 14 19 21 21 26 28 31 34 38 38 41 44 46 46 47 49 49 53 55 55 60
XII
2
Contents
1.6.3 Gravitational radiation 1.6.4 Need for t est s at astrophysical scales References
6 6 6
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model 2.1 From classical to quantum 2.1.1 Analytical classical mechanics 2.1.2 Quantum physics 2.1.3 Quantum and relativistic mechanics 2.2 Canonical decompositions 2.2.1 Technical clarification 2.2.2 Real free field 2.2.3 The complex scalar field 2.3 Classification and properties of the elementary particles 2.4 Internal symmetries 2.4.1 Group theory 2.4.2 Generators 2.5 Symmetry breaking 2.5.1 Gauge group 2.5.2 Higgs mechanism 2.5.3 Non-Abelian case 2.6 The standard model SU(3)c X SU(2)L X U(l) y 2.6.1 The strong interaction (QCD) 2.6.2 E lectroweak interaction 2.6.3 A complete model 2.7 Discrete invariances 2.7. 1 Parity 2.7.2 Charge conjugation 2.7.3 Time reversal and CPT theorem References
6 6
PART II
3
6 7
8 8 8
9 9
9
10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12
THE MODERN STANDARD COSMOLOGICAL MODEL
The homogeneous Universe 3.1 The cosmological solution of Friedmann- Lemaitre 3.1.1 Constructing a Universe model 3.1. 2 Cosmologica l and Copernican principles 3.1.3 Cosmological principle and metric 3.1.4 Kinematics 3.1. 5 Space-time dynamics 3.2 Dynamics of Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times 3.2 .1 Some solutions 3.2.2 Dynamical evolut ion 3.2.3 Expansion and contraction 3.3 Time and distances 3.3.1 Age of the Universe and look-back time
12 12 12 13 13 13 13 14
14
14
14
15 15
Contents
4
xiii
3.3.2 Comoving r adial distance 3.3.3 Angular dist ances 3.3.4 Luminosity distance 3.3 .5 Volume and number counts 3.4 Behaviour at small redshifts 3.4.1 Deceleration paramet er 3.4.2 Expression of the time and distances 3.5 Horizons 3.5 .1 Event horizon 3.5.2 P article horizon 3.5.3 Global properties 3.6 Beyond the cosmological principle 3.6.1 Classifying space-times 3.6.2 Universe with non-homogeneous spatial sections 3.6.3 Universe with homogeneous spatial sections References
151 152 154 157 158 158 158 160 160 162 163 167 168 170 171 175
The standard Big-Bang model 4. 1 T he Hubble diagram and the age of t he Universe 4.1.1 The Hubble constant 4.1.2 The contribution of supernOV
177 177 178 182 186 188 188 197 201 204 205 206 208 211 215 216 217 221 226 226 226 228 234 235
xiv
5
Contents
The inhomogeneous Universe Newtonian perturbations 5.l.1 Case of a static space 5.l.2 Case of an expanding space 5.l.3 Predictions and observables 5.l.4 Towards the non-linear regime 5.2 Gauge invariant cosmological perturbation theory 5.2.1 Perturbed space-time 5.2.2 Description of matter 5.2.3 Choosing a gauge 5.2.4 Einstein equations: derivation 5.2.5 Einstein equations: SVT decomposition 5.2.6 Perturbed conservation equation for a fluid 5.2.7 Interpretation of the perturbation equations 5.3 Evolution 5.3.1 Vector and tensor modes 5.3.2 Evolution of the gravitational potential 5.3.3 Scalar modes in the adiabatic regime 5.3.4 Mixture of several fluids 5.4 Power spectrum of density fluctuations 5.4.1 Two equiva lent approaches 5.4.2 Different regimes 5.4.3 Some refinements 5.5 The large-scale structure of the Universe 5.5.1 Observing the large-scale structure 5.5.2 Structures in the non-linear regime References
23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 30
The cosmic microwave background Origin of the cosmic microwave background anisotropies 6.l.1 Sachs- Wolfe formula 6.l.2 Angular power spectrum 6.2 Properties of the angular power spectrum 6.2.1 Large angular scales 6.2.2 Intermediate scales 6.2.3 Small scales 6.2.4 Other effects 6.3 Kinetic description 6.3.1 Perturbed Boltzmann equation 6.3 .2 Gauge invariant expressions 6.3.3 Thomson scattering and polarization 6.3.4 Numerical integration 6.4 Anisotropies of the cosmic microwave background 6.5 Effects of the parameters on the angular power spectrum 6.5.1 Cosmological parameters 6.5.2 Parameters describing the primordial physics
30 30 30 311 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 34 35 35 36 36 36
5.1
6
6.1
Contents
xv
References
371
7
Gravitational lensing and dark matter 7.1 Gravitational lensing and its applications 7.1.1 Gravitational lensing in the thin-lens regime 7.1.2 Lensing by galaxies and galaxy clusters 7.1.3 Gravitational distortion by the large-scale structure 7.1.4 Cosmic convergence 7.1.5 Cosmic shear 7.1.6 Measurement of the cosmic shear 7. 1. 7 Lensing on the cosmic microwave background 7.2 Evidence for the existence of dark matter 7.2.1 Dark matter in galaxies 7.2.2 Dark matter in clusters and groups of galaxies 7.2.3 Cosmological evidence 7.2.4 Summary 7.2.5 Candidates and constraints References
374 374 375 387 395 399 402 405 408 411 411 419 422 423 423 445
8
Inflation 8.1 Genesis of the paradigm 8. 1.1 Original motivations 8.1. 2 Resolution of the Big-Bang problems 8.1.3 F irst models of inflation 8.1.4 Inflation as a de Sitter phase 8.2 Dynamics of single-field inflation 8.2 .1 Equations of evolution 8.2.2 Slow-roll parameters 8.2.3 End of inflation 8.2 .4 Some examples 8.2 .5 Classification of inflationary models 8.3 Quantum fluctuations during inflation 8.3.1 Massless test scalar field in a de Sitter space-time 8.3 .2 Massive test field in de Sitter 8.3.3 Massive test field during slow-roll inflation 8.4 Quantum fluctuations of the inflaton 8.4 .1 Overview of t he questions to address and expected results 8.4.2 Perturbed quantities 8.4.3 Perturbation equations 8.4 .4 Evolution of t he long-wavelength modes 8.4.5 Junction conditions and their applications 8.4 .6 Quantization of the density perturbations 8.4.7 Gravitational waves 8.5 Perturbations in the slow-roll regime 8.5.1 An exact solution: power-law inflation 8.5.2 General case
450 451 45 1 452 454 455 45 7 457 459 463 465 469 470 470 476 477 478 479 479 481 483 485 488 492 494 495 496
xvi
Contents
8.5.3 Relation to observations 8.5.4 Reconstruction of the potential 8.6 End of inflation and reheating 8.6.1 Perturbative reheating 8.6.2 Theory of preheating 8.7 Eternal inflation 8.7.1 Heuristic argument 8.7.2 Stochastic approach 8.8 Extensions 8.8 .1 Multifield inflation 8.8.2 Non-Gaussianity 8.8 .3 Trans-Planckian problem 8.9 Status of the paradigm References PART III 9
BEYO ND T HE STA NDA RD MO DELS
Grand unification and baryogenesis 9.1 Interactions 9.1.1 Superposition principle 9.1.2 N -particle states 9.2 Grand unification 9.2.1 Problems of the standard model 9.2.2 Unification of the coupling constants 9.2.3 Unification models 9.2.4 Consequences of grand unification 9.2 .5 Neutrino mass 9.3 Baryogenesis 9.3.1 Sakharov conditions for baryogenesis 9.3.2 Electroweak anomalies 9.3.3 Electroweak baryogenesis 9.3.4 Leptogenesis 9.3.5 Affleck- Dine mechanism References
10 Extensions of the theoretical framework 10.1 Scalar-tensor theory of gravity 10.1.1 Formulation 10.1.2 Local constraints 10.1.3 Cosmological aspects 10.1.4 Phenomenological aspects 10 .1.5 f(R) gravity and scalar-tensor theory 10.2 Quantum field theory in curved space-time 10.2.1 Quantum physics, classical gravity 10.2.2 P article creation 10.2.3 A complete example
Contents
10.3 Supersymmetry and supergravity 10.3.1 Technical generalities 10.3.2 Wess-Zumino model 10.3.3 Gauge field 10.3.4 Supersymmetry breaking 10.3.5 The minimal supersymmetric standard model (MSSM) 10.3.6 Supergravity References
xvii
604 604 610 614 615 618 621 625
11 Phase transitions and topological defects 11.1 Phase transitions 11 .1.1 Thermal field theory 11.1.2 Dynamics of the symmetry breaking 11.1.3 Formation of topological defects 11.2 Domain walls 11 .2.1 Correlation length 11.2.2 Static configurations 11.3 Vortices 11.3.1 Kibble mechanism for cosmic strings 11.3.2 Internal structure 11.4 Monopoles 11.5 Textures 11.6 Defects in general 11.6.1 Connectedness 11.6.2 Fundamental group 11.6.3 Homotopy group 11.6.4 Semi-topological defects 11.7 Walls in cosmology 11.7.1 Distribution and evolution 11.7.2 Observational constraints 11.8 Cosmological monopoles 11.8.1 GUT monopoles are unavoidable 11.8.2 The monopole problem 11.8.3 Possible solutions to the monopole problem 11.9 Cosmic strings 11.9.1 General properties 11.9.2 Gravitational effects of strings 11.9.3 Effect of a network on the microwave background 11.9.4 Other consequences of cosmic strings References
628 628 628 630 633 635 635 638 640 641 643 647 648 648 649 649 650 651 653 653 655 656 656 656 660 661 661 662 666 671 674
12 Cosmological extensions 12.1 Construction of inflationary models 12.1.1 A consistent model: supergravity 12 .1.2 F-term inflation 12.1.3 D-term inflation
678 678 678 681 683
xviii
Contents
12.2 Cosmological constant and dark energy 12.2.1 The cosmological constant problem 12.2.2 The nature of dark energy 12.2.3 Quintessence 12.2.4 Other models 12.2.5 Other approaches 12.2.6 Parameterization of the equation of state 12.2.7 Implications for the formation of the large-scale structure 12.3 Varying constants 12.4 Topology of the Universe 12.4.1 Local and global structures 12.4.2 Mathematical introduction 12.4.3 Classification of the three-dimensional manifolds 12.4.4 Observational signatures References 13 Advanced topics 13.1 Extra dimensions: Kaluza- Klein theory 13.1. 1 General relativity in D dimensions 13.1.2 Projected equations in four dimensions 13.1.3 Dilaton and Einstein- Maxwell theory 13.1.4 Einstein frame 13.1.5 Compactification 13.2 A few words on string theory 13.2. 1 From particles to strings 13.2 .2 Superstrings 13.2.3 Open and closed strings 13.2.4 Dualities 13.2.5 Low-energy Lagrangians 13.2.6 Origin of three space-like dimensions 13.3 The Universe as a ' brane' 13.3. 1 Motivations 13. 3.2 Induced Einstein equations 13.3.3 The Randall- Sundrum model 13.3.4 Cosmological phenomenology 13.3.5 Possible extensions 13.3.6 The Universe as a defect 13.3.7 Models of induced gravity 13.4 Initial singularity and a bouncing Universe 13.4.1 Approaching the singularity 13.4. 2 The pre-Big-Bang scenario 13.4.3 The cyclic scenarios 13.4.4 Regular bounce and power spectrum References
684 685 687 690 697 701 705 70 711 716 716 71 718 726 733
73 73 73 739 741 742 743 744 74 746 749 752 753 755 758 758 761 76 76 76 769 771 772 772 775 781 785 793
Contents
XIX
Appendix A Numerical values A.1 Physical constants A.2 Astrophysical quantities A.3 Units A.3.1 Natural units A.3.2 Conversion factors A.4 Particle physics A.5 Cosmological quantities A.6 Electromagnetic spectrum References
796 796 796 797 797 798 798 799 799 803
Appendix B Special functions B.1 Euler functions B.2 Spherical harmonics B.2. 1 Definition B.2 .2 Expressions B.2.3 Properties B.2.4 Fourier transform B.2 .5 Useful integrals B.3 Bessel functions B.3 .1 Definition B.3.2 Asymptotic properties B.3.3 Special cases B.3.4 Spherical Bessel functions B.3.5 Some useful integrals B.4 Legendre polynomials B.4.1 Associated Legendre polynomials B.4 .2 Legendre polynomials B.5 Fourier transform and the eigenmodes of the Laplacian B .5.1 Fourier transform B.5.2 Power spectrum B.5.3 Cartesian coordinates B.5.4 Spherical coordinates References
804 804 805 805 805 805 806 807 808 808 808 809 809 810 811 811 811 812 812 812 813 813 815
Appendix C Useful cosmological quantities C.1 Background space C.l.1 Geometry C.l.2 Matter C.2 Perturbed quantities C.2.1 Geometry C.2.2 Matter
816 816 816 817 819 819 821
Index
823
Introduction Cosmology: an ancient yet contemporary subject Over the past few decades, the study of the Universe has undergone great transformations, both theoretical and observational. Cosmology, whose aim is to understand the global properties and large-scale structures of the Universe (their origin, evolution, characteristics ... ) has now entered an era of precision. For many years, cosmology had been a very speculative subject, relying as much on metaphysics as on physics. The development in 1915 of the theory of general relativity gave birth to a consistent theoretical framework, making it possible to mathematically formulate the notion of space and time. It was then possible, as early as in 1924, to formulate cosmological models grounded within this theory. Such models of the Universe, whose main characteristic is to be expanding, enabled many observational features such as the recession of the galaxies, as pointed out by Edwin Hubble, to b e understood. For about twenty years , cosmology confined itself to the description and the reconstruction of this expansion, as well as to debating whether this expansion was real. Within a second period, starting around 1948, studying physical processes in an expanding space led to the formulation of the hot Big Bang model. Taking this expansion seriously, one can deduce from the laws of nuclear physics that the Universe has a thermal history. In particular, the light nuclei must have been formed within the first minutes of the expansion, and there must exist an electromagnetic background radiation. Thanks to these developments, the model stands on three solid foundations, including the confirmation of the expansion. These conclusions only rely on the hypothesis that general relativity is a valid description of the dynamics of the Universe and on the validity of ordinary physics. No other alternative model has to date been able to reproduce these observations, especially not with so few ingredients. Since the 1980s, many developments have brought the Big Bang model to a new level. Not only does it describe the dynamics of the Universe on large scales, but it also attacks questions on the properties and the origin of the large-scale structures. Among the most recent progress, one can mention an explosion of observational data: - since the discovery of the cosmic microwave background in 1965, its observation has become more and more precise, from the initial discovery of the thermal anisotropies by the satellite COBE (COsmic Background Explorer) (1992) to the full-sky map by the satellite WMAP (Wilkinson Microwave Anisotropy Probe) in 2003; - the Hubble diagram, relating the recession speed of galaxies to their redshift, could be extended to large distances , mainly through the observation of distant supernovre;
2
Introduction
- the new galaxy cat alogues now have several thousands of obj ect s, which makes it possible t o map the t hree-dimensional distribut ion of matter ; - since 2000 , new observations have appeared , such as the cosmic shear. One can notice sever al major theoretical developments: - the formulation of the paradigm of inflation that links the origin of the large-scale structure of the Universe to high-energy physics; - the formulation of the cold dark-matter model that represents a framework for the study of the large-scale structure; - a consider able number of indications and observational evidence leading t o the postulat e of the existence of dark matter and dark energy. T he study of their nature will shap e research within t he coming decades.
The specifics of cosmology Despite these developments and the abundance of observations , cosmology nonetheless maintains a different status compared to the other sciences. Only one Universe is indeed observable, and , moreover, from a unique posit ion in space and time. The main part of these observations are therefore confined to our past light cone. Cosmology can t herefore not prevent the use of hypotheses t hat are impossible to check , such as the cosm ological crinciple, which has strong implications concerning cosmological space-time symmetries. The elaboration of a cosmological model relies mainly on t hree hypotheses: (1) the choice of a theory of gravity, (2) hypotheses concerning the na ture of the matt er present in t he Universe and (3) a symmetry hypothesis. One should stress that cosmological observat ions cannot be read independently of these theoretical hypotheses (Figs. 1 and 2) . Therefore the validity of a model cannot be proven , but one can look for a consist ency between observations and the theoretical fr amework wit hin which t hey are read. This does not prevent cosmology from excluding models that give predictions t hat are incompatible with observations, as in any other areas of physics.
Primordial cosmology Primordial cosmology, which will be discussed in t his book, relies on two pillars : numerous astronomical observations made by more and more capable instruments t hat reveal t he local structure of our Universe with an ever-increasing precision, and a set of high-energy physics t heories t hat are expect ed t o describe the dynamics of the primordial Universe. We t herefore have to deal wit h a two-way process (Fig. 2). On t he one hand (arrow labeled ' 1 '), using some high-energy physics hypotheses, one can build a phenomenological model for the primordial Universe. This model must provide the properties of the primordial fluctuations that give birth, through gravitational inst ability, t o the large-scale structure of the Universe. We should therefore be able to predict t he resulting propert ies of the Universe. Comparing a specific model wit h different sets of observations allows us to constrain it . On the other hand (arrow labeled '2'), t hese models bring solut ions to t he problems encountered while interpreting the observations: the nature of dark mat ter , of dark energy, etc.
Organization and objective of this book
3
Cosmological model • Gravity theory • Space- time • Matter content
I~'" "0'0, .
';>/"
Direct observations • Redshi ft • Count • Angles, magnitudes, ...
Indirect observations • Abundances • Ages • Density · CMS ,...
Fig. 1 The construction of a cosmological model and its link with observations. Most observations cannot be interpret ed outside this model. Thanks to these t heories, we hope to be able to reproduce the observations, and on the other hand , to use these observations to constrain the theories when they are extrapolated to experimentally inaccessible energies .
Organization and objective of this book The aim of this book is to provide t he tools for primordial cosmology, to describe its state and the current questions. It is organized into three parts. The first part reviews t he useful basis for the study of cosmology. The second part focuses on the standard cosmological model. It represents the heart of this book and we have tried to describe in detail all the technical aspects. The third part describes the extensions of this standard model and sheds light on the subjects currently under discussion. The first part reviews the required theoretical notions. Indeed , since standard cosmology is based on the theories of general relativity and on the standard model of particle physics, Chapters 1 and 2 will provide an overview of these two areas. We try to distinguish between what is well established and the murkier areas of the current theories. The different extensions of these standard frameworks play an important role for the elaboration of models of the primordial Universe. It is thus important to demarcate the limits of these areas . The second part presents the standard cosmological model. Chapters 3 and 4 draw up the most common cosmological solutions of general relativity and the hot Big Bang model. Chapter 3 is mainly mathematical while Chapter 4 focuses on the physics. These two parts consider only a homogeneous and isotropic Universe without taking account of t he structure present in t he Universe. This standard model will be our reference model. We will discuss its successes and its problems. The study of the large-scale structure of the Universe is developed in Chapter 5, which is the undeniable technical heart of primordial cosmology. Cosmological perturbation theory describes how initial perturbations evolve in an expanding Universe.
4
Introduction
High energies • Theoretica l arguments
• SUS¥, SUGRA
• Superstrings
Mode ls
1 2
Primordial cosmology
Solutions
1
Parameters
Observational cosmology • Large sca le stmctures
• Microwave background • Dark malter
Fig. 2 Primordial cosmology constructs phenomenological models t hat are inspired fro
high-energy physics in order to describe the Universe. It looks for mechanisms able t o describ the primordial phases of our Universe, t he origin of large-scale structures and of the matt e content of our Universe. Each model must produce observational predictions. In return, ob servational cosmology makes it possible to measure t he parameters of these models and t set, in the b est cases, some constraints on the initial t heories.
We will establish the equations of this theory and discuss its solutions within som regimes. Our book does not focus much on the observational aspects of cosmology, nev ertheless Chapters 6 and 7 are dedicated to the computation of two fundament observational predictions. Our aim is to make the reader able to compute these pre dictions within a given model. Chapter 6 describes the computation of the angula power spectrum of the cosmological microwave background temperature anisotropie and Chapter 7 focuses on gravitational lensing effects and on the proofs of the existenc of dark matter. Chapter 8 develops the inflation paradigm . This paradigm is fu ndamental to ex plain the origin of the large-scale structure and it appears to be not only consisten with all observations, but also to be the only mechanism so far capable of reproducin these observations. The hot Big Bang model associated with inflation provides ou reference model of the Universe. This chapter describes the general properties of infla tionary models and analyses in detail the computation of the primordial fluctuation spectrum , mainly within the slow-roll approximation. We will also address the rehea ing mechanisms that make t he transition between the inflationary Universe , the ho Big Bang, and the idea of eternal inflation.
Warnings
5
The third part addresses different extensions of these standard formalisms, for both the fundamental theories and the cosmological framework itself. Chapter 9 focuses on grand unified theories and on their consequences for the understanding of the origin of ordinary matter , the so-called baryogenesis . Chapter 10 describes different extensions of the theoretical framework that have consequences for cosmology. We first describe the scalar-tensor theories of gravity. These theories represent the simplest extension of general relativity and include, besides the graviton, a scalar interaction. These models are motivated by numerous high-energy theories, such as string theory, for which the low-energy action is usually a scalar-tensor theory. We then describe the basis of quantum field theory in curved space-time. This will place the computations made in Chapter 8 on more solid ground. Finally, we will describe supersymmetry and supergravity as extensions to the standard model of particle physics. These theories have many candidates for dark-matter particles and have many scalar fields , which makes them relevant for the elaboration of inflationary models. Chapter 11 addresses the issue of phase transitions during the primordial Universe and describes models of topological defects generated during phase transitions with symmetry breaking. These relics can play an important role during the early Universe even if we now know that they cannot be responsible for the origin of the large-scale structure as we observe it. The two last chapters describe the different implications of these extensions for cosmology. Chapter 12 draws the consequences from supersymmetry for the construction of inflationary models. We will then address the question of the origin of the acceleration of our Universe. Chapter 13 focuses on the phenomenology of string theory for the primordial Universe. These subjects are still currently debated by researchers and our aim is to sketch their motivations and characteristics.
Warnings In order to avoid an overflow of references in the text, we have made the choice of citing in this book mainly detailed reviews and texts that we judge to be clear and pedagogical or where a complete bibliography can be found . As for the numerical values of the cosmological parameters deduced from different analyses, these values should be taken with great care, as they depend: (1) on the set of chosen observations, (2) on the model we compare with these observations and for instance on the number of parameters allowed to vary, and (3) on which kind of statistical analysis has been used. The values we quote should be considered more as rough indications rather than the latest values to remember. We also point out that observations are developing rapidly such that some conclusions, for instance on dark matter , may change on the time scale of a year .
References For a discussion on the background of the formula tion of cosmological models:
[1] G.F .R. ELLIS, 'Cosmology and verifiability', Q. J1. A str. Soc. 16 , 245- 264 , 1975 [2] H . BONDI, Cosmology, Cambridge Monograph on Physics, 1961. [3] G .F.R. ELLIS, 'Issues in the philosophy of cosmology' , astro -ph/0602280. Introductory books for cosmology:
[4] E.R. HARRISON , Cosmology, the science of the Universe, Cambridge Universit Press, 2000. [5] J. BERNSTEIN , Introduction to cosmology , Englewood Cliffs, 1995. [6] A. LIDDLE, An introduction to modern cosmology, John Wiley and Sons, 1999. [7] B. RIDDEN , Introduction to cosmology, Addison Wesley, 2003. [8] S. WEINBERG, The first three minutes, Bantam Books, 1977. [9] E.R. HARRISON, Darkness at night: a riddle of the Universe, Harvard Universit Press, 1987. Books of the history of modern cosmology:
[10] H. KRAUGH, Cosmology and controversy, Princeton University Press, 1996 . [11] J .P. L UMINET, A lexandre Friedmann, Georges Lemaitre, Essais de cosmo1ogie Seuil, 1997. Reference books in cosmology:
[12] P.J. E. PEEBLES, Physical cosm ology, Princeton University Press, 1971. [13] P.J. E. PEEBLES, Principle of physical cosmology, Princeton University Press 1993. [14] S. WEINBERG, Gravitation and cosmology: principles and applications of the gen eral th eory of relativity, John Wiley and Sons, 1972. [15] E.W. KOLB and M.S. T URNER, The early Universe, Addison Wesley, 1993. [16] T. PADMANABHAN, Str uct ure form ation in the Universe, Cambridge Universit Press, 1993. [17] S. DODELSON , Mo dern cosmology, Academic Press, 2003. [18] J . RICH , Fundam en tals of cosmology, Springer, 200l. [19] J.A. PEACOK, Cosmological physics, Cambridge University Press, 1998. [20] A.R. LIDD LE and D.H. LYTH, Cosmological inflation and large-scale structure Cambridge University P ress, 2000. [2 1] V.F. MUKHANOV , Physical foundations of cosmology, Cambridge University Pres 2005.
References
7
For astrophysical complements: [22] T. PADMANABHAN , Theoretical astrophysics (3 volumes), Cambridge University Press, 2002. [23] J. BINNEY and S. TREMAINE, Galactic dynamics, Princeton University Press, 1987. [24] M.S. LONGAIR, Galaxy formation, Springer-Verlag, 1998.
Part I Overview of the theoretical basis
1 Genera I relativity Since gravity is the only long-range force t hat cannot be screened , the properties of the Universe on large scales will be essentially determined by this for ce. The goal of this chapter is not to present a complete and rigorous description of the theory of general relativity. Such detailed explanations exist in the literature and we refer the reader to them for more details; see Refs. [1- 5J. Here we want to recall the basic hypotheses and formulas of general relativity that are necessary for the rest of this book. We recall in Section 1.1 the evolution of the mathematical concept of space-time from Newtonian physics to general relativity. Section 1.2 summarizes the main definitions of the mathematical tools used in general relativity. We derive Einstein equations that determine the dynamics of space-time and the conservation equations that determine the evolut ion of matter in Section 1.3 and we show in Section 1. 5 how Newtonian gravity is recovered in a weak-field limit. Section 1.4 describes the kinetics in curved space-time and we summarize the various tests of general relativity in Section 1.6. The other fundamental interactions, such as electromagnetic, weak and strong interactions, are discussed in chapter 2.
1.1 1.1.1
Space-time and gravity Absolute space and time of Newtonian physics
In Newtonian physics, space is described by an absolute and immutable mathematical space. This space is E uclidean in 3 dimensions. We can therefore endow it with an origin and with 3 arbitrary reference axes, thus determining an absolute frame of reference. Time is also ideal a nd absolute. It is independent of the motion of any observer and plays the role of an external parameter. For any event P, there exists an int uitive notion of simultaneity (defined as a set of all events that occur at the same t ime). If we consider a second event Q there are three possible outcomes: (1) one can in principle go from P to Q, Q therefore belongs to the future of P , (2) one can in principle go from Q to P, Q therefore belongs to the past of P and (3) it is impossible to travel between P and Q, t he two events are t herefore simultaneous. T his causal structure of Newtonian space-time is represented in Fig. 1.1. Since space is assumed E uclidean, P ythagoras ' theorem would permit us t o calculate the distance between two neighbouring points (1.1 )
12
General relativity
Time
Fig. 1.1 The causal structure of Newtonian space-time. If Q can be related to P by trajectory Xi(t) with finite speed (dxi/dt < (0) , Q is in the past or the future of P, otherwis it is simultaneous. The set of all simultaneous events is a three-dimensional Euclidean space
in Cartesian coordinates. We can rewrite this distance in shorter form as 3
d£2 = L(dxif = L6ij dx i dx i= l
j
== 6ij dx i dx j ,
(1.2
ij
where 6ij is the Kronecker symbol equal to 1 if i = j and 0 otherwise, and th latin indices i , j ... = 1 .. . 3. This form introduces the Einstein summation conventio according to which we implicitly assume a sum over all repeated indices. For example if T and V are two vectors, T· V == Ti Vi = 6ij T i Vj = T1 V 1 + T2V2 + T 3 V 3 is th scalar product of t hose two vectors. The trajectory of any body is therefore given in the parametric form by xi (t). Th travel time from point A at tA to point B at t B is given by tA - t B and is independen of the trajectory between A and B. Laws of physics do not necessarily require Cartesian coordinates. One can , fo example, use spherical or cylindrical coordinates if they are better adapted to th problem at hand. Let us suppose that we have a system of coordinates (yi) relate to Cartesian coordinates (xj) by a relationship of the form x j (yi). The vector d of coordinates dx i in the Cartesian syst em has coordinat es dyi = (8yi/8xj)dxj; w therefore deduce that the distance between two neighbouring points, in any coordinat system , is
(1.3
gij being the metric of space in the new coordinates . For example, spherical coordinate (r , cp) are defined by
e,
x
= r sin ecos cp , y = r sin esin cp,
z
= r cos e.
Applying (1.3) , we deduce that the only non-zero components of the metric in spherica coordinates are
Space-time and gravity grr
= 1,
gee
= r2 ,
g
13
. 28 = r 2 SIn .
The line-element (1.2) takes the form
1.1.1.1
Galilean group
The choice of the reference frame is arbitrary. It is thus interesting to exhibit the frame transformations that preserve the form (1.1) of the line element dC 2 . It is equivalent to finding the coordinate transformations keeping the 3 axes of reference orthogonal. The set of these transformations is therefore given by the rigid rotations of these three axes and a translation of the origin (1.4) The rotation Aj can be time dependent, but it is rigid because it is independent of the position x j ; it is therefore the same for all points at a given time. Tj is a timedependent translation. The invariance under the action of these transformations (1.4) reflects the isotropy and the homogeneity of E uclidean space. Among all these rigid transformations , those of the Galilean group playa central role. The Galilean group is the subgroup of t ime-independent rotations and of translations linear in time, Ti = To-vit , where Td and Vi are constant vectors , hence preserving the equivalence between inertial frames. The laws of physics are assumed to be identical for all inertial reference frames , which means that they are invariant under the action of a transformation of the Galilean group (1.5) This group is composed of three rotations , three translations and three changes of the inertial reference frames. Taking also the possibility to change the origin of time, it is therefore ten parameters group (three angles , a vector with three translation coordinates, one velocity vector and a change in the origin of t ime). 1.1.1.2 Trajectory of a massive body The equations of motion of a body of mass m evolving in a gravitational potential ¢ can be obtained by determining the extremum of the Lagrangian constructed from the total energy of the particle (1.6) where we have considered that the inertial m ass, m[ , and the gravitational mass, m G , could a priori be different. The Euler- Lagrange equations [c5L / c5xi d(bL/bxi)/dt] are rewritten in any coordinate system as l ISee the following chapter for a brief reminder of analytical mechanics and Ref. [5] for a complete and detailed study.
14
General relativity
(1.7
In Cartesian coordinates, gij = Oij and ffj = O. We therefore recover the equations o motion in their classical form x = - V ¢;, when m[ = mG' Symbols ffj represent the fictitious forces (centrifugal, Coriolis ... ) that have to be taken into account when the reference frame is not inertial. Also , note that (1. 7) is independent of the mass of the body if m[ = m G ; all bodie fall identically, whatever their mass or chemical composition. This is what is called the weak equivalence principle or universality of free fall. Actually, in the Newtonian case it is a priori possible to introduce two different masses and the equality between the gravitational mass and the inertial mass seems fortuitous. Using pendulums, Newton (1686) showed that ImG - m[ I
m G+ m [
<
10-
3.
(1.8
The equality between the gravitational and the inertial mass was therefore only required up to one thousandth. However, Newton considered this equality to be the crux of his theory of gravitation and he dedicated the introduction of his Principia to it. As we will see, this property plays a central role in the construction of theories o gravitation. 1.1.2
Space-time of special relativity
The Maxwell laws of electromagnetism have the property of not being invariant unde the Galilean group (1.5). For example, the electric force generated by a charge at res is not invariant since a magnetic force appears in a reference frame where the source is in inertial motion (see, for example, Ref. [6]). On the other hand, Maxwell deduced from his theory that light is an electromagnetic wave whose velocity of propagation, c depends on the permittivity and the permeability of the medium. One had to introduce a fictitious medium in which these waves could propagate; the aether. The Maxwel equations would only be valid in this particular reference frame, identified with the absolute reference system of Newton. In a different inertial reference frame the speed o light should therefore have been measured as c ± v, which opened up the possibility o determining the absolute reference frame , that of the aether , at the price of abandoning the principle of Galilean relativity. 1.1 .2.1
Lorentz transformations
The experiments by Michelson and Morley (1887) refuted the above-mentioned hy pothesis; light was shown to have the same speed of propagation in any given inertia reference frame. In 1905, Einstein changed this perspective by reaffirming the principle of special relativity according to which all the laws of nature should have the same form , no matter what the inertial reference frame is (see for example Ref. [7] for the historical aspects). In particular, this should have been the case for the Maxwell equations, which implied that the speed of light should be the same in all inertial reference
Space-time and gravity
15
frames. Consequently, one deduced that the rules for changing the inertial frame can not be those of Galileo (1.5). The new group of transformations is the Lorentz group. An inertial observer can label an event by considering a rigid Euclidean reference frame, which allows him to determine the Cartesian coordinat es x, y , z . At every point in that grid, he can place a synchronized clock in such a way that all events are labelled by a quadruplet (t, x, y , z). A second observer in an inertial reference frame moving at a velocity v along the Ox axis with respect to the first observer can also construct such a coordinate system . It permits him to identify the same events by another quadruplet (tl ,xl , yl ,ZI). The two sets of coordinat es are relat ed by the Lorentz transformation , called a boost , ctl =
Xl
yl
=
=
ct - (v/c) x
J1 - v2 /c 2 ' X -
(v/c)ct
J1 - v2 /c 2 ' y,
Zl = Z.
(1.9)
These transformations have the property of reducing to Galilean transformations when v « c and keep the speed of light equal to c in all inertial reference frames .
1.1 .2.2 Minkowski space-time Special relativity postulates that all inertial observers are equivalent , the sets of coordinates determined by different observers have no intrinsic meaning. The invariant quantity upon changing the reference frame is obtained by considering a pseudo-Euclidean version of P ythagoras ' theorem. The line-element (1.1) is replaced by the line-element between two events, in Minkowski coordinates, of space-time (1.10) with x O == ct. The Greek indices vary between 0 and 3 and the Einst ein summation convention is extended to these values. We note that contrary to the Euclidean metric, ds2 can be negative or vanish for non-coincident events. In this fr amework, space and time are united into a space-time, the Minkowski space-time. This space-time is absolute, just as in the Newtonian framework. It is endowed with four orthonormal axes constituting the absolute Minkowski reference frame. The set of points such that ds 2 = 0 is known as the light cone and represents , for all points M in the space-time, the ensemble of points that can receive a light beam emitted in M (future light cone) or received in M (past light cone). This light cone determines the causal structure of Minkowski space-time illustrat ed in Fig. 1.2. Indeed, since the velocity of all bodies is smaller than c, only pairs of points (M, P ) such that ds 2 < 0, in other words such that M is at the interior of the light cone in P, can be joined by traj ectories ema nating from P. The dist ance is then time-like and the proper t ime T is generally introduced by the relation (1.11)
j
-----.. UNIVERSIDAD . ',
j
\
1
AU'TONOMA DE
MADPJO ru!3tlOr~ GEI'~a.~
16
General relativity
If ds 2 > 0, t he interval is said t o be space-like and the points of t he couple (M, P cannot be joined by any physical trajectory.
Fig. 1.2 T he causal structure of Minkowski space-t ime. The not ion of simultaneity is re placed by the notion of a light cone defined by d s 2 = O. T he worldline Xi>( A) emanating from P is found at t he interior of t he light cone (d s 2 < 0) . All points exterior to t he cone can neve be joined by a physical t rajectory leaving from P. They are separated from P by a sp ace-lik interval (d s 2 > 0) .
1.1 .2.3
Proper time
The trajectory of any massive part icles can be represented in the parametric form xl-' (A ) , where A is an arbit rary paramet er (increasing towards infinity) . We can repa rameterize t his worldline as a function of the proper time
where U I-' = dxl-' I dA is t he tangent vector to t he worldline. In t his new parameteriza tion , t he t angent vector is given by u l-' = dxl-' I dT and it satisfies
Let us now consider an observer 0 ' that moves wit h a velocity v with respect to a inertial reference frame, 5 , where an inertial observer 0 is locat ed . As 0 is motionless its t rajectory is given by Xi = const and its proper t ime is dT~= dt2.
The moving observer 0 ' has a tra jectory such that dx i I dt = reference frame 5. Its proper time is thus
Vi
with respect to th
Space-time and gravity
2 2 i ' 2 dTO' = dt - b;j dX dx J Ie =
(
17
V2 ) dt.
1 - e2
2
In conclusion, the proper times measured by two observers 0 and 0' , obtained by eliminating t he time coordinate, are related by
dTO' =
V~ 1 - ~ dTO·
(1.12)
Thus, contrary to the Newtonian case, t he duration of the journey measured by 0 is not the same as that measured by 0' , depending on their t raj ectories. If the clocks of o and 0' have been initially synchronized , they will not be synchronous at another meeting point. This is what is called the phenomenon of time dilation.
1.1 .2.4 Poincare group Just as in the Newtonian case, the metric (1.10) can be written in any coordinate system (ylt) that is related to Minkowski coordinates (XV) by a relation of the form XV (ylt) . A vector dx v in Minkowski space has the coordinates dylt = (aylt I ax 1.1 )dxl.l . We thus deduce that the line-element (1.10) has the form
(1.13) For example, we can consider the Rindler coordinat es, relat ed to Minkowski coordinates by
t = RsinhT,
x = R cosh T ,
y
=
y' ,
z = z' .
The line-element (1.13) then takes the form
The laws of physics should be, according to the principle of special relativity, independent of any preferred inertial reference frame. It is therefore important to exhibit transformations of the reference frame that preserve the form (1.10). These particular transformations constitute the Poincare group and take the form
(1.14) where the rotation matrices A ~ and the vector Tit do not depend on the coordinates. Note that this group of transformations is more constrained than the Galilean group in which the rotations could depend on time. This Poincare group consists of 3 rotations , three Lorentz boosts and four translations. It therefore has 10 degrees of freedom , which means that 10 values are needed to completely describe any transformation of the group.
18
General relativity
1.1.2.5
Poincare algebra
The Poincare group can be constructed using infinitesimal transformations. Let u first consider a simple transformation of vector TI-' = 5xl-' and write the transformatio (1.14) for a scalar function f(x) in the form f (yl-') = (1 - i5x cx Pcx ) f (xl-'). This relatio defining the generator PI-" we get PI-' = i0l-' by identification with a first-order Taylo expansion of the function f(y). Equivalently, a Lorentz transformation can be writte yl-' = xl-' + w~xv, with WVI-' = -wI-'V, and the generator JI-'V is obtained using th definition f (yl-') = (1 - iw cx {3 J cx {3 ) f (xl-') , which gives JI-'V = i (x l-'0V - xv0l-'), Other representations of the Poincare group are possible, but all of them respec the following commutation relations , which form the Poincare algebra:
(1.15 for the translations, and
(1.16
which is the Lorentz algebra, itself independently closed. Let us recall that the com mutator between two operators is defined by [A,B] = AB - BA.
1.1.2.6
Trajectory of a free body
In an analogous way to the Newtonian case, the trajectory of a massive free body ca be obtained by ext remising the action L
=
1
-g 2 I-'V (XA):i;I-':i;V ,
(1.17
where a dot above a variable represents a derivative with respect to A. Euler- Lagrang equations then take the form
(1.18
where ul-' = dxl-' Id A and ill-' = dul-' IdA. In Minkowski coordinates, we find that a inertial observer must follow a trajectory of constant velocity
(1.19
Note the analogy with the massive body case in (1.6) , but also the difference: in the cas of (1.17), it is not possible to simply introduce a t erm equivalent to the gravitationa potential.
1.1.3.1 Equivalence principle Einstein based his analysis on the fact that in Newtonian gravity all test objects fall in exactly the sarie way in an externai gravitational field, whatever their mass or chemical couipositiorr.
In Galilean and Newtonian physics, this universality of free fall conles from the eqrrality betwcen the inertial rriass arrd the gravitational mass, the equivalence principle [cf. (t.8)]. This equality may seeni accidental, but it is verified experimentally with high accuracy. In the Ner'vtonian casc. a smail deviation fiom this equality would not be catastrophic. Is this equivalence principle a good approximation, a simple coincidence or does it signal something more profound? Einsteiri corisiderecl the study of accelerated motion. At first glance, it could seem that objects are following clifferent laws of physics, since one rreeds to add fictitious forces (inertia, Coriollis...) to describe their dynarrics. For Einstein. these forces are just as real as the force of gravity since the iatter can also be eliminated in a free-fall reference fra,rne. Thus, an accelerated observer is subiect to the same laws of physics as those encor.rntered in the gravitational field, introduced in addition to the other forces. Everything happens as if one could free orreself from gravity by an astute choice of the reference frame. This is possible only if the equivalencc principle is strictly valid. Eirrsteirr thelefbre elevated it to the status ofa first principlc. This property teaches us that the 'confusion'
between gravity trnd acceleration is not accidental: it is a fundamental property of gravity. Note that tliis property only applies to gravity and to no other force of nature (in thc case of electrornagnetism, for instance. the acceleration in a given electric field rn'ould depend on thc ratio between charge anci rnass, which varies from particle to particle). The equivalence principle errsures that one can alu'ays find locally a reference frame in which the force of gravity is eliminated.
1.1.3.2 Tidal forces and space-time curvature
It
seerns as though gravit"l' has disappearecl. In fact, as we ernphasized, such an op* eration is possible only locally. As an example, let us consider a body A orbiting around the trarth at a distance rr. Its Newtonian acceleration is ao : -G*NI6rof r). A neiglibouring body B, orbitirrg according lo rt - rnl6r experiences a relative acceleration with respect to the body A
(d, _ 6ao, q41e r')\ri/ rt, _dtr,)
20
General relativity
at first order in Or . This relative acceleration cannot be cancelled out. If r A-or = body B approaches body A and if r A . Or = ±rAor, it moves away. Thus, a sm sphere in orbit would slowly deform into a type of ellipsoidal cigar , while conserv its volume. This distortion characterizes the tidal forces. We have seen that in the Newtonian and Minkowskian frameworks , the trajector a free particle corresponds to a path that minimizes t he length of a trajectory betw two points. Even though we can eliminate gravity locally, neighbouring trajector have a tendency to converge or diverge from each other. In a flat space-time, o one body can free itself from gravity and the fictitious forces. However, in cur space-time it is possible to consider that all the bodies are free and follow the line minimum length. Gravity and fictitious forces disappear for all bodies at the expe of postulating a new property of space. In this framework , all bodies follow the lines of shortest path and gravity has loc vanished for each one of them. However , since this is possible only locally, neighbour geodesics reveal the curvature of space-time. Gravity has therefore not disappeared is simply hidden in the curvature of the space-time, which explains the tidal forces a novel way. This heuristic example shows us that by introducing a curved space-time we eliminate all the fictitious forces related to the choice of a non-inertial reference fram at the expense of introducing a curvature for the space. The trajectory of all fr falling bodies, i. e. those subj ect to gravity alone, can be obtained as a geodesic, a of shortest path, in curved space-time. Accordingly, all reference frames, inertial not , are placed on the same footing, which allows us to reconcile gravity and spe relativity. This construction is however only possible because acceleration does depend on the mass of the particles in free fall, which provides a glimpse into relationship between t he universality of free fall and the geometrization of gravity.
1.1. 3.3
Gravity as a m anifestation of geom etry
Einstein's equivalence principle is at the heart of all metric theories of gravitati which includes amongst others the theory of general relativity. It is based on th conditions:
• the weak equivalence principle (or the universality of free fall) according to wh the trajectory of a neutral test body is independent of its internal structure a its composition. This body must have a negligible binding gravitational ene and be sufficiently small such that the inhomogeneities of the gravitational fi can be ignored; • the local position invariance according to which the result of all non-gravitatio experiments is independent of the point in space-time where the experiment to place; • the local Lorentz invariance according to which the results of non-gr avitatio experiments are independent of the motion of the laboratory as long as it is f falling.
One can argue (see, for example, Ref. [8]) that if the Einstein equivalence princi is valid then gravitation is the physical manifestation of a curved space-time, i.e
Elements of differential geometry
21
metric theory. Such a theory has t he following three properties: • the geometry of space-time is described by a metric, • free bodies follow the geodesics of that geometry, • in a local reference fr ame in free fall , the laws of physics t ake the same form as in special relativity. This implies that the contribution ofthe binding energies of the three non-gravitational interactions to the mass is the same for a gravitational mass and an inertial mass. It could be asked whether this property can be generalized to the gravitational binding energy itself. This leads t o the formulation of the strong equivalence principle. If the gravitational binding energy contribut es equally to the inertial and gravitational mass then it is possible t o eliminate t he external gravitational field. This can be achieved in a locally inert ial reference frame in which all the laws of Nature , gravitation included, have the same form as in the absence of an ext ernal field. This principle seems poorly defined and coarse: it implies a gravitational law that has as yet not been defined. A theory of gravitation that satisfies this principle is necessarily non-linear since the gravitational field 'weights' and generat es a secondary gravitational field , etc. General relativity and the Nordstr0m scalar theory are examples of theories that satisfy this principle (see Ref. [8]) . Since these principles are central t o the construction of general relativity, it is indeed importa nt to test them (see Section l.6).
1.2
Elements of differential geometry
The heuristic argument of t he preceding paragraph shows that we can describe the motion of a free-falling body (that is, a body on which no other force but gravity is acting) by a geodesic in a four-dimensional curved sp ace-time. Space-time is therefore described by a four-dimensional continuum so that one would need four values t o locate each event , just as in special relativity. In the Newtonian framework and in special relativity, this is assumed to be globally valid so that an ensemble of events can be mapped bijectively with JR.4. In general relativity we do not want t o make such a strong hypothesis about the structure of space-time before having determined it. This situation is analogous to the description of a sphere in two dimensions: we need two numbers to characterize the position of all points. Locally, the sphere looks like a plane JR.2 but globally it does not . The space-time of general relativity will t herefore be modelled as a four-dimensional manifold, that is, a space with four dimensions that locally looks like JR.4 but not necessarily globally (like in the case of a sphere in two dimensions). 1.2.1
Manifolds and tensors
Here, we define the notions of manifolds and tensors in a formal way. The two following sections can eventually be skipped and the reader can directly go t o the rules of tensorial calculus derived in the t hird section. 1.2.1.1 Manifolds To define a manifold , let us recall t hat an open set of JR.n is a set that can be defined as the finite union of open balls of JR. n . Such a ball of radius r centred at y = (Yl , . . . , Yn )
22
General relativity
is defined as the set of points x such that Ix - yl < T . A manifold is a space consisting of neighbourhoods that are locally like IR n an that can be continuously glued together. More precisely, a manifold M is a collectio {Od of sets that satisfy the following three properties:
1. for all points p of M, there exists at least one set Oi containing p , which mean
that {Oi} covers M, 2. for all i, there exists a homeomorphism 'lfJi from Oi into a subset Ui of IR n , tha is a continuous map that associates all points p of Oi to n-tuplet of real number that we shall call coordinates of p in the map 'lfJi, 3. if two sets Oi and OJ have a non-empty intersection, then the map 'lfJj 0 'lfJi that maps the points of 'lfJi( Oi n OJ) C Ui into 'lfJj (Oi n OJ) C Uj is an infinitel differentiable function on IRn.
Examples of manifolds are the Euclidean plane 1R2, which needs only one chart (iden tity), or a sphere that requires two charts.
M
Ij/j
Fig. 1.3 Illustration of the relationship between different charts of the same manifold. Lo cally, one can relate M and IR n but globally this is only possible if we use a collection o charts (an atlas) that cover all the manifold.
1.2.1.2
Vectors
The Euclidean space in Newtonian physics is a vector space. However, this structur is lost in curved spaces, such as that of a sphere, but can be recovered in the limit o
Elements of differential geometry
23
infinitesimal displacements. In lR. n there is a bijective map between vectors and directional derivatives and each vector y = (yl, ... , yn) defines a derivative yJ.1.(%xJ.1.), in any arbitrary coordinate system (xJ.1.). In the manifold M , consider the set F of Coo functions of M in R We can then define the tangent vector y at a point p in M as a map of F into lR., which is linear and satisfies the Leibniz rule 1. y (a ] + bg) = ay(J) + by(g ) for all ], 9 in F and all a, bin lR. , 2. y(Jg ) = ](p)y(g) + g(p)y(J).
The set of tangent vectors at point p forms a vector space Vp [since (Yl + Y2)(J) = Yl(J) + Y2(J) and (ay)(J) = ay(J)] of the same dimension as t he manifold. We can construct a basis {X J.1.} of Vp by considering the map from F to lR. defined by
We usually call XJ.1. simply %xJ.1. or 0J.1. ' such t hat all vectors y can be expressed, using the Einstein summation convention, in the form (l.20) where yJ.1. are the components of y. The tangent vector to a curve] with coordinates xJ.1. (T) is then given by the application
so that t = tIJ.0IJ. with tIJ. = dxIJ.(T)/dT . In a coordinate transformation of the form (l.21) we have, for all ] E F , 01/ ] = (OI/XIIJ.)(O~]). We thus deduce that the elements of the basis are transformed according to (l.22) so that the components of all vectors y transform according to (l.23) which is the standard formula for the coordinate transformation that we have used previously.
1.2.1.3 Tensors The notion of tensor is a generalization of that of a vector , when one considers quantities that have mult ilinear dependencies under an infinitesimal transformation.
24
General relativity
Fig. 1.4 The tangent sp ace of a two-dimensional sphere is a plane whose basis is given b ee = 8e and e'P = 8'P '
Given a vector space Vp, one can construct a dual space Vp* composed of the linea maps from Vp to R This new vector space has a basis ylJ.* that can be defined b specifying their action on the elements of a basis y IJ. of Vp
In particular, dx" represents the basis of Vp* associated with the basis OJ.' of Vp. dx should therefore satisfy dx" (01J.) = 6~
and it associates any vector y to its component y" defined by dx" (y) = y". In coordinate transformation , dxlJ. thus transforms as the components of a vector
(l.24
A tensor T of rank (r , q) is a multilinear map from (Vpy x (Vp*)q to lR such that
(l.25
where ® is the t ensor product. Such an object is said to be r times contravarian and q times covariant. In particular, a tensor of rank (0,0) is a scalar whose valu is independent of the system of coordinates, a tensor of rank (1 , 0) is a vector an a t ensor of rank (0,1) is a I-form. Using the transformation laws for vectors and 1 forms, we can deduce that in a coordinate transformation, the components of a tenso transform as
between two neighbouring points. The metric A should therefore be a symmetric and non-degenerate tensor of rank (0, 2). The line-element between two events is then given
by 1ds2
: grrd.rpdr"
(t.27)
,
where g* is the metric tensor; it is syrnmetric and has hence 10 components. From the previous results, we can deduce that it transforms as
0ro \tP , gp": Artt"
(1.28)
6*n9a0'
This expression is analogous to the one obtained in the Euclidean or Minkowski cases. In particular) we can deduce that the determinant of the metric g : detg1,,, transforms
o'-
[a"t
(#)]' '
(1.2e)
1.2.1.4 Tensor calculus Tensors are thus a generaiization of the notion of vectors. Tensors of the sarne rank can be added
nfl l; - sii i: + r1,"\,
,
and one can multiply tensors of different ranks to obtain a tensor of higher rank
Rll
y:
: sli !:r!:i,"1""
The indices can be contracted to form a tensor whose rank is lowered by
Ri:
i: sili] i{
2
s!,,,1,, ,1n,6i,,.
This operation reduces to sum over the repeated index. This allows us to define a scalar by contracting all the indices. In particular, TpV, - g*,VpT" represents the scalar product of two vectors. We conclude tha| Tlr'..,\' is a tensor if and only if its contraction with any tensor of the forrn RLtr...}, is an invariant. The metric can be r-rsed to raise or lower the indices Rltt...l-lrlt r,2...rc :
In Particular, Tt" - gtt'7,.
Rl,t
pr
rrrr...rngr,p
26
General relativity
A tensor is symmetric if it satisfies TI-'v = TVI-' and is antisymmetric if TI-'V = - TVI-' From any tensor, we can extract a symmetric and an antisymmetric tensor by
(1.30) This can be performed on one or several pairs of indices, or on all the indices. Fo instance , symmetrizing two indices of a vector of rank 4 gives 1
T(I-'laf3l v) =
"2 (Tw ,f3v + T vaf31-')
,
and a completely symmetric tensor is obtained by
In the particular case of a rank 2 tensor , it can always be decomposed as the sum o a traceless symmetric tensor , an antisymmetric t ensor and a trace
in four dimensions . We note that the completely antisymmetric tensor of rank n is given by
cI-'1l-'2 .. I-'n
(1.31 with Cl..n = A and c 1 following property caf3J-yc
aAVI-' _ -
.. n
,A ,v ,I-' -uf3 u J u-y -
= I j A. ,v ,I-' ,A uf3 uJu-y -
For n
,I-' ,A ,v uf3 uJu-y
=
4, the anti symmetric tensor has the
+ uf3 ,A ,I-' ,v + ,I-' ,v ,A + ,v ,A ,I-' uJu-y uf3 uJu-y uf3 uJu -y .
(1.32
Contracting this identity, we get
1.2.2
Geodesic equations and Christoffel symbols
Using the notions introduced in the previous section, we can go back to the trajectory of a free-falling body moving in a space- time with metric 91-'v· Such a traj ectory is a line of shortest length, such that its equation, Xl-'( A) , can be obtained by maximizing the action
s=
J
ds.
However, as already mentioned in the Minkowski case, ds can be negative or null for some traj ectories . It is therefore cleverer to maximize the action
s=
J
LdA ,
(1.34)
with xl-' = dxl-'jdA . This is equivalent to maximizing j'(ds 2j dA2)dA. We can show that extremizing these two actions comes to the same result if ds i- 0, but using the
Elements of differential geometry
second one allows us to get the correct result also for null geodesics 2 (ds Section 1.4.2). The Euler- Lagrange equations take the form
5L
d 5x'" - dA
27
= 0, see
(5L) 5i;'" .
Since
we have that
g/-,,,,x,,/-, -_ 2"1(o",g/-,vx' /-"V X - O{3g/-,,,,x.{3./-, X - o/-,g(3",X.(3./-,) x where we have symmetrized the term o{3 gw,i;{3i;/-'. Introducing the Christoffel symbols (1.35) and
'" r /-'v
= 9 A"'r A/-,V '
(1.36)
and contracting our equation with g"''', we get the geodesic equation
X",'
+ r/-'VAX.v X. A --
0
(1.37)
identical to (1.18) obtained in special relativity. As we have stressed, space-time curvature does not intervene in the equation of the trajectory of a single particle, but it does in the deviation of close trajectories. From the definition of the Christoffel symbols (1.35), we have, since the metric is symmetric, (1.38) as well as (1.39 ) Note that in four dimensions there are 4 x 10 = 40 Christoffel symbols, which is precisely the number of partial derivatives of the metric o",g/-,v , We can hence inverse the relation (1.35) to obtain, after some algebra, (1.40) Using the geodesic equation, we can convince ourselves that the Christoffel symbols are not t ensors since they transform as
o x '''' ox Cf oxP ox{3 ox'/-' ox,v "P
r'''' - - - - - - -r(3 /-' v -
02X'''' ox" ox P ox" ox P ox'll ox'v
(1.41)
under a coordinate transformation. 2Light-like geodesics are also called isotropic geodesics; we will avoid this terminology, which can be confusing . We will call them either null geodesics or light-like geodesics with no distinction.
28
General relativity
To finish , we consider the determinant of the metric
where 7r~e;:~ = + 1 if (af3ryb) is an even permutation of (p,l/PeJ) , -1 if it is an odd permutation and 0 otherwise. We thus obtain the derivative of the determinant
(1.42)
Another way to view this result is to write that dg = m/-'l.Idg/-,I.I' where m/-'I.I are the minors of the matrix of the g/-'I.I. The inverse of a matrix is g/-'I.I = (g /-,1.1) - 1 = m/-'I.I / g so we can deduce that oag = m/-'l.Ioag/-,1.I = gg/-'l.Ioag/-,I.I' We can then deduce the usefu property
(1.43) We can also point out another interesting property obtained using the fact tha = 4, and hence that oa (g/-'I.I g/-,I.I) = 0, that is
g/-'I.I g/-,I.I
(1.44) 1.2.3
Covariant derivative, parallel transport and Lie derivative
The laws of physics often take the form of partial differential equations. It is thus important to understand how a tensor field can be differentiated in a way that preserve its tensor properties.
1.2.3.1
Covariant derivative
The partial derivative of an arbitrary tensor field
is no longer a tensor, apart from the exceptional case of the derivative of a scalar tha is a I-form. To really understand this , let us consider the derivative of a vector T/and how it transforms under a coordinate transformation
(1.45)
The reason for this is that this operation makes the difference between the value o the t ensor at x a and x a + dx a and that at these points, the tensor has differen transformation laws. Consider a constant vector of the Euclidean plane, with coordinates TX = 1, TY = O. In polar coordinates, its coordinates depend on the position (TT = sin () , T e = cos ()) simply because the directions of the coordinate lines change from one point to the other. It follows that oeTT and oeTe do not vanish even if T is a constant. What we should define is a derivative such that the components of a constant vector do not change when it is transported from x a to x a + dxa.
1 Elements of differential geometry
29
The covariant derivative is the differentiation operator that parallel transports the tensor from x'" to x'" + dx'" b efore subtracting its value at x"'. Since this operation is linear, one can always define such a covariant derivative by
(l.46)
where the quantities C~'" should be determined. For that , we notice that (l.45) implies that these quantities should transform as (l.41) during a change of coordinate. Working locally in Minkowski space and noting that then \7 ",TJ.L = o",TIL, we conclude that
(l.47)
In the rest of this book, we will denote the covariant derivative either with the symbol 'V IL or by ; p, in subscript, with no distinction: \7 ILT" = T;~ . Similarly, we will use the notation 0ILT" = T,~ for the ordinary partial derivative. The relation (l.46) can be generalized to an arbitrary tensor
(l.48)
A consequence of this result is that \7 ", 9IL" = O",9IL" - r~IL90"" - r~,,90"/L" Using the expressions (l.36) for the Christoffel symbols and (l.40) for the derivative ofthe metric, we get \7 ",9IL"
= O.
(l.49)
To each metric, we can therefore associate a covariant derivative. Note that we can define various covariant derivatives but only one is compatible with the metric in the sense that it satisfies the property (l.49). 1.2.3.2 Parallel transport
The covariant derivative allows us to define the notion of parallel transport. A vector is parallel transported if DTIL == dx" \7 "TIL = O. We can use this condition to define the notion of parallel transport of a vector along a curve of equation x lL (T) by DTIL j DT = 0, i.e. by
(l.50)
where u lL = dxIL jdT. The example of the sphere presented in Fig. l.5 shows that the result of this operation depends on which path is followed . A special case of transport along a curve is the auto-parallel transport , i.e. a curve such that the tangent vector is transported parallel to itself; it should therefore satisfy
(l.51 )
This is simply the equation of the geodesic (l.37) so that we conclude that the geodesics (curves of shortest path) are therefore auto-parallel.
30
General relativity Path 1
Path 2
Fig. 1.5 (left) : On a 2-dimensional sphere, a vector can be transported parallel to itself a long a path 1 corresponding to a great circle until its antipodal point. We can reach the same point following the path 2 along the equator. The two vectors that we get do not coincide. (right): The Lie derivative evaluat es the change determined by an observer that goes from a point P to a point Q along the flow curves of the vector field ~!' transporting its local frame with it.
1.2.3.3
Differential operators
The covariant derivative allows us to define some mathematical operators such as the divergence and the curl. Using (l.35),we get that V f.LTf.L = of.LTf.L + r~pTP = of.LTf.L + TPo p In Fg, which can be used to express the divergence of any vector field by
V f.LTf.L
=
~0f.L (F9Tf.L)
y - g
.
(l.52)
Similarly, we can check that the divergence of any antisymmetric tensor is of the form
(l.53)
where we used the fact that the contraction of a symmetric tensor with an antisymmetric one vanishes. The d 'Alembertian operator is defined as 0 = V f.L Vf.L and can be applied to any kind of t ensor. In a Minkowski space-time, it reduces t o V f.L Vf.L = - 0; + ~ , where ~ = r5 ij OiOj is the usual three-dimensional Laplacian. Note that the relation (l.52) can be used to express the d ' Alembertian of any scalar by Vf.LVf.L¢
=
~ 0f.L (F9gf.L
y - g
V
ov ¢) ,
(l.54)
where we used the fact that V f.L¢ = 0f.L¢. Finally, t he analogue of the curl of a I-form Af.L is given by (l.55) Av;f.L - Af.L;v = A v,,, - Af.L ,v, since
r~v
is symmetric in /-LV.
Elements of differential geometry
31
1.2.3.4 Lie derivative Another way to construct a derivative is to consider the Lie derivative. For that we assume that there exists a vector field ~J.L and try to define how t he coordinates of a vector TJ.L will change for an observer that moves along the flow curves of the vector ~I' from a point P with coordinat es x'" to a point Q with coordinat es x'" + E~'" (where E is a small parameter) and that transports its system of coordinat es with itself (see Fig. l. 5). Using the coordinates defined in P at the point Q is equivalent t o performing a coordinate transformation in Q defined as x 'J.L = xl' ~ E~J.L , such that
and OX
V
rv
~ u x'J.L = u"~
to leading order in
E.
>:}V
+EU
~J.L '
The coordinat es of the vector TJ.L at Q will be given by
The Lie derivative is obtained by comparing this quantity with the vector TJ.L at P
£f, TJ.L
=
lim
~[T'J.L (Q) ~ TJ.L(P )],
€---> O E
so that (l.56) This relation can be generalized t o any t ensor by using the definition (l.56) and the relevant transformation laws p
£ €1',J.L1"· J.L P -_ <::,C"' o 0' 1',J.L1·"J.LP ""' 1',1'1 ""''' ·J.LpO0' <::'CJ.Li Vl"'V V l "'V ~ VI ' 'l/q q
q
i= l
q
+ ""'TJ.L1 "J.L p ~
VI ' .{3 "'V q
0V j <'"c(3 .
(l.57)
j= l
The Lie derivative plays an important role in the study of the symmetries of a Riemannian space. If £f,T,~ = 0 then T,~J.L ( X' ) = T;;(x') and the t ensor field is invariant under that change of coordinat es. In particular , for the metric t ensor , using (l.57) for a symmetric rank-2 tensor , the relations (1.40) and (l.38) , as well as the definition of the covariant derivative for a vector, we get (l. 58) 1.2.4
Curvature
1.2.4. 1 Curvat ure tensor As seen from F ig. l.5 , the parallel transport of a vector along a closed curve does not bring t he vector back to its initial stat e if the space is curved , contrary to what
32
Genera l relativity
dx~
Fig. 1.6 The vector T'" is parallel transported along the path PIP3 passing by either P2 or P4 to give , respectively, the vectors Tin and Ti43' These two vectors only coincide if the Riemann tensor vanishes.
happens in a Euclidean space. Just like for the geodesic deflection, this characterizes the curvature of space. Let us consider the parallel transport of a vector TI-" along the closed path shown in Fig. 1.6. From PI to P2 , the relation (1.50) implies that the variation of the vector TI-" is given by OI2TI-" = dx"' \7c;TI-" = dTI-" + r~aTadx"'. By iterating it, we get that the variation between PI and P 3 is given by 0123TI-" = dx"'dx,6 \7,6 \7 c; TI-" = d 2TI-" +2r~[/dx"'dT[/ +(8,6 r~a+ r~[/r~a)dx"'dx,6 Ta. The same variation passing through P 4 is given by OI43TI-" = dxc; dx,6 \7 '" \7 ,6TI-" . On comparing these two expressions, only the terms proportional to dx"'dx,6 are different and we get that (1.59) where the Riemann tensor is given by (1.60) The definition (1.60) allows one to conclude that the Riemann t ensor is antisymmetric in the permutation of the first or the second pair of indices (1.61) and that it is symmetric in the permutation of the two pairs (1.62) We can also show that it satisfies the identity (1.63) The two first symmetry properties imply that the Riemann tensor has as many components as a 6 x 6 symmetric matrix, ie. 21 components. The last relation (1.63) is
Elements of differential geometry
33
independent of the first ones and thus adds one extra constraint t o the number of components . The Riemann t ensor therefore has 20 independent components. Finally, the derivatives of the Riemann tensor enjoy a cyclic symmetry property that is (1.64) 3RaJ.L [va; J3l = R a J.Lva ;f3 + R a J.Laf3;v + RaJ.Lf3 v;a = 0, called the Bianchi identity. 1.2.4. 2 Ricci and Einstein tensors The symmetry properties of the Riemann t ensor imply that we can construct only one tensor by contraction of two indices. This is the Ricci tensor , which is symmetric and defined by (1.65) The Ricci t ensor has 10 independent components. Its trace defines a scalar , the scalar curvature, also known as the Ricci scalar (1.66) Contracting the Bianchi identities (1.64) , respectively, by g af3 and g af3 gJ.La implies that We can combine these two equations t o construct a conserved tensor for the covariant derivative GJ.LV = RJ.Lv -
1
2RgJ.Lv.
(1.67)
This tensor G J.LV is called the Einst ein t ensor. 1.2. 4.3
Killing vector fields
A vector that satisfies the Killing equation
is called a Killing vector; it keeps the metric invariant and therefore corresponds to a space-time symmetry. From the rela tion (1.59), we conclude that (1.58) implies that \1 a \1 f3~v = RJ.L af3 v~J.L" T his shows that from the value of ~v and \7 J.L~V at a given point one can determine the Killing vector field uniquely. One should then specify N values for ~v and (N - 1)/ 2 values for \7 J.L ~'/' keeping in mind it is ant isymmetric , so that there are at most N(N + 1)/2 linearly independent Killing vector fields. For N = 4, this is 10 Killing vectors, which is precisely the dimension of t he Poincare group of Minkowski space. Indeed , t his maximum number of Killing vector fields is not always reached in an arbitrary space-t ime since the Killing equations are not necessarily integrable for any choice of initial conditions; most space-times have no symmetries and no Killing vector fields!
34
General relativity
A space-time enjoying the maximum number of Killing vector fields is called a maximally symmetric space-time. It can be shown from the Killing equations and (1.59) that the Riemann tensor must then satisfy (see , e.g., Ref. [2] for a demonstration)
(N - l)RI-' ",j3v so that
N
R~ =
= R"'v6~
R N(N _ 1)
- R",j36~ ,
(R"'v6~ - R",j36~) ,
the Ricci scalar, R, being a constant. Maximally symmetric spaces are thus spaces of constant curvature. For N = 4, there are three maximally symmetric space-times: Minkowski , de Sitter and anti-de Sitter. See also the discussion in Section 3.1.3 o Chapter 3. 1.2.5
Covariant approach
We consider a family of time-like geodesics representing the worldlines of typical observers of the Universe (the fundamental observers). In the case of a fluid , we can think of this flow of geodesics as the set of worldline fluid elements. Each observer has a tangent vector to its worldline, ul-' = dxl-' /dT . This vector is time-like and satisfies 3
A more detailed description of this covariant approach can be found in Ref. [9].
1.2.5.1
3+ 1 decomposition
With the vector ul-' one can define two projection tensors
(1.68) along and perpendicular to the vector ul-', respectively. We have Uj)U~
= Uf;,
ut = 1,
Uj)u v
,~=
,!:u
and ,!:,~
=
,~,
3,
v
= ul-' , = o.
These two proj ectors allow one to define a natural notion of space and time for an observer 0 since the line-element takes the form
(1.69)
Any vector vI-' can be decomposed into 'time' and 'space' parts, relative to the vector ul-' as vI-' = vVUj) + vi, vi = vV,!: . In particular, a particle of mass m has momentum
3We now work in a unit system such that c = 1. This equation would otherwise take the form u!'u!' = _ c 2
Elements of differential geometry
35
The observer 0 will measure the energy of this particle to be (1. 70)
so that E2 - P.l!-,pi = m 2 . Note that if this particle does not follow a geodesic, then its equation of motion is (1.71)
where F!-' represents any non-gravitational force applied on the particle. Here , the last equality stems from the fact that v!-'v!-, = - 1.
1.2.5.2 Spatial and time derivatives We can now define a derivative along a worldline , tangent to T cx (3 ... !-,V...
u!-'
by
cx (3 .. . = uAV AT!-,v .. .
It corresponds to a derivative with respect to the proper time. We can also define a derivative in the hypersurface orthogonal to u!-' by
flAT::!!
=
1';' (1'~, I'g, ... ) b~' I'~' ...) V
A,
T::,'t,'.
This derivative is a three-dimensional covariant derivative associated to the spatial metric (we can indeed check that Vcxl'!-'v = 0). However, note that for an arbitrary function p , V[!-' Vv i P = U [!-,;vJ P (recall u!-' is geodesic). Thus, this term vanishes only if U[I';vl = O. The derivative V is well defined only under this condition. We may note that in particular VI'T!-' = V!-,TI' + uI'TI'.
1.2.5.3 Distortion of the geodesic flow We consider a vector flow u!-' describing, for instance, a flow of matter. The covariant derivative of the vector field u!-' can be decomposed as (1. 72)
The trace e = V!-'u!-' is called expansion and describes the isotropic distortion, a!-' v is a traceless symmetric tensor called shear (a!-,vu!-' = 0, at = 0) and describes the distortion of the flow of matter, w!-'v is an antisymmetric tensor called vorticity that describes the rotation of the matter flow (w!-,vu!-' = 0). The vorticity vector is defined by WU _ -
1
2u cxc
and satisfies by construction are, respectively, defined as
cxu!-'v
w!-'u!-,
_ (3 U w!-'v {:==} W!-'V - U c(3u!-'vw ,
=
Uv is the acceleration and vanishes if
w!-'vw!-'
u!-'
=
O. The shear and vorticity amplitude
follows a geodesic.
36
General relativity
It will be useful to introduce a characteristic scale S (T) defined by
~S = ~8 3 '
which determines S a long each worldline up to an overall factor. The volume of eac element of the fluid varies as S3. 1.2.5.4
Raychaudhuri equation
e
We now calculate = uV\lv(\l J.LuJ.L) using the decomposition (1.72) as well as (1.59 to commute the covariant derivatives. This leads to t he Raychaudhuri equation
e -- _~3 82 + il,!-Li.t J.L + 2(w 2 -
0"2) + VJ.L il.J.L - R J.LV uJ.LUV .
(1.73
This equation is at the heart of t he study of gravitational collapse. Two other equation describing the proj ection of the vorticity and of the shear can be obtained in a simila way (see Ref. [9]). This equation has an important consequence. Let us suppose that the vorticit vanishes (w = 0) and t hat uJ.L = 0 for all times. It then follows that if RJ.LvuJ.LuV > for all times, we have that + 8 2 /3 ::::; 0 so t hat
e
lIT
--> -
8(T) - 8 0
+- . 3
• If 8 0 < 0, i. e. if it is a converging flow , then at a given time T ::::; - 3/8 0, 1/ 8 must g through zero and 8 should therefore diverge. The geodesic flow is hence pathologica This signals the presence of a caustic or of a singularity. • If 8 0 > 0 at a given time, we can express the Raychaudhuri equation as a functio of S to obtain that S / S ::::; O. There must therefore exist a previous time TO < 3/8 such that S - t 0 when T - t TO. This translates into the exist ence of a singularity i the past. This is a sp ecial case of the theorems on space-time singularities that is discusse in detail in Ref. [10]. We give in the following table the definition of several energ conditions that will appear throughout this book.
Name null
Definition G J.LV kJ.LF > - 0 \fk J.L, kJ.LkJ.L = 0
Meaning Light is focused by matter
causal
G J.LV uVGJ.LPu P < - 0 \fuJ.L , uJ.LuJ.L = - 1
Energy does not flow faster than the speed of light
weak
GJ.LVuJ.LUV 2: 0 \fuJ.L, uJ.LuJ.L = - 1
The energy density is positive for any observer
dominant
causal and strong
strong
RJ.LvuJ.LuV 2: 0
S
Elements of differential geometry
1.2.5.5
37
Case of a vanishing vorticity
If w = 0 for all times , then the hypersurfaces that are locally perpendicular to the flow ulJ. can be globally extended. 'YIJ.V is then the spatial metric (i.e. three-dimensional Riemannian metric) induced by glJ.v on 2:; and 'V' is the covariant derivative associated with 'YIJ.V, 'V' a'YlJ.v = 0 (see Fig. 1.7). The 'bending' of 2:; in the four-dimensional spacetime M can be characterized by the change of direction of the normal ulJ. when moved on 2:;. This is associated to the extrinsic curvature tensor
(1.74) Using (1.72) , it reduces to KlJ.v
A Riemann 4 tensor, equality 'V' a 'V' {3Vv we get that
=
1 38'YlJ.v
+ (JIJ.V·
'V' from (1.59). Starting from the = 'Y~''Yg''Y~''Va'h~''Y~,'VpVa) for a I-form Va on 2:; (i.e. vaua = 0) , (3) R a {3lJ. v
can be associated to
where we have used the fact that 'Y~'Y~ 'V a'Yf = K avulJ. . When taking the antisymmetric part (over ex and (3), the second term vanishes so that we finally obtain the relation (1.75) where we have used 'Y~ua'V pVa = - K3va to express the two last terms. This is the Gauss relation. Contracted on the two indices {3 and v it gives
and taking the trace, we get the scalar Gauss relation (1. 76) It relates the intrinsic curvature of 2:; to curvature. To finish, the relation (1.59) for Codazzi relation 'YpIJ. n a 'Yaa' 'Y{3{3'RP aa' {3' -_
the Ricci scalar of M and the extrinsic the vector ulJ. projected on 2:; leads to the nv {3 KIJ. a - nv a KIJ. {3
,
which gives, after contraction, the contracted Codazzi relation (1. 77) 41n three dimensions , the Riemann tensor is fully determined from the Ricci tensor and the scalar curvature as
38
General relativity
Using t he expression of t he extrinsic curvature, the scalar Gauss relation (l.76 implies that the curvature of I; is given by
(l. 78
which is valid for all space-times such that w = O. Such a flow is called irrotational.
1.2.5.6 Decomposition of rank 2 tensors The existence of the vector field uIJ- allows one to decompose any symmetric of rank tensor in a unique way, in the form
(l. 79 with
In particular, we have
1.3 1.3.1
Equations of motion Einstein's equations
Similarly to electromagnetism, we would like to formulate second-order equations fo
9IJ- v ' For that, we need a Lagrangian that depends on the metric and its first derivative
only. The Lagrangian proposed by Einstein and Hilbert reduces to the scalar curvatur Other choices are possible, such as any function of the scalar curvature or term involving other invariants such as the Gauss- Bonnet t erm, or even more complicate theories of 'scalar-tensor' type; all these cases are discussed and studied in Chapter 10 The 'simplest' choice is in perfect agreement with all observations and defines th theory of general relativity. Any other choice will be considered as an extension of th standard case. Thus, we focus on the action
(l.80
where K, is a coefficient to be determined by requiring that the theory reduces t Newtonian gravity in the weak-field limit; this is the only free parameter of the theor .c mat is t he Lagrangian for the matter fields and A is a constant called the cosmologic constant. We will now present the variation of these two terms.
Equations of motion
39
Fig. 1.7 A vector flow up. defines an orthogonal surface at each point of the flow. We can then define a global notion of space and time for this flow if and only if its vorticity vanishes .
1.3.1.1
Einstein- Hilbert action
We start by varying the Einstein- Hilbert action
where we have just used the definition of the scalar curvature. Expanding this expression, we get
To evaluate the first term, we should vary the metric determinant. Using the result (l.42), we get (1.81)
which leads to the conclusion
The second term is more complicated to evaluate. For that , we work in a locally inertial coordinate system , i. e. where gp. v = fl /-'v and o,gp.v = 0 from which we deduce that
40
General relativity
r~V = 0 (but note that the derivatives of the Christoffel symbols do not vanish). W hence obtain
To go from the partial derivative to the covariant derivative, we used the fact tha t he result is a t ensor , and hence it should be the same in any frame. We can henc conclude t hat
1v9l-'VFgb RI-'vd4x =
Iv Fg [(9I-'Vbr~v);0" - (9I-'Vbr~v);I-'] d4x,
on any volume V. The integrand is therefore of the form Fg 1~ , which can be r expressed, using the property (l.52), as (Fg 11-') ,/-," This is therefore the integral of total derivative, which can be reduced to an integral on the boundary of the volum V so that it does not contribute to the equations of motion. We therefore obtain
b J RFgd 4x = J FgGl-'v bgl-'V d4x ,
(l.82
where the Einstein tensor GI-'V is defined in (l.67). The variation of the term in A trivial and gives
J 2AbFgd 4x = - J AFggl-'vbgl-'V d4x. 1.3.1.2 Stress-energy tensor The variation of the matter action with respect to the metric is given by 4 bJL mat yC::-d -g X
-
4 J b(LmatFg) Fgbgl-'V b9I-'V yC::-d -g x,
which we may write as
b J Lmat Fg d 4 x =
-~ J
FgTl-'vbgl-'V d4x,
(l. 83
where the energy-momentum tensor TI-'v, defined by
(l.84 is a rank 2 symmetric tensor.
1.3.1.3
Einstein 's eq uations
Using the results of the two previous sections , we obtain t he general form of E instein equations
(l.85
Note t hat there is another way to vary the Lagrangian , known as the Palatin method , in which the metric and the Christoffel symbols are considered as independen
Equations of motion
41
Extremizing the action with respect to the two fields then gives Einstein's equations and the condition that V f-Lg(){(3 = 0, which is equivalent to the definition (1.35). 1.3.2
Conservation equations
The Bianchi identities (1.64) impose and the fact that gf-Lv;a = 0, that
Cr: = 0, which implies, using Einstein 's equations (1.86)
This equation is satisfied by the total energy-momentum tensor (i.e. of all matter components). To go further , one should specify the form of the matter Lagrangian or of its energy-momentum tensor.
1.3.2.1
Covariant form
The most general form for the energy-momentum tensor is the one given in (1.79) valid for any symmetric energy-momentum rank 2 tensor ,
in which p = Tf-Lvuf-Lu V is t he energy density measured by an observer at rest with the fluid , P = Tf-LI/,f-L V/3 is the pressure, qf-L = - T(){(3u(){,(3f-L is t he energy flux relative to uf-L and 7r f-LV is the anisotropic pressure tensor (7rf-LV uf-L = 7rt = 0) . The conservation equation V f-LTf-LV = 0 can be projected along uf-L and ,t:, respectively, to obtain t he two conservation equations
Using t he decomposition (1.72) , we obtain - U v V f-LTf-LV = uf-L V f-LP + Vf-Lqf-L + (p + P)G +2qf-Luf-L + (Jt:7r~ and , ;Vf-LTf-L1/ = + V Ap +V(){7r aA +~GqA +((J~ +w~) qa +( p+ A P)u +7r(){AU(){. We get that
,;rjl/
(1.87)
These equations are valid for any energy-momentum t ensor and any space-time geometry.
1.3.2.2 Perfect fluid The perfect fluid is an especia lly interesting case for which 7rf-LV = 0 and qf-L = o. The two previous equations (1.87) and (1.88) reduce, respectively, to the matter continuity equation and to t he Euler eq uation
p + (p + P)G = 0,
(1.89)
42
General relativity
(p + P)UI-' + '\7 I-'P
=
O.
(1.90)
The term ul-' = u (X V (Xul-' represents an acceleration that vanishes for a pressureless fluid (P = 0). Particles of such a pressureless fluid will hence follow geodesics. For an irrotational flow , using (1. 85) to express the Einstein tensor, (1. 78) is of the form 2 (3) R = 2KP - 382 + 20"2 + 2A., (1.91) that we will call the generalized Friedmann equation. Some conditions are often imposed on the pressure and the energy. The energy conditions introduced previously can be rewritten as • • • • •
null: p ~ - P, causal: Ipi ~ IFI, null and causal: Ipi ~ IFI and p < 0 if and only if p = - P , weak: p + P ~ 0 and p ~ 0, strong: p + 3P ~ 0 and p + P ~ O.
1.3.2.3
Electromagnetism
Electromagnetism is described by the anti symmetric tensor FI-'II ' called the Faraday tensor and satisfying (1.92) FI-'I1 can be defined as the curl of the vector potentia l AI-' as
(1.93) The energy-momentum t ensor can be derived from the action (1.94) which gives (1.95) The conservation equations then reduce to Maxwell 's equations in the vacuum (1.96) This equation can be rewritten in t erms of t he potential vector AI-' as (1.97) where we chose the Lorentz gauge , defined by VI-'AI-' = 0 and where the Ricci t ensor arises from the commutation of the covariant derivatives. A source term may be added by introducing a coupling term AI-'jl-' in t he Lagrangian to obtain (1.98)
Equations of motion
43
An observer with tangent vector uJ-L can define an electric and a magnetic field, respectively, by (1.99) These vectors satisfy EJ-LuJ-L tensor as
= BJ-LuJ-L = 0 and we can express the electromagnetic field (1.100)
Using this expression, we can decompose the energy-momentum tensor as the one for a fluid TJ-LV
wit h E2
1
1
= 2(E 2 + B2)uJ-L u v + "6(E 2 + B2}-yJ-Lv + 2U(J-LEv)paAupEaBA + 7rJ-LV,
= EJ-L EJ-L' B2 = BJ-LBJ-L and (recall 7rJ-LV is traceless)
We can then deduce that the energy density measured by a co moving observer is Pern = ~(E2 + B2) and that the equation of state for radiation is Pern = 1Pem. The trajectory of any particle of charge e and mass m in an electromagnetic field is of the form (1.101 ) Finally, we can re-express Maxwell 's equations, V J-LFVJ-L Projecting along uJ-L and along ry~ we get, respectively,
VJ-LEJ-L .-yAj;;J-L _Ea.Apa u a. VpB a IJ-L
= j V, in terms of EJ-L and BJ-L.
- 2wJ-LBJ-L = c,
(1.102)
= _ .-yAJ.v aAEv+ Ea.APau a. (u p B a +p WE) Iv _ ~eEA+ 3 v a , (1.103)
with c = - jJ-Lu!-," The same procedure applied to the equation F [J-Lv;a.] respectively, VJ-LBJ-L + 2wJ-LBJ-L = 0, .-yABJ-L +Ea.Apa u a. V pE a IJ-L
= _~eBA+aABv _ Ea.APau a. (u p E a - p w B) 3 v a .
=
0 gives , (1. 104)
(1.105)
Written in this form , these four equations give a relativistic generalization of the four Maxwell's equations , valid for any space-time geometry.
1.3.2.4
Scalar field
The action of a scalar field ¢ evolving in a potential V (¢) is given by (1.106) Varying this action with respect to the metric , we get the energy-momentum tensor as defined in (1.84)
44
General relativity
(l.107 for which the conservation equation is simply the Klein- Gordon equation
(l.108
We notice that the energy-momentum tensor of a scalar field can be decompose similarly to that of a perfect fluid with velocity field
(and q!-'
= 0 , 7r!-'v = 0) and with energy density and pressure p¢
1
2
= 21/J + V(¢) ,
We can also note that 8
P¢
1 2 = -1/J 2
v.
= - (eJ; + V')N, w!-'V = 0, a!-, = - (o!-'1/J + eJ;u!-')N an
o"!-'v = -,;,~C'V(>, \l8)¢)N
+ l!-'v\l",[1/J-l\l"'¢]/3.
In particular, it follows that th
conservation equations reduce to
p+8(p+P) = 0
{==}
¢+8¢+V'=0,
for any Universe geometry.
1.3.3
ADM Hamiltonian formulation
To finish, we shall rewrite the gravitational action in the 1 + 3 form provided by th Hamiltonian analysis by Arnowitt, Deser, and Misner [4] . We consider space-times that can be foliated by a continuous family of three dimensional hypersurfaces , I: t . This means that there exists a smooth function £ o M whose gradient never vanishes so that each hypersurface is a surface of constant I: t
== {p
E
M,
£(p) = t},
\j t E
K Such space-times are called globally hyperbolic and they represent most space t imes of astrophysical and cosmological interest. We assume that each hypersurface o the foliation is space-like and that it covers M. If we split the line-element as
(l.109 then the normal vector to I: t has components n'" = (1, - Ni)/N , i.e. n", Calling t'" the vector defined by t"'\l ",t = 1, then
= N( - 1,0,0,0
and t'" = Nn'" + N"'. This gives a geometrical interpretation to Nand N i : N is th lapse function , N i the shift vector and lij the spatial metric. It is thus clear tha
Equations of motion
45
the components of the metric are gOO = - N 2 + 'Yij N i N j , gOi = N i and gij = 'Yij and the components of the inverse metric are goo = - N - 2 , gOi = N i / N 2 and gij = '"Y ij - NiNj /N 2. As t increases, we go from a hypersurface to another and we can view the four-dimensional space-time as the time evolution of a three-dimensional Riemannian space . One can then deduce a simple relation between the determinants g of gJ.!. v and 'Y of '"Yij. Using Cramer 's rule to compute the inverse metric, one gets that gOO = 'Y / g so that v=g = N v::Y. The Einst ein- Hilbert action (l.80) can be rewritten as
This action has to be considered as a functional of the variables q their time derivatives. The extrinsic curvature is K ij =
2~
('Yik D j N
k
+ 'Yjk D i Nk
=
( 'Yij,
N , N i ) and
- i'ij ) ,
so that the gravity sector derives from the Lagrangian density (l.110) Since this Lagrangia n does not depend on H and Hi, we conclude that t he lapse function and the shift vector are not dynamical variables and will be associat ed to two constraint equat ions. The only dynamical variable is therefore 'Yij and its conjugate moment um is (l.I11) It follows that the Hamiltonian density is given by 7i =
7rij i'ij
-£ and can be expressed
as 7i =
-v::Y [N
(3) R -
K ij K ij
+ K2) + 2N i (DiK
- DjKf)]
+ 2v::YD j (K Nj - KI N i ). The last t erm, being a divergence, does not contribute t o the integral, so t hat the Hamiltonian reduces to (l.112) with (l.113) ij i It is a functional of q = hij , N , N ) and p = 5£ / 5q = (7r , 0, 0). The scalar curvat ure (3) R is a function of 'Yij and its spatial derivatives and t he extrinsic curvature is a function of 'Yij and 7r ij obtained from the inversion of (l.111)
46
General relativity
1 (1
= Vi 2 'Ykl'Tr kl'Yij - 'Yik'Yjl1f kl) .
K ij
The Hamilton equations lead to two constraints , the 'energy constraint ' Co = 0 and the 'momentum constraint ' Ci = 0, and an evolution equation , which in the vacuum takes the form "'tij = 5H/ 51f ij = - 2NKij + D iN j + D j N i . It is b eyond the scope o this book to derive the Hamilton equation with matter. When matter is included, the constraint equations take the form (3) R
+K2-
D j K l - D iK
K ijKij = 161fGp,
= 81fG N Pi ,
(1.114 (1.115
with p == TJ.l. l/ n J.l. n l/ and P (3 = - (5~ + n (3 nJ.l.)TJ.l.C< n C< ' These relations can be obtained directly from the Einst ein equations and the Gauss relation (1.76) .
1.4 1.4.1
Geodesics in a curved space-time Conserved quantities along a geodesic
To each symmetry one can associate a Killing vector , ~J.l. , under which the space-time metric remains invariant . Such a vector satisfies the equation deduced from (1.58) \7 J.l.~1/ + \7 I/~J.l. = O. The exist ence of such vectors makes it possible to compute conserved quantities useful for the study of the solutions of Einst ein's equations. Consider a geodesic with tangent vector uJ.l.. One can check that the quantity uJ.l.~" is constant along the tra jectory. Indeed,
The first t erm vanishes from the geodesics equation and the second term is the con traction of a symmetric t ensor with an antisymmetric tensor. Similarly, if T J.l. 1/ is an energy-momentum t ensor then TJ.l. I/ ~1/ is a conserved vector
The first t erm vanishes from t he conservation equation and the second is the contraction of a symmetric t ensor with an antisymmetric tensor. This relation has an important implication. The vector j J.l. = TJ.l.I/~I/ A satisfies by construction
Integrating over a volume V , we can hence conclude that
The quantity
QO , defined by
Geodesics in a curved space-time
47
follows t he conservation equation
It follows that
1.4.2
aoQ o =
0 if the boundary term vanishes.
Geodesic deviation equation
We consider a family xI.L (A, s) of neighbouring geodesics, where A is the affine paramet er along the geodesics and s is a label. The vector axI.L nI.L = - -
as
measures the separation between two neighbouring geodesics. It can be chosen in t he plane orthogonal to the geodesic flow, i. e. such that uI.LnI.L = 0 (otherwise one can replace it by rtn V). One can check that
The relative acceleration between two neighbouring geodesics is defined by (1.116) Using t he previous property we obtain (1.117) To evaluate the first term, note t hat nI.L'V I.L (uv 'V vu"') = 0 since u I.L satisfies the geodesics equation. This means that (nI.L'V I.LU V) 'V vu'" + nI.Luv'V I.L 'V vuO: = 0 that can be rewritten , switching nI.L and uI.L in the first term and switching the dummy indices J.L and /.I in the second one, as (uI.L 'V I.LnV) 'V vu'" + nvuI.L'Vv'VI.Lu'" = O. Using t his result to evaluat e the second term of (1.117), we obtain, after commuting the two partial derivatives (1.118) This equation confirms the heuristic argument on deviation of nearby geodesics. Even if we work gravity locally vanishes) the Riemann tensor does of the Christoffel symbols a priori do not cancel) or defo cusing of neighbouring geodesics. 1.4. 2.1
the relation between curvature and in a free-falling referential (where not vanish (because t he derivatives and one cannot avoid the fo cusing
Covariant approach
We decompose the vector nI.L as nI.L = f.eI.L with eI.Le I.L = 1 (thus, ePeI.L = 0) and eI.LuI.L = O. We can t hen express ilP = uV'V vnI.L either as ilP = f.e. v + Ce v or as ilP = nV'V vuI.L. By comparing these two expressions and proj ecting on eI.L, we get
48
General relativity
(1.119 that we call the generalized Hubble law. As for the orthogonal projection, it gives
(1.120
which describes the change in the direction of observation of a distant galaxy, fo instance. 1.4.2.2
Optics and redshift
We now consider an electromagnetic wave with a potential vector of the form
= CJ.Lei'P.
AJ.L
The Lorentz gauge condition imposes CJ.L0J.L'P = O.
If we assume that the amplitude CJ.L varies slowly compared to the phase 'P and tha the wavelength is small compared to the space-time curvature length scale, we ca neglect the curvature term in (1.97) so that Maxwell's equations impose
\lwy J.L 'P = 0,
0J.L'PoJ.L'P = O.
For any function 'P, the vector kJ.L = oJ.L'P is orthogonal to the wave surface on whic 'P = const.; kJ.L is the wavevector. If we differentiate the second equation and use th fact that \l VOJ.L'P = \l J.LOV'P, we get that light is a transverse wave propagating alon null geodesics
= oJ.L'P, kJ.LkJ.L = 0, kJ.L\l J.Lk v = O. kJ.L
(1.121
In a Minkowski space-time, kJ.L = (- E, k) , where E is the photon energy and kit momentum. An observer that follows a trajectory with tangent vector uJ.L will measur an energy (or equivalently, a frequency) given by E
= l'iw = - kJ.LuJ.L"
A photon emitted with a frequency Wem will be received with a frequency Fig. 1.8). These two frequencies will be related by
W rec
(se
(1.122
This relation will be very important in cosmology in order to define the notion o redshift, z. The wavevector kJ.L can always be decomposed as kJ.L = E(uJ.L + eJ.L) dxJ.L /dp , with uJ.L eJ.L = 0 and eJ.LeJ.L = 1 and where p is the affine parameter along t h photon traj ectory. It follows that dE/dp = -kJ.L\l J.L(kvu V) and hence
. J.L J.L v) 1 d.\ _ 1 dE _ ( 1 e >':dp - -Edp- "3 +uJ.Le +CYJ.LV e e E.
(1.123
This expression points out the anisotropic contributions to the redshift coming from the shear. This expression is valid for any space-time.
Weak-field regime
Reception
Emission
Fig. 1.8 A photon emitted by a comoving observer with 4-velocity null geodesic and is received by a comoving observer with 4-velocity
1.5 1.5.1
49
U::
m ,
propagates along a
u~ec.
Weak-field regime Newtonian limit
An undetermined parameter appears in the Einstein equations, the constant K. To fix it, we consider the weak-field limit of the Einstein equations in order to underst and how Newtonian gravity is recovered. We expand t he space-t ime metric around a Minkowski space-time, in Minkowski coordinates, as
(1.124) where hJ.L1/ is a small perturbation. 1. 5. 1.1
Linearized Einstein equations
From t he previous decomposition, we can conclude that to first order in hJ.Ll/ ,
and that h J.L1/ = fJ o. J.LfJ(3J.L h o.(3 and we set h = h~. To linear order in hJ.L l/, the Christoffel symbols are given by 1 0.'\ [2 h '\(J.L,I/) r 0.J.LI/ = "ifJ
Accordingly, the Ricci tensor is of the form RJ.LI/ RJ.LI/
=
~
]
- h J.LI/,'\ .
=
80. r~1/
-
8J.Lr~I/'
[28,\8(J.Lhl/),\ - DhJ.L1/ - 8J.Ll/h] ,
so that
(1.125)
where 0 = fJ o.(380.8(3 is the d' Alembertian in Minkowski space. Contracting t he previous expression with fJJ.Ll/ , we get the scalar curvature
50
General relativity
R = h::" - Dh. The Einstein tensor is given by GJ.LV read
=
RJ.Lv - ~R7]J.Lv so that t he Einstein equation
(l.126 with
In particular , we can check that h
1.5.1.2
=
- h and that hJ.Lv
=
hJ.Lv - ~h7]J.Lv.
Gauge freedom
In general relativity, there exist a gauge freedom related to the arbitrary choice o coordinate systems: two different metrics can describe the same space-time. In the linearized limit, two perturbations can represent the same state if they are related by a change of coordinates. After a change of coordinates of t he form xJ.L --> xJ.L + ~J.L, the metric perturbation transforms as
where the Lie derivative is given by £f,7]J.LV = 2o(J.L~v). Using these transformations, the linearized Einstein equation (l.126), takes the remarkably simple form
if one chooses ~J.L such that D~J.L = ovhJ.Lv. This means that after the change of variable the metric perturbation satisfies the gauge condition
(l.128)
This gauge is known as the de Donder gauge or harmonic gauge. It is analogous to the Lorentz gauge in electromagnetism.
1.5.1.3
Solutions of Einstein's equations
In the harmonic gauge , the solution of Einstein's equations can be found using the
retarded potential method, just like in electromagnetism ,
,- ( )_ J ~
1J.Lv x , t - 271"
TJ.Lv(x ' , t -Ix - x'l/c)d3
IX
-
x, I
I
x .
The general solution is therefore of t he form h1 v ) = hJ.Lv + h1~), where h1~) is a solution of the homogeneous equations D h1~) = 0 with oVh1~) = O. g en
Weak-field regime
1.5.1.4
51
Geodesic equation
For a classical fluid, and to lowest order in the velocity, only the component Too gives a contribution (since P « pc 2 ). TOi and Tij should be taken into consideration only at the first post-Newtonian (lPN) order , i.e. at order v2 /c 2 . The form of the general solution of the linearized Einstein equations (l.127) implies that the only non-vanishing terms are hoo and hOi. They are given by 2 -
KC
hoo = 2;"
JIx _
p
3
I
xii d x ,
- Oih
KC -
27r
JIx -
PUi
xii
d 3 x.I
It follows that all diagonal components of h,.LV are equal to hoo / 2. We now consider the trajectory of a particle with velocity small compared to the speed of light (v / C « 1). As we have seen before, to lowest order in h the tangent vector to the worldline is given by
dx"
u'"
_Idx"
= dT ="
ill'
with Vi == dx i / dt and" = dT / dt = \/1 - v 2 / c2, so t hat we have u" = ,,- 1(C, vi). Using the relation d 2 x" / dt 2 = dbu")/dt =u"d" /dt +"du" / dt , the spatial component of the geodesic equation becomes d 2 x'
dt 2
dx'" dx,6
=
dx'" dx,6 dx i
r~i3 ill ill + r~,6 ill ill cit·
-
To linear order in h and v, this equation is of the form (l.129)
1.5.1.5
Determination of K
Let us work in a static gravitational field. The perturbation h"v only depends on the position Xi. Equation (l. 129) t hen simplifies to
The first term represents the coordinate acceleration. In the second term, we recognize the gradient of a scalar that we identify with the gravitational potential 2¢ = c2 h oo , so that we recover the Newtonian form 2
d X dt 2
i
= -oijo.'!' ,,+,,
We can therefore go back to the Einstein equations and compare them in this limit with t he Poisson equation that determines the gravitational potential in Newtonian mechanics. This allows one to identify the value of K such that the weak-field limit of relativity is consistent with Newtonian gravity. From the previous equation, we deduce that hoo = 4¢/c 2 . The energy-momentum tensor has for main component Too = pc2
52
General relativity
and the limit of the E instein equation is therefore b.¢ = Kpc 4 /2. Comparing thi equation wit h the Poisson equation b.¢ = 47rG N P, it follows that
(1.130
where G N is the Newton constant.
1.5. 1.6
Analogy with electromagnetism
In the previous expressions, the linearized equations of general relativity are ver similar to the equations of electromagnetism. One can take the analogy a step furthe by defining Ai = chOi . The geodesic equation can then be rewritten as
x= -
V¢-
A + v !\ (V !\ A) + 3¢v.
¢ = 0, the previous expression reduces to a form similar to t he one in electromagnetism. The Einstein equations are hence similar t the Maxwell equations if we introduce
In a static space-t ime, for which
1
9 = - V ¢ - -Ot A , c
B = V !\ A ,
V·B = O, V !\ 9
(1.131
1
= - - Ot B ,
c The following list summarizes some aspects of the analogy, which cannot unfortu nately be pushed much further.
Variables Gauge transfo rmations Gauge condition Field equations R estrictions on the other gauge transformations
electromagnetism
linearized relativity
All A ll ---+ All + 0IlX 0IlAIl = 0 D AIl = - j ll
h ll v h llv ---+ h llv - £ ~ T)llv + T)IlVOo<~O< , _ 0ll h llV = 0 D h llv = - 2KTllv D ~1l
DX = 0
=0
1.5. 1.7 SVT decomposition To go further in the study of perturbations, let us decompose h llv as
hoo = - 2A ,
hOi = Oi E + Hi,
hij = 2C6ij + 20 ij E + 2o(iEj ) + Eij
with
OiHi = 0,
OiEi = 0,
OiEij = 0,
EJ
= O.
The 10 components of the tensor h llv are decomposed into 4 scalar perturbation (A , E, C , E) , 2 vectors perturbations (E i , Hi) that have 6 - 2 = 4 independent com ponents and 1 tensor perturbation Eij that has 6 - 4 = 2 independent components
Weak- field regime
53
The important property of this decomposition, which will be used in the cosmological context in Chapter 5, is that these three types of perturbations decouple (see Ref. [11]) . As previously, we should take into account the effect of an arbitrary change of coordinates. In order to do so , we decompose the displacement vector field ~p. as ~o
~i
= - T,
= - ciL - V.
Under such coordinate transformation , the metric transforms as 9p.v [see (1.58)]. It follows that 5
A
-of
A
+ T,
B
-of
B
+t -
T,
C
-of
C,
E
-of
E
-of
9p.v - £E9p.v
+L
for the scalar modes, for the vector modes , and the tensor modes remain unchanged
The tensor modes are therefore gauge invariant since they do not depend on the choice of the coordinate syst em. This is not the case for the vector and scalar modes . However , we can define a combination of these modes that are gauge invariant. For the scalar modes, we define \Ii = - C,
and for the vector modes
i
=
Ei - Hi.
We therefore have defined 2 scalar quantities and 1 vector quantity (2 degrees of freedom) which are gauge invariant. All together , we therefore have 6 = 10 - 4 degrees of freedom, once the 4 arbitrary degrees of freedom related to the gauge choice have been absorbed. 1.5.2
Gravitational waves in an empty space- time
1.5.2.1 Propagation eq uations For the scalar modes, the Einstein equations G p.v = 0, imply that Ll\li = 0 (00 component ), Oi \[t = 0 (Oi component) and
=
\Ii
= 0,
which means that no scalar mode can propagate. For the vector modes, the component Oi implies that Ll~i = 0, the only regular solution of which is i = O. Just as for scalar modes, no vector modes can propagate. 5To first order in ~ , h l'v -. h l'v - £1;111'v and we just need to evaluate £<'100 = 2T , £(I)Oi Gi(T - L) -
£i a nd £~"I)ij =
- 2[;,LJij - 2G(i L j).
54
General relativity
The situation is different for tensor modes. The ZJ component of the Einstein equations implies that DEij = O. The only perturbations that can propagate in a Minkowski space-time are the gravitational waves and they satisfy (1.132)
The three conditions = W = i = 0 define a gauge equivalence class. We can choose a gauge in this family by imposing some conditions on the perturbations A , B, C , E and 13i , E i . For instance, setting E = B = 0 and Ei = 0, we define what is called a transverse and traceless (TT) gauge in which the metric is completely determined. In this case, the only non-vanishing component of hh~T) is Eij . 1.5.2.2
Plane waves
Let us consider a plane wave propagating along the axis Oz in the TT gauge. Since the wave is transverse and traceless, it satisfies hE'T) = h~~T) = h~~T) = O. Therefore, it has only two degrees of freedom (two polarizations) that should satisfy h~~T) = - h~~T) and h~~T) = h g T ). We hence can decompose it as follows
h~JT) = E +(et - z)ED
+ E xCet - Z)Elj,
with t he two polarization tensors being defined by
ED
=
(~000 ~1 ~) ,
Elj =
(~000 ~ ~)
The solution of the propagation equation is E+ /x = A+/x cos[k( z - ct) +cp], where cp is a phase. 1.5.2.3
Motion of a test particle
Consider the geodesic equation of a test particle in the gravitational field of a gravitational wave in the TT gauge. Since to leading order in perturbation we have roo = 0, a particle initially at rest will remain at rest . Of course, this does not mean that nothing happens , but rather that the frame of reference is co moving with the test particle. To see if anything happens , we should look at the relative motion of two neighbouring particles, which can be done using the geodesic deviation equation (1.ll8). The relative acceleration is given by al1- = -Rl1-vpauvnPua . To leading order in vic, we have ul1- = (1,0) and nl1- = (0, ni) , R iojo =
-a; h~JT) 12 so that
2
i
d n = ~02h(TT)inj. dt2 2 t J
Substituting the expression for h~JT) from the previous section, we can easily integrate this expression. Figure 1.9 illustrates the deformation of a ring of particles under
Tests of genera l relativity
55
the influence of a gravitational plane wave propagating along the axis z for each polarization case. t=T14
t =0
+
X
0 0
, /
,,
/
-
t=T12
,,
, \
I
I \
\
,,
I
,,
,
I /
,,
, \
I
0 0
t=JTI4
, /
,,
/
,
,,
,,
,,
I
I
Fig. 1.9 Effects of a gravitational plane wave propagating along the axis z on a ring of particles located in t he plane xy, depending on the wave polar ization . The four snapshots ar e parameterized by the period T corresponding to a gravitational wave with wavelength k - 1 .
1.6
Tests of general relativity
The cosmological models we will construct will strongly rely on the application of general relativity to the Universe as a whole. It is hence important to understand the limits of validity of our theory of gravitation. We summarize here the principles of the main tests of gravitation; all constraints are summarized in the t able at the end of this section. This question is presented in detail in Refs. [8, 12, 13]. 1.6.1 1.6.1.1
Test of the equivalence principle Uni versality of free fall
The mass of any body comes from different contributions (rest energy, electromagnetic or nuclear binding energy, etc.). If one of these energies contributed differently to the inertial mass than to the gravitational mass, we would observe a violation of the universality of free fall. To quantify this possible difference, we write (1.133) where for each interaction i, Ei is the associated binding energy, and ryi is a small dimensionless paramet er that quantifies the amplitude of the violation of the universality of free fall associated to this interaction. The acceleration of any test body in an ext ernal gravitational field is given by
56
General relativity
so that measuring the difference between the acceleration of two different bodies allow us to define the Eotvos parameter T) by
(l.134 to leading order in the parameter T):
T)i.
Two methods have mainly been used to constrain the value o
1. The first method uses the period T of a pendulum of length L ,
T = 2n
~I {f mG
-, 9
A
/
g
Fig. 1.10 Principle of Eotvos balance. 9 is the external gravitational field and w is th angular velocity of the measurement device. The unit vectors e J and eb are, respectively parallel to the torsion fibre and to AB.
Tests of general relativity
57
so that
IT1 - T21 . T1 +T2 2. The second method uses a torsion balance (see Fig. 1.10). Two objects of different compositions, A and B, are attached at the end of a horizontal beam of length 2L suspended on a torsion fibre. The balance has an angular velocity w, coming, for instance, from the Earth rotation; the force on each mass is therefore rJ=2
where c is the centrifugal acceleration. We can conclude from this expression that the wire tension is T = FA + F B and that the torque applied on the torsion fibre is M = Leb 1\ (F B - F A). There is therefore a torque M directed along the same direction as the tension. Performing the scalar product M . T , we get that L
M = rJ-1- -1(ebl\c).g. g+c This device was invented by the baron Roland von Eotvos (see Ref. [14]). In the original experiment , 9 corresponded to the Earth's gravity and the rotation was that of the Earth. The pendulum and torsion balance can test the weak equivalence principle because the gravitational binding energy of the test objects are negligible compared to the other energies. In order to test the strong equivalence principle, we should consider objects with an important gravitational binding energy such as celestial objects. This can be done by comparing the relative motion of the Earth and the Moon within the gravitational field of the Sun. There is therefore an extra acceleration with expression
oa -_
GN M 0 2 rJ R
( E (grav) 2
me
I
_ E(grav) I
Earth
me
2
)
eT
,
Moon
where e T is a unit vector directed from the Sun to the Earth and R the radius of t he Earth orbit. This implies that the orbit of the Moon around the Earth is polarized in the direction of the Sun, with maximal amplitude
Or m ax
30a
= - - - - -----,-
2 (WEarthWMoon)
Neglecting the gravitational energy of the Moon compared to that of the Earth, which is considered to be a homogeneous ball of radius R and mass m, it follows that E(grav) / me 2 = - 3Gm/ 5Re 2. A more precise computation gives E(grav ) / me 2 = - 4.6 x 10- 10 for the Earth and - 0.2 x 10- 10 for the Moon , from which we conclude that These measurements have been made possible, mainly owing to the Lunar Laser Ranging (LLR) experiment t hat measured the position of the Moon relative to the Earth with a precision of 1 cm over about thirty years.
58
General relativity
1.6.1.2 Local Lorentz in variance
There exist few clean tests of the local Lorentz invariance. In particular, many of the high-energy tests cannot usually distinguish the specific effects of Lorentz invariance breaking from the complications due to weak and strong interactions. The best constraint is the one obtained from the Hughes- Drever experiment [15]. The experiment observes the ground state of the lithium-7, with quantum number J = 3/2. In the presence of a magnetic field , this state splits into four equally spaced levels. Any perturbation associated with the existence of a preferred direction , would modify the spacing between the levels. This sets a limit on the potential anisotropy of the inertial mass om~j of the lithium nucleus that can be parameterized as
(1.135)
where OA is a dimensionless parameter that characterizes the amplitude of the anisotropy induced from the interaction A with binding energy EA. In the experiment with ij 2 t he lithium-7, we get c 1.7 x 10- 16 eV.
lom
1.6.1.3
1:s
Local position in variance
The first t est of local position invariance is related to the Einst ein effect, i. e. to the fact that clocks run more slowly in the presence of a gravitational field. Consider an atomic transition at point A emitting a photon towards an observer located in B. According to the previous sections , the photon is received with a redshift (l +z) = (U /J. k/J.) B / (U/J.k/J. )A, implying that /:).¢ z = ~,
where ¢ is the gravitational potential. If there is a space dependence, this relation should not be valid any longer. We would therefore expect /:).¢
z =(1 + a)-2 ' c
(1.136)
where a is a parameter that vanishes in general relativity. Several experiments have been performed to measure the redshift, either by sending atomic clocks in orbit or by observing solar spectra. Another method consists of testing the variation of the fundamental constants. Numerous tests have been performed mainly on the fine structure constant , on the electron to proton mass ratio, and on the gravitational constant. These experiments go from local scales to the early Universe. We will come back to these t ests in lat er chapters (see also the review Ref. [16]) .
1.6.1. 4
Fifth force
To finish , we point out tests on the potential presence of a fifth force. In these experiments , the gravita tional potential is supposed to be modified by a Yukawa potential of range .A
Tests of general relativity
59
(l.137) where (0'12,
0'12
characterizes the amplitude of the deviation. The constraints on the pair
A) are summarized in Fig. l.1l. In the laboratory, experiments using Cavendish
balances can test Newton's law up to a hundred micrometers [17]. The constraints go up to scales of the order of the Solar System size by studying the motion of celestial objects.
Lamoreaux
10'
Excluded region
10 4
10-4 10 -6
10 - 5
10-4
10-3
10-2
1-.(m)
10 - 2
10-4
10 -6
-a
Earth ± LAGEOS
10 - 8
10 - 2
LAGEOS ±
10 - 10 I
1-.(m)
Fig. 1.11 Constraints on the existence of a fifth forc e deriving from a Yukawa potential. The parameter 0: represents the parameter 0:12 of (1.137), which we assume to be the same for all bodies . The bottom graph represents a zoom on the smallest t est ed scales. The diagram presents the predicted deviations expected from some models, such as t he presence of extra dimensions, axions or dilaton, etc .. . These different models will be presented in later chapters of this book (quote from Ref. [18]).
60
General relativity
Tests in the Solar System
1.6.2
We will now concentrate on the t ests of the geometrical structure of space-time a of Einstein's equations. These tests rely mainly on the study of geodesics in the So System. We will focus on t he case of Schwarzschild space-time that describes the met generated by a massive body. We may, however, point out that many modern tes (such as LLR, LAGEOS or GPB experiments) , can only be described with aN-bo metric, i.e. beyond the Schwarzschild metric, which is beyond the scope of this bo (see Refs. [1- 4] for further details).
1.6.2.1
Schwarzschild space-time
The space-time in the Solar System can be described by a static solution with spheric symmetry of the form
(1.13
with d0 2 = de 2 + sin 2 edcp2 . The solution of the Einstein equations with a mass sour M localized at the origin is the Schwarzschild solution whose explicit form is 2 ( ds = -
2G M) 1- ~ N
2 dt +
2
(1 _2G M) dr
N
2 2 + r dO .
(1.13
c2 r Most of the tests in the Solar System rely on the study of geodesics of this metric.
1.6.2.2 Extension
To be more general and to be able to test both the geometrical structure of spa and the field equations, we will work in the weak-field approximation (G N M / c 2 r « which is justified since GNM0 /C2 = 1.4 X 10 3 m for the Sun). We assume that t metric is of the form ds 2 =
-
[
1-
G M 2_N_ c2r
+
2
(fJ PPN
2
-
G_ M2 I'PPN ) _N _ ] dt 2 c4 r2
+ (1 +
G M) 2 I'PPN_Nc2r
dr2 + r 2d0
(1.14 From the field equations of mot ion of general relativity and using (1.139) , we get th PPN I'PPN = fJ = 1, but there is a priori no reason for this to be the case within anoth metric theory of gravity. 1.6.2. 3
Light bending
The study of null geodesics can be performed directly in the general form (1.138) . B symmet ry, we can choose to concentrate on the solutions that lie in t he plane = 7r / The trajectory then reduces to {t(A) , r(A), cp( A)}. Since space-time is static and h a spherical symmetry, there must be two constants of motion. The one associat with time-translation invariance is identified with the energy E = Ut = gttdt/d
e
Tests of general relativity
61
while the second one, associated with the angular momentum rotation invariance, is L = u¢ = g
2d
For a null geodesic, we have also the extra condition
(1.141 )
.
kl-'kl-' =
0, which we can write as
Using the constants (1.141), we can deduce that the equation of the traj ectory is
= (E)2 e~l/(r)~I-'(r) ( ~)2 d
_
r2
e~l/(r) r2
(1.142)
The functions v(r) and J-i(r) can be identified with the corresponding terms in (1.140) . After introducing y = G N M/c 2 r and b = L /E, we therefore have
d2 y _ + y d
2
G M2 = 3,PPN y 2 + (l_,PPN)_N_ . b2 c4
To second order in M / b, the solution of this equation is given by the relation y = (G NM/bc) sin 00, we get
roc
which reduces to D.
~ iro
Actual source position
Observer
Fig. 1.12 Geometry of the trajectory of a photon d eflect ed by a massive body.
1.6.2.4
Shapiro Effect
The Shapiro effect , discovered in 1964, is an abnormal time delay when electromagnetic waves are emitted from Earth and reflected back by a satellite or a planet. Using the null geodesic equations derived in the previous section, we obtain
(r ~:
=
el-'(r) ~l/(r)
[1 -
el-'(r)
~~] ,
62
General relativity
the coordinate time a photon takes to go from r to ro is t herefore
t(r, ro) =
f
ro
r
Integrating this expression from rEarth to of change of the travel proper time dl:l.T
- - ::: -(1
dT
rplan et,
back and forth, we get that the r
+ ,PPN) IlS . h - 1
(1.1
assuming ro ::: 7 x 108 m. 1.6.2.5
Precession of the perihelion of Mercury
The planet trajectories are obtained using the time-like geodesics, such that
e-~(r) E2 = 1 + ev(r) (~ ) (:~ ) + (~ ) . 2
2
Introducing y = l / r and neglecting terms of order (G N M / rc 2)2 , we can integrate t equation to obtain the approximate solution
y(cp) =
G~M
(1
+ e cos {[ 1 _
(2
+ 2,PPN _
jJPPN)
G~~2] cp} ) ,
where e is the eccentricity. At each orbit, the perihelion advances by
l:I.cp =
27r(2
+ 2,
G 2 M2 = 27rG NM2 (2 £2 a(l - e )
PPN _ jJPPN)_N_
+ 2,PPN
_ jJPPN).
(1.1
For Mercury, we get 42.98" per century if , PPN = jJPPN = 1, which is consistent w observations. 1.6.2.6 Summary
The tests performed in the laboratory and in the Solar System give a bound to violation of the equivalence principle and to the deviations from the theory of gene relativity. We have only presented here some of these parameters, but the param terized post-Newtonian (PPN) formalism brings into play other parameters that beyond the purely Newtonian theory. This formalism has been developed in order take into account all kinds of possible deviations. The following table and Fig. 1 give a summary of the main constraints obtained in the Solar System (see Ref. [ for more details).
1.6.3
Gravitational radiation
Just as any charged object emits electromagnetic waves, a massive body can radi gravitational waves. In what follows, we review the properties of this radiation , with giving any proof. The existence and the properties of gravitational waves can be u to t est the theory of general relativity.
Tests of general relativity
63
Table 1.1 Solar-system constraints on the post-Newtonian parameters.
Parameters rJ (weak)
Constraints 10 - :3 5 x 10- 9 (-1.9 ±2 .5) x 10- 12 5.5 x 10(1 ± 15) x x l0 10
rJ (strong)
a
- ,j
- <:
2 x 10- 4 1.7 x 10 · 1(i eV
15m') . I
10- 23 10- 22 5 x 10- 18
6'
1.6.3.1
13
Details Pendulum Torsion balance Torsion balance (Be-Cu) Torsion balance (Earth-Moon) LLR Photon emitted (Moss bauer effect) H-Maser in orbit Lithium Strong interaction Electromagnetic interaction Weak interaction
Reference Newton (1686) [1 4] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [15]
Radiation of gravitational waves
The gravitational radiation emitted by an object is given by (TT)
hi)'
(x, t)
=
2
T) ,
2G N d Q kl ( -4-Pijkld 2 t - C T t c
where Pijk1(n) = (6 i k - n ink )(6jl - nknl) - ~(6ij - ninj)(6kl - nknt) and where Qkl is the quadrupole of the mass distribution Qkl(t)
=
J
p(x,t) ( XkXl -
~X26kl) d 3x .
The radiation is therefore sourced by the quadrupole of the matter distribution, and there is no monopole contribution (due to the mass conservation) or dipole (from the equivalence principle). The total power of the radiation is given by the Einstein quadrupole formula dE G N d 3Qkl d 3Q kl dt 5c 5 dt3 dt3 ' 1.6.3.2
Binary pulsar PSR 1913+16
Discovered in 1974 by Taylor and Hulse, this pulsar made it possible to test the formula for the gravitational radiation and prove the existence of gravitational radiation. Using Kepler' s law, it can be shown that if the energy of the binary system decreases , its period must t hen increase as
jdP) \dt
=
_1927r (27rG N 5c2 P
)5/3 m1m2
4 2 1+73e / 24 + 37e /96 m1+m2 (l _e 2 )7/ 2 '
where m1 and m2 are the two masses and e is the eccentricity. For the pulsar PSR 1913+16, m1 = 1.44M8 and m1 = 1.38M8 , e = 0.617 and P = 7 h 40 min so that
64
General relativity (( Lunar
\l Laser
Ranging
Y PPN
Precession of the perihelion of Mercury
1.004
Mars Radar Ranging
1.002 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1
0.998
0.996
0.996
0.998
1
1.002
1.004
i3 PPN
Fig. 1.13 Summary of the constraints on the post-Newtonia n parameters in the Solar tem . The current constraints are 12,PPN - j3PPN - 11 < 3 x 10- 3 form the precession o perihelion of Mercury, 4j3PPN - , PPN - 3 = (-0.7 ± 1) x 10- 3 from the Lunar laser ran (LLR) experiment , b PPN - 11 < 4 x 10- 4 from the light bending (VLBI: Very Long Bas Interferometer) and b PPN - 11 = (2.1 ±2 .3) x 10- 5 from the measure of the time d elay o Cassini space probe signal.
(dP / dt ) = -2 .4 x 10- 12 . We may note that there is, however, a real discrepanc 14 (J" between the observed decrease and the theoretical prediction. This is because Doppler effect coming from the acceleration of the pulsar towards the centre o Galaxy should be taken into account . The theoretical works in Ref. [24] have ma possible to compute the equations of motion up to order v 5 / c5 and have led to idea how to t est general relativity in the strong-field limit [25] (see Ref. [26] for a revi They also prove that gravity propagates at the speed of light. 1.6.3.3
Direct detection
Many experiments are now in progress to detect gr avitational waves, either from i ferometry (LIGO, VIRGO, LISA, . . . ) or using Weber bars (see Ref. [27] for a revi In order to understand how difficult it is to det ect them, let us give an estima the amplitude of the gravitational waves. Consider for that a bar of length L and m M rotating with angular velocity w. The characteristic amplitude of the quadru is Q = lVI L2, so that dnQ/dt n rv lVI L 2w n We therefore have a typical amplit ude dE
dt
rv
G N M2L4 w 6 c5
Tests of general relativity
65
For a 500-ton mass and 20-m long bar rotating at 5 rad/s, we get h ~ 10- 38 at 50 m, and dE / dt ~ 10- 32 W! The radiation of ordinary objects is therefore undetectable. For a binary system of typical mass 1Mo, with an orbit of 10 6 km and an orbital period of order 10 h, we get dE/dt ~ 10 22 W. This power can even be increased and reach a typical value of dE/dt ~ c 5 /G N ~ 3.6 X 10 52 W for an ultrarelativistic source. 1.6.4
Need for tests at astrophysical scales
Most of the tests presented here have a characteristic scale of the order of the size of the Solar System or at most, of the size of our Galaxy for binary pulsars. In cosmology, we will extrapolate the law of gravitation to the Universe itself. This extrapolation requires some checks that we will present in detail in the rest of this book. Let us, nevertheless, remind ourselves of some facts worth keeping in mind (see Ref. [28] for more details): 1. At galaxy scales, the rotation curves indicate that the gravitational potential goes as ¢ ex In r on large scales. This behaviour is usually explained by the presence of dark matter, which has not been detected yet. Beyond a given scale, everything goes effectively as if gravity had a bidimensional behaviour. The study of the rotation curves, however, shows that if such a transition existed, this scale should depend on the galaxy mass (see Chapter 7 for more details on these relations). 2. For galaxy clusters of around 2 Mpc, the effects of gravitational lensing, which measures the gravitational potential from light bending, and the X-ray emission, which traces out the gas temperature, can be compared. This comparison has shown that the Poisson equation is valid up to a factor 2. Hence , it provides a test of general relativity (testing both the light bending and Einstein's equations in the weak-field limit). 3. At astrophysical and cosmological scales, there are no direct tests of the law of gravity. The growth of the large-scale structure of the Universe provides a test, but it mixes the properties of gravity with those of matter. For the theory to be consistent with the observations, dark matter should be present. 4. The observed recent accelerated expansion of the Universe (see Chapter 4) cannot be explained within the framework of general relativity with ordinary matter (among other conditions, matter with positive pressure; this follows from the Raychaudhuri equation). This observation is explained either through exotic matter (some candidates such as the cosmological constant, the quintessence , ... will be described in Chapter 12) or by modifying the laws of gravity at large scales. 5. Two tests are currently proposed. On the one hand , the Einstein equivalence principle can be tested by checking how constant the 'constants of Nature' are on large scales. On the other hand, the Poisson law can be tested up to scales of a hundred megaparsecs , by comparing the matter distribution in the galaxy catalogues with the weak lensing by large-scale structures (see Ref. [29]).
This shows the importance of testing gravity either in order to validate the standard approach that adds new exotic matter sectors (dark matter, dark energy), or in order to give new explanations for the Universe. We will come back to all these issues in Chapter 12.
References
[1] R HAKIM , An introduction to relativistic gravitation, Cambridge Univers Press, 1999. [2] H. STEPHANI, General relativity, Cambridge University Press, 1990. [3] S. WEINBERG, Gravitation and cosmology, John Willey and Sons, 1972. [4] R WALD , General relativity, Chicago University Press, 1984. [5] L. LANDAU and E. LIFSCHITZ, Course of theoretical physics, Volume 2, P ergam Press , 1976. [6] J.D . JACKSON , Classical electrody namics, Wiley, 1998. [7] J. EISENSTAEDT, Einstein et la relativite generale, CNRS Editions, 2003. [8] C .M. WILL , Theory and experiments in gravitational physics, Cambridge Univ sity Press, 1984. [9] G.F.R ELLIS, 'Relativistic cosmology' , in Proc. Inti. School of Physics 'Enri Fermi', Corso XLVII , R.K. Sachs (ed.), pp. 104- 179, Academic Press, 1971. [10] S.W. HAWKING and G .F.R ELLIS , The large scale struct ure of space-time, Ca bridge University Press, 1973. [11] J. BARDEEN, 'Gauge-invariant cosmologica l perturbations' , Phys. Rev. D 2 1882, 1981. [12] C.M. WILL , 'The confrontation between general relativity and experiment ', Livi Rev. Relativity 4, 4, 200l. [13] 1. CIUFOLINI and J.A. WHEELER, Gravitation and inertia, Princeton Univers Press, 1995. [14] RV. EOTvos, V. PEKAR and E. FEKETE, 'Beitrage zum Gesetze der Prop o tionalitat von Tragheit und Gravitat ', Ann. Physik 68 , 11, 1922. [15] V.W. HUGHES et al. , 'Upper limit for the anisotropy of inertial mass from nucle resonance experiments', Phys. R ev. Lett. 4, 342, 1960; RW. DREVER, 'A sear for the anisotropy of inertial mass using a free precession technique' , Phil. Ma 6, 683, 1961. [16] J.P. UZAN , 'The fundamental constants and their variation: observational a theoretical status', Rev. Mod . Phys. 75,403, 2003. [17] E. FISCHBACH and C . TALMADGE, 'Ten years of the fifth force' , in Dark matter cosmology, quantum measurem ents, experimental gravitation , Moriond procee ings, 443 (1996) , arXiv:hep - ph/9606249; E. ADELBERGER, B. HECKEL , and NELSON, 'Tests of the gravitational inverse square law', Ann. Rev. Nuc. Phy 53 , 77, 2003. [18J C.D. HOYLE et al. , 'Sub-millimeter tests of the gravitational inverse square law Phys. Rev. D 70 , 042004, 2004 . [19] Y. Su et al. , 'New tests of the universality of free fall ', Phys. Rev. D 50, 361 1994.
References
67
[20] S. BAESSLER et al., 'Improved test of the equivalence principle for gravitational self-energy', Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3585, 1999. [2 1] J .O. DICKEY et al., 'Lunar laser ranging: a continuous legacy of the Apollo program', Science 265 , 482, 1994. [22] R.V. POUND and G.A. REBKA , 'Apparent weight of photons', Phys. Rev. Lett. 4 , 337, 1960. [23] R. VESSOT and M. LEVINE , 'A test of the equivalence principle using a spaceborne clock', J. Gen. Rel. Grav. 10, 181, 1979. [24] T. DAMOUR and N. D ERUELLE, 'General relativistic celestial mechanics of binary systems' , Ann. Inst. H. Poincare 43, 107, 1985; 44, 263 , 1986. [25] T. DAMOUR and J .H. TAYLOR, 'Strong field tests of relativistic gravity and binary pulsars ', Phys. R ev. D 45 , 1840, 1992. [26] I.H. STAIRS, 'Testing relativity with pulsar timing' , Living Rev. R elativity 5 , 1, 2003. [2 7] I. BLAIR, 'Detection of gravitational waves', Rep. Prog. Phys. 63, 1317, 2000. [28] J.-P. UZAN, 'Tests of gravity on large scales and variation of the constants', Int . J. Theor. Phys. 42, 1163, 2003. [29] J.-P. UZAN and F. BERNARDEAU, 'Lensing at cosmological scales: a test of higher dimensional gravity', Phys. Rev. D 64, 083004, 2000.
2
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
Although gravity structures space-time on large scales, numerous physical processes rely on the description of t he three other interactions, namely electromagnetism , the weak and strong nuclear forces. This chapter is dedicated to t he description of these interactions and of the particles on which they act . This standard model of particle physics describes ordinary matter , as observed in the laboratory. We shall see lat er that the cosmological observations concerning the existence of dark matter call for an extension of this framework. It is hence necessary to present it in detail. For this, we will work in this chapter in a flat space-time. Section 2.1 recalls the basis of analytical mechanics and the steps from classica mechanics to quantum mechanics. Section 2.2 then focuses on the special case of a scalar field. Being the simplest prototypal model, the free or self-interacting scala field illustrates in a complete way what can be learnt from quantum field theory. The following sections sket ch a general picture of the standard model of particle physics. Section 2.3 presents the spectrum of particles detected in accelerators, and Section 2.4 describes how , relying on the notion of symmetry, a classification can be sketched out. The Higgs mechanism will t hen be described in Section 2.5. Applying this mechanism to electroweak interactions will a llow us to obtain the standard mode of particle physics , presented in Section 2.6. F inally, Section 2.7 presents a study o discrete symmetries, followed by an overview on the current state of t his standard model. The ideas introduced in this chapter will be used repeatedly in the rest of the book. For instance, t he aspects of quantization and in particular t hose of scalar fields will be central to our discussion of inflation (Chapter 8) , and also when we touch on the cosmological constant problem (Chapter 12); the notion of symmetry breaking plays a crucial role in the formation of topological defects (Chapter 11 ) and in the grand unified theories. This chapter therefore lays the necessary basis for the study of cosmologically relevant topics such as inflation of course, but also of topologica defects, the origin of dark matter , baryogenesis, the cosmological constant problem etc.
2.1
From classical to quantum
It is now a little more t han a century since the principles of quantum mechanics started being used to describe the laws of Nature. This section summarizes t he steps from analytical classical mechanics to quantum mechanics.
From classical to quantum
2.1.1
69
Analytical classical mechanics
Formally, quantum mechanics can be seen as an extension of classical mechanics as formalized finally, e.g., by Lagrange in the second half of the eighteenth century and Hamilton at the beginning of the nineteenth century. The classical laws can be transformed into their quantum counterparts by applying the correspondence principle.
2.1.1.1
Analytical classical mechanics
The essence of classical mechanics (all the details of which can be found in numerous works , in Refs. [1,2] among others) can be summarized by the existence of a Lagrangian function L from which all the dynamics of a system can be derived. For a set of N interacting particles , this Lagrangian depends on the coordinates Xi (i = 1, ' " , N) of these particles, and on their velocities, Xi . We merge together the set of all these coordinates, which are not necessarily Cartesian, under the designation qi (generalized coordinates) , with the index i now varying from 1 to 3N, and the generalized velocities qi. The dynamics of this system can be obtained by minimizing the action
S=
ltfinal L [qi(t), qi(t), t] dt ,
tinitial , tfinal
= const. ,
(2.1)
tinitial
assuming that the value of the coordinates is fixed at the boundary of the integration domain [JS = 0 with Jqi(tinitial) = Jqi(tfinal) = 0]. The Euler- Lagrange equations are then obtained as (2.2) The first term of this equation brings into play the quantities pi == 8L / 8qi, which are the generalized momenta. It is possible to invert these relations to determine the generalized velocities in terms of the coordinates and momenta. Thanks to a Legendre transformation , all the dynamics can then be described by changing variables and using the generalized momenta instead of the velocities. For that, let us define the Hamilton function , or Hamiltonian H , by 3N
H [qi(t) ,pi(t) , t]
== LpiiJi - L {qi(t), qi [r (t)] ,t} ,
(2.3)
i=l
which allows us to write the second-order differential equations (2.2) as a first-order system, .i 8H . 8H
p = - 8qi '
qi = 8pi'
(2.4)
This system allows us to easily obtain the time derivative of any physical quantity by using the Poisson brackets defined by
(2.5)
70
Overview of particle physics and the Sta ndard Model
A and B being two quantities depending on qi and pi. Substituting for B the Hami nian H in the definition (2.5) , and using the equations of motion (2.4), the total t derivative of A can easily be seen to be dA
ill
=
8A
at + Li
(8A ' i fiiP
8A.)
+ ~qi q,
P
=
8A
at + {A , H}.
(
Finally, the Poisson brackets of the coordinates and momenta satisfy
(
This formalism introduces an antisymmetric operator between two quantities, such that {A,B} = - {B , A}. This property will allow us to make the transi formally but very easily to the quantum description. 2.1.1.2
Functional derivative
Classical field theory, which can be illustrat ed, for instance, by general relativity, be written using the same formalism as the analytical theory of point particles, i rely on field functionals rather than on functions. A functional Z [J], is defined as a map from a normalized linear space offunctio .c = {f (x); x E IR}, onto the set of complex (or real in some cases) numbers , Z : .c f-----+ C (or IR). The functional derivative is then defined in a similar way the partial derivative for a function of many variables. A functional can indeed understood as a function with an infinite number of variables. Its infinitesimal varia is
<5Z[J] =
<5Z[J] <5f(x) <5f(x)dx,
J
(
introducing the dummy variable x , this reduces to a definition similar to the on normal analysis , that is
<5Z[J(x)] 1 <5f() == lim - {Z[f(x) y
<--+ 0 E
+ E<5(X -
y) ]- Z[J(x)]},
(
where <5 is the Dirac distribution in one dimension. Note that for all computations, functions are supposed to be integrable and to vanish fast enough at large x in or for the surface terms to vanish in the integration by parts. The two definitions (2. 8) and (2.9) are equivalent and can both easily be shown satisfy the rules required for a derivative, i.e. the Leibniz rule
<5 <5f(x) (Z[J]W[J])
=
and the functional composition law ITechnically, this is called a Banach space.
<5Z[J] <5f(x) W[f]
<5W[J]
+ Z[J]<5f(x)
,
(2
From classical to quantum
5Z {W[j]} = 5f(x)
J
5Z[W] 5W[f] d 5W(y) 5f(x) y.
71
(2.11)
From the definition (2.9), it can easily be shown that
5f(x) 5f(y) = 5(x - y),
(2.12)
where the first function, f(x), is seen here as the trivial functional that maps any function into itself. We also have the useful property
_5 5f(y)
J
g
[df(X)] d = _~ I [df(y)] dx x dyg dy ,
where the prime indicates a simple derivative of the function with respect to its argument. Finally, it is interesting to show that , from the functional point of view, a function and its derivative are not independent. By choosing Z[j(x)] = f'(x), and using the definition (2 .8), we find that
5f I (y) =
J
5f'(y) 5f(x) 5f(x)dx =
J
f (y)] d [55f(x) dy 5f(x)dx
=
J
d [5(y - x)] 5f(x)dx, dy
and we can hence make the identification
5f'(y) = ~ [5(y - x)]. 5f(x) dy All of these relations can easily be generalized to an arbitrary number of dimensions. Most importantly, they allow us to write a classical field theory in a manner that bears close resemblance to the Hamiltonian formulation of a classical particle.
2.1.1.3
Lagrangian of a classical field
The equivalent of the action (2.1) for a scalar field is obtained from a Lagrangian density L[¢(x!")], as Sfield
=
J
L(t) dt =
JJ dt
d3 xL [¢(x, t), o!"¢(x , t) ].
(2.13)
Let us first consider L as a function of x and t. Using an ordinary derivative followed by an integration by parts in four dimensions gives rise to the Euler- Lagrange equations, equivalent to (2.2) for a scalar field ,
oL o¢(x a
)
o oL ox!" o[o!"¢(xa) ] '
(2.14)
This relation can also be obtained using a functional differentiation, i.e. viewing L as a functional of the field and its time derivative , in the following way. The time and spatial dep endencies of the Lagrangian can be separated explicit ly before the variation
72
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
oL =
J
3
d x
({
8L 8L } 8L . ) 8¢>(x, t) - V' 8 [V' ¢>(x, t)] o¢>(x , t) + 8¢(x, t) o¢>(x , t) ,
where an integration by parts was p erformed to get the second term. The definitio (2.8) for the functional derivative then implies t hat
oL =
J
d3 x
[
. t) ] , O¢>(o.c /¢>(X, t) + . OL O¢>(X, x,t 8¢>(x,t)
and t herefore, by identification, we obtain
o.c O¢>(X, t)
8L _ V' 8L 8¢>(x, t) 8 [V' ¢>(x, t)]
o.c
and
o¢(x, t)
8L 8¢(x, t)
Integrating these relations by parts, assuming that t he variation at the bounda vanishes, t his reduces to (2. 14).
2.1.1.4
Hamiltonian and neld Poisson brackets
Starting from the Lagrangian (2. 13), and using an approach completely similar t hat used in point-particle mechanics, we can first define the canonically conjuga field 7r(x, t) , which is equivalent to the generalized momentum [see (2.2)], by
_
oL(t) , o¢>(x, t)
7r(x , t) = .
(2. 1
so that the equation of motion is of t he same form as for point particles, name
ir(x , t) = oLjo¢>(x, t). In order to generalize (2 .3) to the scalar field case, t he Hamiltonian can be writte in the following form
H(t) =
J
7r(x, t)¢(x , t) d 3 x - L(t)
==
J
H (x , t) d 3 x,
(2.1
which hence defines t he Hamiltonian density, related to the Lagrangian density L , b the relation
H(x , t)
=
7r(x, t) ¢(x , t) - L(x , t).
(2.17
In t his for malism, the Euler- Lagrange equations (2. 14) get replaced by t he set Hamilton equations
(2 .1
This system of first-order equations is the equivalent of (2.4) for a scalar field.
From classical to quantum
73
The Poisson bracket of two functionals is constructed in the same way as for two classical quantities via the straightforward generalization of (2.5)
_J
{W[¢(x),7f(X)] ,Z[¢(x),7f(X)]} =
3
d x
[OW oZ oW OZ] O¢(x) 07f(X) - 07f(X) O¢(x) .
(2.19)
The Hamilton equations can hence provide the time evolution of any functional W by dW = oW dt
at
The conjugate momentum
7f
+
{WH}.
,
and the field ¢ obey the relations
{¢(X ,t) ,¢(X',t)} {¢(x , t) , 7f(X' , t)}
= =
{7f(x,t) ,7f(X',t)} 0(3) (x - x') ,
=
0,
(2 .20)
which generalizes (2.7). 2.1.1.5
Nrether Theorem and conservation laws
In 1918, E. Nrether enunciated the theorem according to which a conserved quantity can be associated to any transformation that leaves the action of a theory invariant. More precisely, this theorem is enunciated in the following way:
If the action of a given theory is invariant under the infinitesimal transformations of a symmetry group , then there exist as many conserved quantities (constant in time) as infinitesimal transformations associated to this symmetry group. Furthermore, these conserved quantities can be obtained from the Lagrangian density. As an example of this theorem , as well as for its own interest, let us mention the conservation of energy that results from the time translation invariance of the laws of physics (one invariance, one conserved quantity) , as well as the conservation of momentum and angular momentum, which arise, respectively, from the translation and the rotation invariances of space-time. In these two last cases, the invariance is vectorlike (three coordinates for the translation vector, or three angles for the rotation), and the conserved quantity remains of the same nature. All these invariances, which are usual in classical mechanics, follow from the conservation of a unique quantity, the energy-momentum tensor. This construction can be generalized to the case of general relativity (Chapter 1, Section 1.4). 2.1.1.6
Case of classical point particles
The classical mechanics of point particles is completely described by specifying a Lagrangian L(qi, (ii , t). If the physics that corresponds to this Lagrangian is timetranslation invariant, i. e. such that the result of any experiment involving this theory does not depend on the time at which it is made , it is then expected that
74
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
L(qi, qi, t - to) = L(qi, qi, t), for any arbitrary initial time to. This implies that t Lagrangian cannot explicitly depend on time , i. e. L(qi' qi, t) = L(qi, qi); it depen on time only through the variables qi. It follows that aLlot = 0, so that its to derivative with respect to time is
(2.2 The equat ions of motion (2.2) then imply that the function E, defined as
. oL
E= " q ·- - L , ~ to' i qi
(2.2
is conserved in time, i. e. dE I dt = O. One can easily be convinced that E is indeed energy if we take the example of a set of N point particles of mass m in a potential for which 3N
L ex =
1
2:= 2mqi2 -
(2.2
V (qj).
i= 1
The relation (2.22) then implies that
which corresponds to the classical expression for the total energy (kinetic plus p tential) of a system of point particles . Note that (2.22) is simply the Hamiltoni (2 .3). The inva riance under infinitesimal coordinates transformations and generalized locities, is obtained using the transformation qi f------+ Qi = qi + Eli, and qi f------+ Qi qi + Eji' where E is a small parameter (E « 1) and Ii is a vector that will be specifi later. The invariance under this transformation can be written as
Expanding the left-hand side of this relation to leading order in
E,
we get
Once again, the equations of motion (2.2) imply that
(2.2
and hence to the existence of a new conserved quantity. Equation (2.24) can be illustrated on the example (2.23) if one chooses translati in space as the coordinat e transformation (i.e. Ii = £i constants in Cartesian coor nates). For each of the three possible independent quantities £i (i.e. along the thr
From classical to quantum
75
possible axes), the quantity p = mq is conserved: this is the momentum. One can clearly see here that for a vector-like invariance (three independent quantities form a vector) corresponds to a conservation law that is itself vector-like. This is the meaning of Nocther's theorem. 2.1.1.7 Field theory case Let us now come back to the case of field theory, an example of which is the action (2. 13) , and let us consider a general coordinate transformation (2.25) Then the scalar field ¢ transforms as
which is a local variation. One can also define a global variation d through
which only takes into consideration the modification of the field itself at the point xc> , thus defining a total variation after the local variation is brought back to its original point. To first order in E, these two variations are related by (2.26 ) Note that the variation
d commutes with the derivative, unlike the variation 6. Indeed,
while
still to first order in E. The theory will be said to be invariant under the transformation x f--+ x' (to simplify, we write x == xC> when there is no ambiguity) if the action , i. e. the integration of t he Lagrangian density over a space-time volume V4 , remains unchanged during the operation. In other words , (2.27) where the integration is performed over the same volume of space-time, expressed in terms of the new coordinates (hence the notation VI in the second equality). The volume element is modified by the determinant of the J acobian matrix
76
Overview of particle physics and th e Standard Model
where the second equality comes from the expansion to first order in then b ecomes
E.
Equation (2.2
using the relation (2.26) between the operators 6 and d, this leads to
(2.2 Furthermore, we can expand d£ in this expression as
which is possible since d is an exact differential (d and expression and using the field equations (2.14), we get
1 V4
d 4 x d£ =
1 V4
d 4 x 0J.L
an commute). Integrating th
(0£J.L ¢> - ) ~ d ¢>
,
such that (2.28) b ecomes
Since V4 is arbitrary, this implies that the integrand vanishes, or in other word that the term in parenthesis is a conserved current JJ.L , i.e. that satisfies oJ.LJJ.L = T his current is explicitly given , using (2.26 ), by
(2 .2
for a transformation of the form (2.25). In this expression we have reintroduced th local variation 6¢>, which is often better controlled than the total variation d¢>. The previous discussion does not depend on the fact that ¢> is a scalar , i.e. on th way it transforms under a change of coordinates, nor does it depend on the fact th we have considered only one field. More generically, for a theory with N fields ¢ where a E [I , N ], the relation (2 .29) can be generalized to
(2.3
This relation is still valid if the indices of ¢>a form , for instance, a vector (¢>a or a tensor of higher rank.
->
AJ
From classical to quantum
77
The conservation of t he current J implies the existence of a quantity constant in t ime. To see t his , it is sufficient to evaluat e the integral of 0l-' JI-' on an arbitrary space volume V3 , namely
before using the theorem of Stokes- Ostrogradski to eliminate the second term
It t hus follows that
r
JV
oo J od 3 x
i.
=
dt
3
r
JV
JOd 3 x
= 0,
3
and t he integral of the time comp onent of the current is indeed conserved (see the generalization of Section 1. 4 from Chapter 1) . 2.1 .1.8 Field en ergy and momentum
Just as t ime and space t r anslation invariance imply the conservation of energy and moment um in point-particle mechanics , t he same invariance, expressed in t erms of the current (2.30) , generat es the conservation of the energy-momentum tensor. Under an infinitesimal t ransformat ion X'I-' = xl-' + dJ' in Minkowskian coordinat es, where the fl-' are fo ur constant quantit ies, we can see that the field remains unchanged , i.e. b¢ = O. Note that t his remains true for any vect or-like or tensor quantity of arbitrary rank , since aX' l-' / ox v = b~ for this specific case. Since the quantities fa are supposed to be constant, it is possible to read them off from the definition (2.30) . The conserved quantity is then a t ensor of r ank 2, since
which allows us to define a canonical energy-momentum t ensor
8j.J.a
(2 .31 ) This t ensor is conserved by construction , i.e. (2.32) For each value of a = 0, . . . , 3, corresponding to independent variations of fa, is associated a conserved quantity: they are the components of the energy-momentum vector p o. = (E / c, P) , given by
p o. =
~ c
which is hence conserved in time.
r d x8o<> (xf3) , 3
JV
3
(2 .33)
78
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
2. 1.1 .9 Symmetrization of the energy-momentum tensor
T he energy-momentum tensor (2.31 ) is not necessarily symmetric and thus does not necessarily correspond to t he t ensor (1.83) that appears in the Einst ein equations (1.85) However , it is always possible t o make it symmetric in an appropriate way, such that it remains conserved and such that the physical quantities we can derive from it are not affect ed. This allows us t o use its symmetric version as the source for the E inst ein equations. Let us define TP,cx == GP,cx + opGPP,cx .
This t ensor is conserved by construction if GPP,cx is antisymmetric in its first two indices, i.e. GP,pcx = _ GPp,cx . Furthermore, TP,cx leads to t he same conserved quantity as long as the fields decrease fast enough at infinity. We indeed have
(2.34) The second term of the last equality vanishes identically since GPP,cx is antisymmetric The last term can be expressed as an integral over the surface that limits V3 , i.e. oV3 which we send to infinity, where the fields are supposed to vanish . It follows that
(2 .35)
which we can identify with the momentum vector. This can b e illustrat ed by the example of free electromagnetism. In that case, the field ¢ get s replaced by the vect or potential AI-'" Its dynamics is determined by the Lagrangian density [ef. (1.94)]
which only contains a kinetic term , with Pcx(3 == ocx A (3 - o(3 A cx . The part of the energy-momentum tensor that is proportional to the metric is already symmetric. The second t erm of (2.31) is given by GP,cx - _ o£e. m. oC< A _ ~ p,cx F p cx(3 e .m . 00 A P 47) cx(3 p,
P
,
which can be expressed , after a simple rearrangement , as
Here again, only the last t erm prevents the tensor from being symmetric (note, furthermore, that it is not even gauge invariant).
From classical to quantum
79
Let us now look for a t ensor with t hree indices G PWY., ant isymmet ric in its first two indices, which will allow us t o remove the last t erm. In other words , it should satisfy opGPJ.LQ = FPJ.L o pAn Using Maxwell 's equations, t his can be easily solved to obtain GPJ.LQ = FPJ.L A The symmetrized energy-moment um t ensor is hence Q .
TJ.LV e .J11 .
=
FVP F J.L _ P
~",J.LV F FQ{3 4 '/ Q{3 ,
(2. 37)
which turns out to be the same as t he one obtained by variation wit h respect to t he metric (1.83) . 2.1.2
2.1 .2. 1
Quantum physics
Uncertain ty principle and Hilbert spaces
The great concept ual revolut ion of quantum mechanics [3J arose from its st atement that one cannot determine simultaneously with arbitrary precision the positions and momenta of any obj ects. T his means, for inst ance, t hat if one measures t he posit ion and moment um of a particle with precisions 6.q and 6.p , then , at best (in one dimension), 6.q. 6.p >
1 -n
- 2 '
(2. 38)
where n is Planck 's constant. T he existence of such an intrinsic limitation in t he possibility of knowing the stat e of a physical system obliges us to give up the not ion of a classical t rajectory. (See, however , Ref [4], which discusses t he Bohm- de Broglie ontological interpretation fo r which such notions are still meaningfuL ) T he quantum descript ion replaces the classical hypotheses, by assuming t hat any physical system is described by an element of a complex vector space, a space of states, i.e. configurations, the dimension of which depends on t he system. Let us imagine, for instance, that we would like to study a light beam polarized linearly, either vertically or horizont ally. If t his is t he only prop erty we describe on the syst em, we then have a system wit h two possible st ates, denoted as I f-T) and 11), in the 'kets' not ation introduced by Dirac; t he reverse notation allows us t o define a scalar product , fo r example (11 represents a ' bra', so that the set of t hem forms a 'bra-c-ket '. The vector space, in which t his system evolves, can have these two st ates as a basis, thus it is a two-dimensional space. Any element of this space can always be decomposed as 11lf ) = 01 f-T) + .81 1) with 0, f3 E
80
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
unaccountably infinite dimension. In this case (infinite dimension and endowed with a norm), it is called a Hilbert space.2 2.1.2.2
Operators and the superposition principle
In the quantum framework, the physical variables are replaced by operators that act on the vector space of states. For instance, for the stat e !q), which describes a particle at the position q, there exists a position operator, denoted as ij such that
(2.39)
In other words, the position state becomes an eigenstate of the posit ion operator. To avoid any risk of confusion and error in what follows, we will systematically denote a quantum quantity corresponding to a classical one by the same letter with the symbol , ' ': q f-+ ij, P f-+ p, etc. Any operator A should satisfy some conditions in order to correspond to a measurable quantity. In particular, since the space of states is complex, the eigenvalues o an observable, which can potentially be measured, should be required to be real. This implies that A is Hermitian , i. e. At :==TA* = A. Furthermore, since the eigenvalues Ok of this operator correspond to all possible values of the concerned property, the eigenstates !ak) of A should form an orthonormal basis of the space of states. In other words , any arbitrary physical state !\[! ) can b e decomposed as
(2.40)
where the discrete sum should be replaced by an integral in the case of a continuous infinity of degrees of freedom i.e. in the case of a Hilbert space of states. An operator A that satisfies these conditions is called an observable. The relation (2.40) directly leads to the central property of quant um theory, namely t he superposition principle, according to which several physical configurations can be superposed in a linear combination that is still a physical state; this is the case in (2.40). Moreover, a measurement of the observable A performed on the state !\[!) will necessarily give a unique eigenvalue Ok of this operator. Based on this principle, we can see that the dynamical equation satisfied by the physical state is necessarily linear. 2. 1.2.3 Non-commutativity
Any given classical physical quantity corresponds to an operator in the space of states, and the equations that control the dynamics must reproduce those of classical physics in the limit where we know they are valid. The easiest way to obtain the quantum laws is thus to derive them from the corresponding classical laws. Now, unlike the functions that define classical physics, operators act on a vector space and do not always commute . It is this property that is used to realize the correspondence.
We define the commutator between two operators A and B as [A, B] :== AB - BA. This obj ect has the same symmetry properties as the Poisson brackets introduced in
2The phrase ' Hilbert space' is a lso very often used for finite-dim ensiona l spaces, although this is mathemat ically incorrect.
From classical to quantum
81
(2.5). It turns out that we obtain an appropriate prescription if we make the substitution (2.41 ) {A , B} f-----+ - ~ [A , 13] .
In particular, t he position and momentum variables qi and pi are now variables that no longer commute and (2 .7) becomes
I [tii,qj]
= 0=
[pi,pJ]
and
(2.42)
This relation can be generalized to numerous cases (see for example the case of a scalar field later on). One can explicitly check here that in the representation where the position operator is expressed by (2.39), t he momentum operator then becomes
pi =
- infJ/fJqi .
2. 1.2.4
Predictability and statistics
The predictions of quantum mechanics are essentially probabilistic. Formally, t his translates into saying t hat if a physical system is in a state I"'), then t he probability Pw(<1» for it to be measured in a state 1<1» is proportional to the square of the scalar product (<1>1 "' ). Since only these probabilit ies are effectively predicted by the t heory, one can choose to normalize t hese physical states, which will always be assumed in what follows, i. e. ("'I"') = 1. With this convention, we have (2.43) Note that the normalization of a state is always possible, also because the scalar product of a state with itself is by definition positive in a vector space with positivedefinite norm (which is a pre-requisite here to define probabilities)
For an observable operator A, we have seen that the only values a measurement could give were those belonging to the spectrum (the set of possible eigenvalues) of t his operator. Suppose that we have a great number of particles prepared in the same physical state, for definiteness, we choose, for instance, the state I"') of the decomposition (2.40). The measurement of A on this set of particles will be given by the average of t he operator in t he state I"'), namely
with a variance around this average value given by
As we would expect, this variance vanishes when I"') is an eigenstate of A. The uncertainty relation for the observables A and 13 is obtained in a similar way [5]
by considering the operator
C = 613 (A - (A) ) + i6A (13 - (B) ) , where
from now
82
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
on (unless specified otherwise) the average is taken in an arbitrary state 11l1), an the redundant index has been suppressed. It is sufficient to notice that (ot 0) = II011l1)11 2 2: 0 and to expand this inequality to obtain
llAll13 2: ~ 1\ i [A, 13] ) I'
(2.44
which, once applied to the position and momentum operators, reduces to the Heisen berg inequality (2.38) , with an extra factor of, arising from t he fact that the coordi nates and momentum in orthogonal directions commute.
2.1 .2.5 Heisenberg and Schrodinger representations
Any physical state can always be normalized to unity. This allows for a probabilisti interpretation, which makes sense only if the dynamical evolution conserves the nor malization of the states. Denoting by (;(t) the t ime evolut ion operator, the fact tha the evolution is linear implies that the state 11l1(t)) evolves as
1111 (t ))
= (; (t
- to) 1111 (to) ) ,
(2.45
where (; satisfies
N (t) 1111 (t)) = N (to) 11l1(to) ) ¢=? (;t (; =
l.
(2.46
Thus the evolution operator (; is a unitary operator. In order to be physical, an quantum theory must satisfy this unitarity principle; this criterion allows us to rule ou some theories, usually very speculative, without even needing to resort to experiments Unitary transformations actually allow us to go further and to define some rep
d)
resentations i. e. some pairs ({An}, {11l1 ) t hat contain all possible operators and states of the theory. These representations are related to each other by
I ~h
{ An
-t
I~) k =, ~1 1l1 ) ~ ,
-t
An
= U An U
(2.4 7
.
These rela tions guarantee the conservation of the norm of t he states, and t hus of th probabilities: all predictions made in a given representation will be identical to thos obtained in another representation. There exist many useful representations, in particular, the Heisenberg picture i which the operators are time dependent but where the basis vectors, t he states, ar time independent. In this representation, thanks to (2.41), the classical equation i directly transposed to
dA
[ ,, ]
illcit = A , H ,
(2.48
where fl is the operator that corresponds to the Hamiltonian function of the classi cal system. To obtain (2.48) , we have assumed that the operator A did not depend explicitly on time. Such an explicit dependence can be taken into account by simpl adding the required term with a partial derivative. The Schrodinger picture corresponds to t he other extreme in the possibility o choices. In t his representation t he operators do not depend on time, and only t h
From classical to quantum
83
states are time dependent. The difference between these two representations is similar to the choice one can make when describing rotations. Either one considers an active rotation of the system , leaving the axis unchanged , or one can describe the same rotations in a passive way, considering that it is the axes that change (in the opposite direction) while the system itself does not move.
2.1.2.6
Schrodinger equation
In the Schrodinger representation, the quantum dynamics of the state, now depending on time, simply follows from the requirement that predictions, and thus probabilities, should be time-translation invariant. Indeed, (2.45) implies that the time propagator U(t - to) satisfies d d ' dt 1\IF(t)) = dt U(t - to) 1\IF(to )) . However, if the equation describing the dynamics of a state is linear and independent of the initial state and time to, then the right-hand side term in the previous relation should be proportional to the vector 1\IF(t) ). We can hence conclude that d ' dt U(t - to)
,
<X
U(t - to ).
This differential equation can be solved very easily to give
U(t - to) = exp
[- ~iI x (t -
to)] ,
(2.49)
where iI is a Hermitian operator. From t he time-translation invariance, this operator should be conserved , and should therefore be related to the energy. Actually it can only be the Hamiltonian. The form of (2.49) guarantees that the operator U is indeed unitary. Let us now consider again (2.45) with the solution (2.49), we obtain the Schrodinger equation
ifi~ I\IF (t)) dt
=
iI I\IF (t)) .
(2 .50)
Moreover, we can note t hat U is precisely the unitary operator one needs to shift from the Schrodinger representation to the Heisenberg one. The vector 1\IF(to)), which is effectively time independent, forms the basis of this representation. Equation (2.50) can also be understood as a formal correspondence rule between the Hamilton func tion , i.e. t he energy, and the operator ifidj dt.
2.1.2.7 Harmonic oscillator Before attacking the subj ects of relativistic quantum mechanics and field theory, let us first recall the results of a very simple system, the harmonic oscillator. This will allow us to put into practice the notions discussed previously. Furthermore, this syst em will also be useful in field theory since all t he fields , whose properties we shall use, can be expanded as sometimes infinite sets of such harmonic oscillators.
84
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
The Hamiltonian of a one-dimensional harmonic oscillator of mass m and angu frequency w is
(2.5
The Schrodinger equation (2 .50) for this Hamiltonian is obtained from the correspo dences discussed previously, namely H --+ ilid/ dt and p --+ - ilia / aq, . d'if; 2lidt
li2 a 2 'if; - 2m aq2
=--
+
1 2
2
- mw 'if;
(2.5
'
where we have defined the wavefunction 'if;(q , t) == (ql'if; (t)). This function is usua complex. Given the interpretation (2.43) of quantum mechanics, the square of modulus, 1'if;1 2 , represents the density of probability to find the particle at position q t ime t. The normalization of the state I'if;(t)) simply implies that the total probabili integrated over the whole space, is unity, so that 1'if;1 2 dq = l. The spectrum of the Hamiltonian, i.e. the set of the eigenvalues associated wi the operator il , is here obtained by solving the eigenvalue equation il'if; = E 'if; , equivalently by looking for the oscillation modes of the wavefunction of the fo 'if; = f(q) exp (-iEt/li). The equat ion we obtain is well known and its solutions a normalizable only if the energy is positive, which is physically acceptable. Furthermo t he derivative of t he solut ion at q = 0 is continuous only for a discrete set of values the energy, En. We define the operators a and at, called annihilation and creation operators, respe tively, (understood as being associated with each oscillation mode), by the relation
J
, Y2ii fmW(,q+2.ft) a== mw '
a, t -
f{#w ('q-2. ft ) . -
2li
mw'
(2.5
t hey are conjugate to each other but not Hermitian: they are not observables. Inverti these relations and using the commutation rules (2.42) , we find that [a , at ] = l. T Hamiltonian can then be expressed as
In this form, we can understand why the energies are positive-definite since
by the definition of the norm in a Hilbert space. Once we obtain a state In) of energy En, we can determine all t he others applying t he creation operator:
which shows that In + 1) = (n + 1) - 1/2a t ln ) is an eigenstate of the Hamiltonian wi the eigenvalue E n+ 1 = En + fiw. Similarly, In - 1) = n- 1 / 2 aln) is the eigenstate of
From classical to quantum
85
with the energy E n - 1 = En - nw. The state with lowest energy, the vacuum state 10), satisfies alO) = 0, and all the states can be obtained by
In) =
~ (att 10).
vn!
Thus, the vacuum state has a non-vanishing energy, Eo = ~nw , and the full spectrum is En = (n + ~) nw.
2.1.2.8
General potential
Let us now come back to the three-dimensional space. A particle evolving in a general potential V (x) can be expanded in a similar way in the basis of the eigenstates of the Hamiltonian, with eigenfunctions, '0E(XI-') satisfying (2.54) where the eigenvalue of the Hamiltonian E, is the energy of the state. For a harmonic oscillator , Vi1.o. ex x 2 , and (2.54) becomes invariant under the transformations x -> - x and p -> p. Therefore, the eigenstates then have vanishing average values of the position and momentum, i. e. (nlqln) = 0 = (nlpln). This reflects the fact that the potential has a minimum at the origin , increases with the distance (quantum analogue of a restoring force) and is symmetric. Thus, the wavefunctions are essentially localized at the origin and the requirement that they are normalizable demands that they vanish asymptotically. A general potential V(x) does not necessarily respect these conditions. In particular, it can be non-vanishing only in a finite region of space. This is the case, for instance, for the Coulomb potential of the electric interaction between an electron and a proton. This attractive potential is, in addition , negative. We therefore deduce that the eigenvalues are negative energies forming the different possible states of the hydrogen atom, spread on a discrete spectrum of normalizable wavefunctions. There is also a continuous component formed by all the positive energies, which corresponds to nonnormalizable wavefunctions. Actually, they are the wavefunctions of the momentum operator that can be expressed as
'0 p (xl-') ex
e i( p."' - wt ) ,
i.e. plane waves . We usually normalize them by artificially putting the particle in a box of finite volume V3 , and dividing the wavefunction by V3. Once all computations are performed nothing should depend any longer on V3 and one can take the limit V3 ---> 00. If this is not the case, using the wavefunctions of the Hamiltonian is delicate and one should resort to other methods and different representations. An important point, valid both in classical and in quantum mechanics, is that the potential V (x) must be determined by experiments, or should be imposed in one way or another. Its functional form is in the theoretical context completely arbitrary. The description of some interactions in t he framework of field theory will allow us to compute the form of this potential for many cases .
86
Overview of particle physics and the Sta ndard Model
The eigenstates of the momentum can also be used as a basis for the representatio of free particles, i. e. without a potential. In this case, the creation operator at (p) act on the vacuum state to create a particle with moment um p , and the wavefunction i obtained using the Fourier transform of these states. It follows that
which allows us to define the field operator If, by
,'1-,( ) 'I'
X
=
J
3
d p i p·x (27f)3/ 2e ap , A
(2 .56
such that 1f;(x, t) = (O!If,(x)!1f; (t)). The operator If,(x) annihilates a particle at th point x, while its Hermitian conjugate If,t produces a particle at the same point. The generalized commutation relations for the creation and annihilation operator for momentum eigenstates, namely
(2.57
translate into
(2.58
Note that it is also possible to define a conjugate momentum IT( x) and a Hamiltonia formalism. We will come back to this in the context of the relativistic theory. 2.1.3
Quantum and relativistic mechanics
The application of the correspondence principle allows the immediate formulation o a relativistic quantum theory. Instead of using the classical expressions relating th total energy, the Hamiltonian , to the kinetic and potential energies, it is sufficient t consider the relativistic momentum , pi-' = mui-' , and the invariant Pi-'Pi-' = _ m 2 c2 which can be expressed as a function of the energy, E , and of the momentum , p , a Pi-'pi-' = _ E2/C 2 + p2 = - m 2 c 2 , to get E2
=
p
2 2 C
+ m 2 c4 .
The Klein- Gordon equation for the wave function ¢ can then be obtained using th correspondence E ---4 inOt and p ---4 - inV
(2.59
It will be shown in what follows how it is possible to take into account the propertie of special relativity to describe quantum field theory. An important part of thes developments can be generalized to curved space-times, in particular by replacing th partial derivatives oe. by covariant ones \7 e.' This is how we can consider the influenc
From classical to quantum
87
of gravity by means of general relativity to a large degree: the quantum field theory in curved space-time assumes that gravitation alters field theory only through the metric in which the (test) quantum fields evolve. From now on, natural units will be considered and we therefore fix 'It = c = l ' (see appendix A).
2.1.3. 1 Klein- Gordon and Dirac equations
In natural units , the Klein- Gordon equation , which describes the dynamics of a free scalar field , becomes (2.60) For a general self-interacting potential, the Lagrangian from which this equation is derived is given by (l.106). In the case of a massive free scalar field, we will take (2.61 ) i.e. a simple mass term. Its quantization will be discussed in detail in Section 2.2. A problem immediately appears in (2.60), that of the existence of negative-energy solut ions . Indeed, the classical relation E = p 2 + m 2 assumes that E > O. But the solutions of (2 .60) are simply the eigenstates of the momentum and the energy, which are ex: exp [i(p . x - Et)], but nothing indicates what the sign of the energy should be. In other words, both choices E = p 2 + m 2 are possible. But if the wavefunction rP corresponds to one of these states, then it contains less energy than the vacuum state itself. Thus, a theory containing such states is necessarily unstable. This is why we should go to the level of quantum field theory, for which the solution of (2.60) is not a wavefunction, as in the case of 'lj; for the Schrodinger equation , but an operator , similar to >it of (2.56). The difficulty we have just mentioned for the scalar field comes from the fact that its dynamical equation, unlike in the classical case, is second order in time, which is normal to respect the relativistic invariance. Another way to proceed is to postulate a first-order equation in time, and hence also in space. In order to respect the relativistic invariance, one should be able to write it as
J
±J
(2.62) which we can obtain by varying the Dirac Lagrangian (2.63) Since this equation , known as the Dirac equation, describes the dynamics of a relativistic particle its square should also reproduce the correspondence observed in the Klein- Gordon equation. We should therefore also have ('T)J.LI/ 8J.L81/ - m 2 )'lj; = 0, which implies that
88
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
This is only compatible with t he Klein- Gordon equation if the coefficients , " satisf
(2.64
T hus, the '" cannot be simple numbers. Actually, t hey should be matrices of rank a least equal to four . A useful representation for these ," is
,o=
(0 f) fO
a")
0 ( (j" 0
'
where each entry of these matrices is itself a 2 x 2 matrix, f = two-dimensional identity matrix, i. e. f = is 1
a =
(01) 10 '
a
2
=
(0 -i) 0 ' i
(~ ~).
aD
'
(2 .65
standing for th
T he a i are the Pauli matrices, tha
and
a
3
(1 0)
= 0-1 .
(2 .66
Finally, we have defined the vectors a" == (I , a i ) and (j" == (I , -ai ). For reasons t ha will become clear later , the matrices of (2.65) are called the chiral representation o the Clifford algebra, defined by (2.64). It is interesting to note that (2 .62) can also be obtained from the action
(2.67 Assuming that 'I/J , defined by
(2.68
and 'I/J are considered as two independent quantities , then t he variations must b performed simultaneously. T his action introduces the operator f--7
FoG == Fo(G) - o(F)G,
(2.69
for any two quantities F and G . In the case of (2.67) , F and G are spinors, but th definition applies also for any kind of field, for instance scalars.
2.1.3.2
Maxwell 's and Praca's theories
The scalar field ¢ is of spin 0 and the spinor field 'I/J of spin 1/2. T he fields know experimentally, among which we can find all the particles listed in Section 2.3, als include particles of spin 1 such as the photon, of zero mass, or the W ± and ZO vector of t he electroweak interaction. Such fields are described by a vector A" , the dynamic of which is governed by P roca's Lagrangian
(2.70
for a real field of mass M A . The Faraday tensor has the usual definition , F"v == 20I"Av
Canonical decompositions
89
Varying (2.70) using (2.14) for each component Ao< of the vector field, we find
and hence (2.71 ) This equation does not seem to be equivalent to the Klein- Gordon equation for each component of the field due to the right-hand side term. However, if we take the divergence 80< of this equation, the right-hand side term becomes a d'Alembertian , which simplifies with the one on the left, so that
Note that things are more complicated in the relativistic case, where the covariant derivatives do not commute [ef. (1.97)]. As can be seen here, if the vector field is massive, i.e. MA of. 0, then t he Lorentz gauge condition 8J.L AJ.L = 0 is automatically satisfied [the fact that Proca's theory (2.70) is not gauge invariant precisely because of this term is no surprise], and (2. 71) leads to a Klein- Gordon equation for each component, which is to be exp ected from the classical-quantum correspondence principle discussed around (2.59). The energy-momentum tensor fo r the massive vector field, once it has been suitably symmetrized, is identical to the one for the gauge field of electromagnetism (2.37) up to the mass term that has to be added. This leads to (2.72)
2.2
Canonical decompositions
The particular case of a scalar field, let it be real or complex, is discussed in detail in most textbooks on field theory; see, for instance, Refs. [6- 9]. We briefly review it in this section. For completeness, we also briefly describe the case of the vector and spinor fields. 2.2.1
Technical clarification
In what follows, we will systematically choose a symmetric definition of the Fourier transform and of its inverse that are defined by (B.58) and (B.59). 2.2.1.1
Lorentz invariant measure
One of the important properties of t he Dirac distribution is that
df
o [j(x) - a] = ~ ( dx a
where the
Xa
)-
1
o(x - xa),
(2.73)
X = Xa
represent the zeros of the argument, i.e. the solutions of f(xa) = a.
90
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
This property allows us to replace the Fourier integrals in 4 dimensions by three dimensional integrals when the fields over which we perform the integration are 'o shell ', i. e. their Fourier components satisfy the relation E2 == k;5 = k 2 - m 2 , the energ being posit ive-definite . In that case, it is possible to perform the integration over th time component ko with the previous relation by setting f(k o) = k;5 . This gives
with the definit ion
(2.75
and where e is the Heaviside step function. T he relation (2.74) defines a Lorent invariant measure despite being three-dimensional. Note that to obtain this measure it is necessary to impose the positive energy condition in order to keep only one term of (2 .73).
2.2.2
Real free fie ld
Equation (2.60) can be obtained by varying t he Lagrangian (l.106) in which we pos tulate an arbitrary potential V(¢) for t he scalar field ¢ . The conjugate field is then
7r(x) = so that the Hamiltonian density, H =
Of:
~ . -
J¢(x)
.
= ¢(x),
(2 .76
7r¢ - L , is given by
(2.77
General potentials V(¢) are useful in cosmology, for instance, when addressing t h inflation scenarios (Chapter 8).
2.2.2.1
Mode expansion
The eigenstates of the momentum operator are t he basis of every expansion in quantum field theory. To deduce that, we should first know the energy-momentum tensor , tha is 8 J.'
_ ~8
= 8J.'¢8
[~ (8¢)2 + V(¢) ] = TJ.'n
(2 .78
The last equality follows from the fact that the energy-momentum tensor of a scala field is already symmetric. Moreover, it coincides with t he tensor (l.1 07) obtained by varying (l.84) with respect to the metric.
Canonica l decompositions
91
The tensor (2.78) allows us to construct the four-momentum vector that is obtained by po. == TOO. , from which we indeed get, first the Hamiltonian density, which corresponds to the purely time-like component, i.e. pO == TOO = 1i, and then the associated momentum to the scalar field P = 7rV ¢. Because the presence of a general potential V (¢) can lead to some potential nonlinearities that can imply some unnecessary complications, here and in the following sections we restrict ourselves to the case of the free massive field for which V = ~m2¢2. Having found the momentum P, it is sufficient to perform the substitution of the correspondence principle and to replace P by P -+ -iV. The eigenmodes Uk(X) with eigenvalue k of the momentum operator thus satisfy -iVUk (x) = kUk (x). They are plane waves Uk(X) = Nkeik.x,
N k being a normalization factor to be determined later. It is now sufficient to expand the field on the basis of these eigenstates as
(2.79) Since ¢ satisfies the Klein- Gordon equation (2.60), we find that the coefficients ak(t) evolve as adt) + (k 2 + m 2 )ak(t) = 0, where we used the fact that V 2Uk (x) of this equation is simply
=
2 - k uk (x). Setting
wk = k 2 + m 2, the solution
with b;" = a - k since ¢ E lR. After some algebraic manipulations, and using the relations between the coefficients of the expansion, we find a more explicit four-dimensional expression, that is (2.80) where we recall that k . x == k . x - wkt. From (2.80) and from the invariant measure (2.74) we see that the field expansion, even though it was realized on the basis of three-dimensional states, is invariant, i.e. that ¢ is effectively a Lorentz scalar, as long as we choose the normalization (2.81) Moreover, this relation allows us to recover the usual commutation relations after quantization. Note that the conjugate momentum of the field is simply (2 .82) which we obtain in a similar manner as before. The factor ( - iWk) in the integrand of (2.82) implies that the latter is not explicitly a Lorentz scalar. This is not a problem since only the field should absolutely satisfy this property.
92
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
2.2.2.2
Quantization
The field and its conjugate momentum can now be 'promoted' to the status of oper tors , which can be done by replacing the coefficients ak and a"k by the annihilation a creation operators, respectively, ak and The field Poisson brackets then becom the equal time commutations relations. If we impose
al .
(2.8 and all others to vanish, i. e. the usual commutation relations , we indeed obtain t canonical relations for the field
[¢(X,t),7T(X',t) ] =i5(3) (x-x') ,
(2 .8
a computation that is recommended to be performed explicitly. The relations (2.8 and (2.84) can only be respected if the normalization of the field modes is given (2.81) . The eigenmodes of the field operator are now defined by
u k (x , t)
=
N k ei( k .x- w /c t) ,
(2.8
so that the field operator is expressed as
(2.8
This relation can be inverted to express the creation and annihilation operators as function of the field , namely
(2.8 f--7
where the derivative 8 is defined by (2.69) . This analysis is then complet e as soon as we know the Hamiltonian, which is giv by
(2.8 We then get
(2.8
where we have used the commutation relation (2 .83) and defined Nk as the 'number particles in the state with momentum k ' operator, the significance of which will le us to the definition of the Fock space associated with this theory. A remark concerning (2.89) is necessary at this point. The second term, propo tional to 5(3) (0 ), is clearly divergent , even in the case where the momentum space finite, i. e. if there exists a cutoff k m ax above which one can no longer perform the com putation. In field theory, as discussed here, this infinite energy is not embarrassing
Canonical decompositions
93
it has no physical meaning since in practice only differences of energy are measurable. In practice, we define a normal ordering that automatically puts the creation operators on the left and the annihilation ones on the right, or by 'renormalizing ' the energy by simply suppressing the vacuum energy obtained this way. This possibility is unfortunately no longer an option as soon as the theory is coupled to gravity. The vacuum energy then assumes all its meaning and acts as a cosmological constant , which is in any case considerably more significant than the one we measure (Chapter 12). It is, in the current state of knowledge, the most serious problem that theoretical cosmology has to confront, and it comes from quantum fi eld theory!
2.2.2.3
Fock space
The complete quantum theory is obtained once we know the state of the particles. For that, we st art by defining the vacuum 10) as being the state annihilated by all the annihilation operators, i. e. aklO) = 0 'tIk E JR3 . We consider, furthermore, that this state is normalized, namely (010) = 1. A state with one particle is then constructed from this vacuum state by applying a creation operator to it. We thus have
(2.90)
Ik ) == 0,110) , normalized by
(klk' ) = (ola k al,10) =
5(3)
(k - k') ,
and we construct in this way a complete space of states, each state having n( k) particles in the state of momentum k . The definition (2.90) shows that a state with n(k) is an eigenstate of the operator Nk , since (2.91) It follows that any state describing a set of particles will be an element of
called a Fo ck space and having an unaccountable infinity of states. Finally, note that starting from the vacuum state 10) , it is possible to produce a particle at the point x simply by applying the field operator itself
lx,t ) =
q} (x , t) IO) =
J
d3k e- ik . x (271")3/2 J2Wk Ik),
(2.92)
which appears essentially as the Fourier transform of the one particle st ate with given momentum, hence its interpretation. Note that this equation uses the operator q) to generate a particle, which plays no important role here since the field is real and hence cfyt = cfy, but in the more general case of a complex field , the distinction is important.
2.2.2.4
Spherical waves exp ansion
The previous expansion is only a special case of the expansion in the basis of the momentum eigenstates expressed in Cartesian coordinates (x , y, z) . It is also possible
94
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
to perform this expansion in spherical coordinates (r, 0, rp) using spherical harmon In that case, we split the Laplacian into radial and angular parts t. = t.r + r - 2 t with t.r = 8; + (2 /r)8r and t.11 = 8~ + sin 2 08~. We express the eigenvalues
JP2
the Laplacian using the amplitude p == and two integer numbers £ E Na m E [-£, +£j . The scalar field ¢(x, t) can then be decomposed into the eigenmod ¢pem(x), of the Laplacian (2. which are given by
¢pem(x , t)
=
upe(r)Yem (0, rp).
Since the spherical harmonics are solutions of (B.8), (2.93) leads to an ordin differential equation for the radial part upe(r) , namely
2
d [ dr2
2d
+ ~ dr -
£(£+ 1)
r2
2]
(2.
+ P upe = 0,
the solution of which is a spherical Bessel function upe(r) ex: je(pr), (Appendix B). T normalization relations of the spherical harmonics (B.15) together with those of spherical Bessel functions (B .51) show that choosing
the modes of the scalar field are normalized , i.e.
(2 . Also note t hat with these convent ions, we have the completeness relation
roo
in
o
+e
L L 00
dp
Upe(r)Upe(r')y£~(O , rp) Yfm(e', rp')
= 5(3)
(x - x').
(2.
e=o m=-e
The scalar field operator is now expressed as
(2.
where the operators iipfm depend explicitly on time. Inserting the relation (2.97) the Klein- Gordon equation (2.60) , we get
22 (:t
w;
+ w~)
iipem(t)
=
0,
(2.
where = p2 + m 2 for each independent mode. The relation (2.98) shows that creation and annihilation operators, which could a priori depend on the three numb p , £ and m , have a time dependence that is only a function of the magnitude p of
Canonical decompositions
95
momentum. The solutions of equation (2.98) are complex exponentials, so that the total field takes the form
1 z= 00
¢(x, t) =
dp
o
Npupe(r) [Y£m(B,
+ Yi::n(B,
(2 .99)
e,m
and the momentum conjugate
(2.100) The remaining thing to do is to use the commutation relations (2.84) at equal time and to impose the same normalization as previously, namely Np = (2wp) ~ 1 / 2, to get the commutation relations for the creation and annihilation operators (2.101 )
The link between the Cartesian and spherical representations is obtained by expanding the plane wave in the basis of spherical waves (B.21). By identifying the coefficients of the term e ~ iwpt in both expansions (2.86) and (2.99), we obtain (2.102) where (Bp,
The complex scalar field
The generalization to the case of a complex scalar field, ¢ E
¢ = 3le(¢)
+ i~m(¢) ==
1
yf2(¢1
+ i¢2),
and we assume t hat the real and imaginary parts are independent. In a perfectly equivalent way, and this is the point of view we will adopt, we can also consider ¢ and ¢* as two independent fields. The Lagrangian obtained in both cases should be real, so that for a free massive field (2.103) Note the absence of the factor ~ in the mass term, compared with the Lagrangian (2 .61 ). This is due to the fact that since the two degrees of freedom of the field are
96
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
independent, the variation with respect to ¢ or ¢* does not give the factor 2 of real scalar field. The two conjugate momentums are
7T =
~~
= ¢* and
7T* = : ; = ¢,
which are indeed complex conjugates of one another and are hence independent. theory describing a complex scalar field is simply that of two real scalar fields of same mass, related to each other by the fact that they are the real and imagi parts of a complex number. The energy-momentum tensor is obtained by summing (2.31) over the indepen degrees of freedom
which gives
(2.
We find again the same result as the one obtained using the definition that comes f the variation with respect to the metric. The commutation relations at equal time between the field operators and t conjugate momentum are now
(2. The mode expansion is of t he form
(2. where we have introduced two different sets of operators, complex. Their commutation relations are now
ELk
and
bk , since the fie
(2.
all the other commutators vanish. With the normal ordering for the operators discussed in the case of a real sc field, the Hamiltonian takes a form equivalent to (2.89), that is
(2 .
which shows t hat a complex scalar field can be interpreted as a collection of kinds of different particles, but with the same mass, corresponding to the two of operators ELk and bk . The Fock space is then the tensor product of the two F spaces generated by these operators, with one mutual state, which is the vacuum annihilated by both ELk and bk .
Canonical decompositions
2.2.3.1
97
M axwell or Praca field
The Lagrangian of a massive complex vector field is obtained by generalizing Proca's Lagrangian (2. 71 ) as LP roca
=
-~FI.wpi.w + M~A:A" ,
(2.109)
where A" now has four complex components. As for the scalar field , the mass term no longer has the factor ~ characteristic of the real field. These types of fields can describe charged vector particles, such as t he W± bosons mediating the weak inter action. The expansion into creation and annihilation operators is analogous to (2.106), up to the fact that due to the gauge invariance for the Maxwell case with vanishing mass , or for the gauge constraint for the massive case of Proca [see the discussion below (2.71)], t he number of degrees of freedom is not equal to the number of field components (i.e. four ), but three for the massive field and two otherwise. This point leads to subtleties in the quantization that are discussed in Refs. [7- 9] to which we direct the reader. 2.2.3.2
Internal symmetries
The Lagrangian (2. 103) not only represents two independent scalar fields of t he same mass. Indeed, these two fields are the components of a complex number and the Lagrangian is thus invariant under the phase shift and
(2.110)
where ex E IR is an arbitrary constant. Expressed in terms of t he real and imaginary parts of ¢, the phase shift (2.110) corresponds to a global internal rotation. It is this invariance that imposes the stat es 'a' and ' b' to have the same mass. From Ncether's theorem , the existence of such an invariance should translate into the existence of a conserved quantity. To determine it let us work in the limit ex « 1, such that we can expand t he exponential in (2.110), leading to the infinitesimal transformation ¢' = (1 + iex)¢. This transformation being independent of the spatial coordinates, x, we have i" = 0 in (2 .29) , and the current
J
" _ . 8L . J. - 2 88,,¢ 'f'
-
. 8L ..J..* 88,,¢* 'f' ,
2
(2.111)
is conserved since in that case, we have o¢ = iex¢ and o¢* = -iex¢* (we have removed the irrelevant normalisation factor ex in this definition). The conserved 'charge ' is obtained by direct integration, i.e. (2. 112) After quantization , this charge leads to the operator (2. 11 3)
98
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
which is indeed time independent since its equation of motion , using the form (2.1 of the Hamiltonian , is
dQ dt
. [,Q, He , ]=
= -~
O.
Equation (2.113) can be easily interpreted by saying that particles associated w the operators a and b are particles of opposite charges; in reality they are antipartic of one another. The complex scalar field is only an example of internal symmetry, in this case of invariance under transformations of a U( l) group. The associated charge is, in gene called hypercharge, and corresponds to the electric charge only in the case where U(l) group is that of electromagnetism. The different existing particles of which will make an inventory in Section 2.3, indicate the existence of more symmetries, ba on larger symmetry groups.
2.2.3.3 Fermions and anticommutation relations
It is possible to expand the Dirac field (2.63) in a similar way as in the exp sion (2 .106) , with an important difference however: the field operators, and hen those associated to the annihilation and creation of particles, must respect antico mutation relations instead of commutation relations of the type (2.83) or (2.84). T consist ency problem related to this point is made explicit in Refs. [7,8], and is beyo the scope of this presentation. It will be sufficient to know that for fermions we ne to replace the Poisson brackets by anticommutation relations
and
(2. 1
where we used the fact that , from the Lagrangian (2.63), the conjugate momentum the spinor is given by
=
7r7j; -
O£Dirae _ .
o1/J
-
'"I,t
~'f/
.
(2.11
Note that these anticommutators, similarly to the commutators for bosonic fiel are taken at equal time. At this point, it is interesting to note that if we place oursel in t he context of field t heory at finite temperature (thermal field theory, see e Ref. [10]) , then these anticommutation relations are necessary so that the fermio satisfy the Pauli exclusion principle; moreover, they lead to the correct statisti distribution law, i. e. the Fermi- Dirac law (just as the commutation relations for bosons lead to the Bose- Einstein distribution) .
2.3
Classification and properties of the elementary particles
The general properties of elementary particles are gathered in Table 2.1 (see Ref. [11 When one looks at these properties, one finds structures, such as illustrated , for stance, in Fig. 2.1 showing the particular case of baryons of spin ~ and of posit parity (parity is defined later , here it is only an illustration).
Classification and properties of the elementary particles I
I
I
I
t,-
t, 0
t,+
t, ++
or-
0
0
0
o
2: -
2: 0
2:+
-1
I-
0
0
0
-2
r--
0
-3
-
~
99
-
1236 MeV
- 1385 MeV
so - 1532 MeV
0
Q-
0 I
-1
- 1672 MeV I
o
I
I
1
2
Fig. 2.1 An example of the structure observed between the elementary particles : the baryons of spin ~ and of positive parity. Table 2.1 Nomenclature of the elementary particles. The families based on quarks (q) have several hundreds of particles identified so far , whereas the leptons and the gauge fields are here presented in an exhaustive way in the context of the standard model. The gauge fields are written in the following way: I is the photon, the ZO and W ± bosons are the mediators of the weak interaction, and ga represent the 8 gluons of the strong interaction . Spin
Name
Examples
B aryons = qqq Ha drons
{
Mesons = qij
n
7r°'±, Ko'± ,J/'Ij;, Do , Bo , 1'/ , '
Leptons Gauge fields
This kind of diagram has made it possible to understand the existence of a very precise structure, the history of which is discussed in Ref. [12]. In what follows, we will only indicate the result of numerous years of experimental research that led to the so-called 'standard ' model of particle physics, its theory is the subject of Section 2.6.
2.3.0.4
Exchange bosons
The known particles come m three forms. First, we find the bosons of unit spin, mediating fundamental interactions: they are the gauge bosons, namely the photon " which mediates the electromagnetic interaction, the eight gluons ga, which mediate the
100
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
strong nuclear interaction , and the vectors ZO and W ± . The latter have the proper of being massive and are hence described by Proca's Lagrangian (2.109) , at least long as we ignore their interactions. The vectors ZO and W ± allow the weak nucle interaction to propagate, W ± are in addition electrically charged . According to the current theoretical ideas, to be complete, one should add to th table the graviton, hl-'v, massless 'particle' (in the framework of a quantum theo of gravity equivalent to that of the other interactions) of spin 2 responsible for t gravitational interaction (Chapter 1). In the absence of any satisfactory quantu theory of gravity, we do not consider at the moment the graviton as an elementa particle belonging to the standard model.
2.3. 0.5
Leptons
Of spin ~ , t he leptons, among which t he electron is the best known , are of negati electrical charge (e - , p,- and T- ) or vanishing (v e , vI-' and VT which are the associat neutrinos). The evolution of these particles is dict at ed by the Dirac equation, coupl or not to electromagnetism , depending on the case. They are also subject to the we interaction and can be grouped into three 'doublets' and
(::)
which have exactly the same properties with respect to this weak interaction. Actual the only characteristic that allows us to distinguish between these different double is the mass of the particles that constitute them. Moreover, among them, only t doublet of the electron is stable, the others, of higher mass, are subject to the weak a electromagnetic interactions, and can decay into, for instance, electrons and electro neutrinos. For a long time, the neutrinos have been considered to have a vanishing mass, b some recent experiments and measurements (see Ref. [2] of Chapter 9) have show that there must be a mixing between t he different species of neutrinos, which is on possible for massive particles.
2.3.0.6
Hadrons
Only one category of particles , albeit t he most numerous one, is subj ect to the stro interaction: it is the hadrons. They can be of half-integer spin, such as the proton a the neutron , and then belong to the category of the baryons. The mesons, of integ or vanishing spin, count among them , for instance, the 71"0 and its charged partne 71"±, which are described by the Klein- Gordon equation for the real scalar fields ( the 71"0) or the complex (for the 71"±). The surprising profusion of the hadrons, as well as the observed properties symmetry between the different elements of the families sharing some properties (sp and parity, for instance, as in the illustration of Fig. 2.1) have led to the understandi that these particles, unlike what we currently think of gauge bosons and lepton are not elementary particles, but are constit uted of 'quarks' a The latter are for t
3 According to the legend , this word was proposed by M urray C ell- Mann (Nobel Prize 1969) w would h ave read it in the book ' Finnegan's Wake ' by J ames J oyce.
Internal symmetries
101
moment seen as effectively elementary, of spin ~, and of electric charge + ~ for the quarks u, c and t, and for the quarks d, sand b. We can also group them into doublets for the weak interaction, with a similar structure to the one for the leptons , more precisely
-1
a nd This description, which is satisfying from the theoretical point of view, currently does not have any generally accepted explanation (even if many models exist) . The names of the quarks themselves come from this structure: at the time where only the first family was experimentally accessible, the chosen names were simply up (u) and down (d). Then , a third quark was needed to b e introduced, which was considered as strange (s). The second family was then completed by the charm (c). In the same philosophy, when the presence of the fifth quark started to appear, the name of beauty (b) was proposed, soon replaced by bottom, allowing the first family to be reproduced with the top (t). Just as for the leptons, the only difference between the quark families comes from their masses, as well as the fact that only the members of the first family are stable. The ones from the second and third families decay much faster than their leptonic counterparts since they do so through the strong interaction instead of the weak interaction, the latter having a much weaker amplitude , as its name suggests. All these particles have been produced in accelerators, but have never b een observed alone, which can be explained by the notion of confinement of strong interactions. This is how it is only possible to observe states containing three quarks , baryonic states of half-integer spin, and states composed of one quark and one antiquark, of integer spin: a meson. This point is not yet completely understood theoretically. Table 2.1 summarizes the nomenclature used to describe the diversity of elementary particles. The origin of the mass of all these particles, together with the important disparities observed between them , still pose many questions that are not all yet resolved. As we can see, the known particles reflect, or seem to reflect, some elements of symmetry. These are described by group theory, to which we now turn.
2.4
Internal symmetries
Contrary to leptons , which all appear in doublets , hadrons are found in numerous forms , suggesting that they are not elem entary. In reality, using a much smaller number of elementary particles, in this case quarks , and placing them in a relevant way in group representations, it is actually possible to combine them so that the other representations are perceived as new elementary particles. The role of group theory is precisely to lead us to this conclusion.
2.4.1
2.4.1.1
Group theory
Definitions
A group g is defined as a collection of objects {g;} , where the index i is not necessarily discrete , satisfying the following rules:
102
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
- There exists a composition law, denoted by 0, which can combine any two eleme of the group , the resulting combination being an element of the group: if gl E and g2 E g, then g3 = gl 0 g2 E g. Furthermore, this law is associative, gl 0 (g2 0 g3) = (gl 0 g2) 0 g3 = gl 0 g2 0 g3· - There exists a neutral element, denoted by 1, such that Vg E g, l og = go 1 = - Each element 9 Eg is associated with an inverse element , denoted by g - l, sat fying go g- l = g- l 0 9 = l.
Note that the law 0 in not necessarily commutative: when it is, i.e. if Vgl , g2 E gl 0 g2 = g2 0 gl, the group is then said to be Abelian. In the opposite case, the gro is usually said to be non-Abelian. The simplest group one can think of, besides the trivial group that only conta one element, is the discrete group Z2 that contains two elements, denoted by 1 (wh is the identity) and -1 with the ordinary multiplication law. This is an Abelian gro for which each element is its own inverse. For discrete groups, one can construct t complete table of all possible operations. 2.4.1.2
Lie Groups
Another well-known example of a group is that of translations that transforms a po in space x into x + a. In this case, any element of the group can be directly associat with a translation vector a: the composition law is vector addition, the inverse eleme of a is simply - a, and the identity is the translation by the null vector o. It is ag an Abelian group. Such a group contains an infinite number of elements, which can all b e identified the knowledge of three real numbers (the three coordinates of the translation vecto More generally, if it is possible to describe the elements of a group by a set of numb varying in a continuous interval (but not necessarily infinite), it is then a Lie grou A Lie group is also a manifold. The best-known non-Abelian group is probably that of rotations in three dime sions. Each rotation is determined by, for instance, the three Euler angles , or equiv lently, a unit vector (rotation axis) and the angle of rotation around this rotation ax The composition of two rotations is equivalent to a third rotation, which makes i group (since a rotation can always be inverted by performing the same rotation in t other way, and so a rotation of angle zero is the identity), but the order in which t rotations are performed is crucial and this group is not Abelian. This group, denot by SO(3) , is identical to the group formed by the orthogonal 3 x 3 matrices with u determinant. We can generalize it to the group SO(n) , which contains the orthogo n x n matrices with unit determinant. Each group is associated with an invariance. For instance , in the case of a rotatio the norm of a vector on which the rotation has been performed remains unchang during the transformation. A rotation in a generalized Minkowski space, i.e. havi p spatial dimensions and q time-like dimensions, must keep the form up.up. inva ant; it contains not only rotations in the p-dimensional space, but also pure Loren transformations (some ' boosts') . This group, generalizing SO(n) for arbitrary met signatures, describe p space-like coordinates and q time-like ones, and is denoted SO(p , q). The so-called Lorentz group, is then simply SO(3, 1). The translation gro
Internal symmetries
103
can be associated with the Lorentz group to form the Poincare group on which special relativity is based (see Chapter 1) . 2.4.2
2.4.2.1
Generators
Infinitesimal transformations
An infinitesimal transformation, T€, of a Lie group is a transformation close to the identity and hence can always be written as T€ '::' 1 + iEaAa. This defines the generators Aa , which are Hermitian matrices and depend on the nature of the performed transformation. We suppose here that the Lie group is described by p parameters, i. e. a = 1" " , po A finite transformation can be obtained from an infinitesimal transformation by exponent iation. Such a fini te transformation can always be written as the composition of a large number, tending to infinity, of infinitesimal transformations. If a represent the p necessary numbers for the finite transformation, then we can always write E = a lN, where N » 1, and performing N transformations will indeed lead to the finite transformation. In other words, we will have (2.117)
which is the general form of a finite transformation of the group. 2.4.2.2
Lie Algebra
In order for TOt the property
0
Tf3 to be a group transformation, T-y for instance, one should have
(2.118)
For infinitesimal transformations this gives to second order in the expansion of the exponentials eiOt Aeif3
A
= 1 + i (aa + f3a) Aa - ~ (aaab + f3af3b + 2a af3b) Aa Ab,
the logarithm of which, a lso expanded to second order [using the relation In(l E - ~ E2 + ... ], should be proportional to Aa . We find explicitly
a+
i (a a + f3a) A
~aaf3b
a [A , Ab]
=
+ E)
=
hc Ac .
This equality is in general only satisfied if the commutator of the>. satisfies (2.119)
This relation defines the algebr a associated with the Lie group , i.e. the set of operators of the form aa Aa. The numbers rabe are the structure constants of the group , and the Aa form its algebra. Note that since the generators are Hermitian operators, the structure constants are real numbers .
104
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
2.4.2.3
Representations
In order to be able to classify the particles in terms of symmetry groups , we need sort them depending on the representations of the group of the considered invarian An n-dimensional representation being a set {n a} of n X n matrices satisfying t commutation relations (2.119) of the algebra, the fields that describe the particles o given representation will be gathered in multiplets q. = {iP a}, a = 1,' . . ,n on whi the action of the group is
(2. 12
It is usual to say that iPa transforms under the representation n a , or more direct that iPa is 'in the representation n a'. If two representations are related to each oth by a similarity transformation , i. e.
na = unau t ,
where U is unitary (U t = U - 1 ) , then we say that they are equivalent. In other wor for all practical purposes, it is the same representation , such that the similarity tran formation does not provide any complementary information. If there is an invaria subspace in the representation , i. e. if the action of any element of the group on t vectors of this subspace leads to an element of the same subspace, then the represe tation is said to be reducible. In the opposite case, it is called irreducible. Only t irreducible representations are used to classify the particles in the representations the invariance groups. Moreover , if {na} forms a representation, then so does { _ (na)*}, which is cal the 'conjugate representation ' , [one can easily be convinced that these matrices a respect the algebra closure relation (2.119) since the structure constants of the gro are real] . If a representation and its conjugate are equivalent then we are deali with a so-called real representation. Otherwise, we say the representation is comple In order for a group to be able to potentially reproduce the internal symmetries particle physics, it is often required that it has some complex representations in whi fermions can be placed in a simple way. The representations that are the most relevant for quantum physics are those th preserve the norm defined by liP I2 == iP tiP,
of the multiplet iP . In order for the norm to be conserved during an arbitrary tran formation n a , we see that we need to have
(iP)tiP = iP'tiP' = (iP)t(TaYTa iP ,
for all transformations Ta. We should therefore require that (Ta)tTa = 1, i. e. th it is a unitary transformation. A representation satisfying this condition is a unita representation. Finally, the adjoint representation of a Lie group is formed using its structu constants. It is a representation of the same dimension as the order of the group , which the matrix elements of n a are
(2 .12
Internal symmetries
2.4.2.4
105
Caftan classification
Besides the space-time symmetries (Poincare group) , the invariance groups that are useful from the point of view of the classification of particles are the compact ones, i.e. for which the parameters vary on a finite interval, as if we had to deal with generalized rotations in an internal space (and in many cases, it is actually precisely the required invariance). Moreover, we wish to classify the particles along 'fundament al' invariances, i.e. with no substructure (we will see later that only one coupling constant comes into play in these groups, which makes them even more interesting). This is why we are interested in simple groups: if H is a subgroup of 9 and if Vg E 9 and Vh E H , the element go h 0 g - l is still in H, then H is an invariant subgroup of g. 9 is simple if there is no invariant subgroup in g, and semi-simple if it does not contain any Abelian invariant subgroup. One can show that a compact and semi-simple group is thus either forced to be simple or is the direct product of two or more simple groups. Using this philosophy, studying simple Lie groups is therefore sufficient to classify all semi-simple compact groups . Note also that the groups with structure S x [U(l)]n with S a semi-simple group and n an arbitrary integer, which are called reducible groups, have representations that can all be decomposed as a product of irreducible representations; t his property makes them especially interesting for the classification of elementary particles. 8ince the simple Lie groups are also subj ect to the constraint (2.119), they can be classified in terms of their structure constants . This classification was performed by E. Cartan at the beginning of the twentieth century. He proved that the simple Lie groups could be classified into 4 large categories, namely 80(2n) , 80(2n + 1), 8U(n + I) , and 8p(2n), to which one should add the so-called exceptional groups , which can not be classified into any of these categories, called G 2 , F 4, E 6 , E7 and Es· For the four infinite sequences, n is the rank of the group, i. e. the maximal number of generators that can be simultaneously diagonalised. For the exceptional groups, the rank is given by the index in the notation. For each group , the order, i.e. the number of generators, is indicated in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Order (number of generators) or dimension of the simple Lie groups of rank n according to the Cartan classification (the index of the exceptional groups is the rank). Group SU(n + 1) SO(2n + 1) Sp(2n) SO(2n)
G2
F4 E6 E7 Es
N generators
(n (n (n (n
~ ~
~ ~
1) 2) 3) 4)
n(n+2) n(2n + 1) n(2n + 1) n(2n -1) 14 52 78 133 248
106
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
The groups of the four infinite sequences can be understood using their fundamenta representation, i.e. the one of smallest dimension (from which, by direct product, a the other representations can be constructed) . The set of all complex unitary matrice of dimension n x n forms the group U(n) ('U' for 'unitary'), the subgroup restricted t the unit determinant matrices is 8U(n) ('8' for 'special'). It is the set of transformation that leave invariant the inner product of two vectors of a complex space of dimensio n. The transformations of this group leave invariant, among other things , the norm o the complex vectors and can be used in quantum mechanics to assure the conservatio of probabilities. The sequence 80(n) is constructed from the matrices that leave invariant the inne product of two real vectors. They are orthogonal matrices (hence the '0') with uni determinant (special) of dimension n x n. Finally, the group 8p(2n) regroups all th matrices M of dimension 2n x 2n that leave invariant the antisymmetric matrix
o
1
- 10
s=
o
1
-10
o
1
- 10
These matrices therefore satisfy MT S M = S, where MT is the transpose matrix of M Thus , the antisymmetric and quadratic form y T Sx for two real vectors of dimension 2 is conserved. The matrices M defined in this way are called the symplectic matrices thus the name of the group. The only transformations that allow us to conserve probabilities in quantum me chanics are those that are unitary. Can we hence deduce that only the groups of th type 8U (n) can playa role in physics, and that hence all theories should be based o such a group? Unfortunately, the answer to this question is negative: some representa tions of the groups classified by Cartan are unitary, as well as respecting the rules o their classification. We can therefore exclude a group as a possible internal invarianc only if we can show that it has no unitary representation. This is , for instance, th case of 80(11) , which is hence excluded as a grand unification group candidate. Thi is why it is indispensable to study in detail the representations of the possible Li groups.
2.5
Symmetry breaking
Not all the symmetries existing in Nature are manifest , and some underlying ones ar not immediately visible at low energy. This is , for instance, the case for the doublet of the type (e - , ve). If these particles really belong to the same representation of th gauge group of the weak interaction, why do they not have the same characteristic as well (mass , electric charge, for instance)? The answer to this question relies on th mechanism that enables us to break symmetries, and in particular the gauged ones.
Symmetry breaking
2.5.1
107
Gauge group
We are generally confronted with 'gauge' invariances, i.e. local invariances. This leads to the existence of a gauge boson, through which some interactions are performed: the presence of a gauged (local) symmetry in particle physics, as in gravity, implies the existence of an interaction.
2.5.1.1
Local symmetries
The simplest illustration of a local symmetry is given by electromagnetism. Its action is invariant under the transformation of the group U(l), which leads to the prediction of the existence of the photon, i. e. the term (1.94) of Chapter 1 in the total action. Consider a complex scalar field , cp(xl-') E C, invariant under the phase transformations cp - 7 cp' = e ic 4>C
(0l-'cp)*ol-'cp
-7
(ol-'cp')*ol-'cp'
= =
[(01-' - iC¢0l-'a) cp*] [(01-' + ic¢ol-'a) cp] (2.122) (0l-'cp)*ol-'cp + ic¢JI-'0l-'a + c~lcpI20I-'aol-'a ,
where the conserved current JI-' = -i(cp*ol-' cp - cpol-'cp*) is given by (2.111). We can note here that this term, proportional to the conserved current, leads, after integration by parts, to a surface term in the action and thus has no physical effects. Despite this fact, the action is still not invariant since the last term is remaining.
2.5.1.2
Gauge boson
The form (2 .122) suggests the replacement of the partial derivative by a gauge covariant derivative by introducing a new vector field GI-'. If we define (2.123) with 9 an arbitrary coupling constant, we find that this term transforms as
We can therefore simply impose GI-' to transform as
GI-'
-7
G'I-'
=
GI-' -
~ol-'a 9 ,
(2.124)
in order for the action to be again invariant , whatever the value of c¢. Since the action (l.94) with the Minkowski metric T) c
108
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
where GI-'V = ol-'CV - ovCI-" and we have generalized the potential of the scalar field for it to be an a priori arbitrary function of the field norm I¢I == j[¢f2. The action (2.125) is the basis of the scalar electrodynamics, an example of gauge theory. We should note that (2.125) does not have any mass term for the vector field CI-'. This comes from the fact that such a term, described by the Lagrangian of Proca (2.71) , is not invariant under the transformation (2.124). The action (2.125) may be generalized to the case where the gauge group is not Abelian, this is what is done in the context of the standard model of Section 2.6 Note already here that the gauge bosons introduced in the framework of non-Abelian theories can neither be massive, for the same reason that a mass term a la Proca is not gauge invariant.
2.5.1.3
Fermions
In a similar way, the action for the fermions (2.67) is made invariant under the local transformation 'Ij; ----> 'Ij;' = eicrcx'lj; by replacing the partial derivative by the gauge covariant derivative (2.126)
VIle can also see that an extra coupling term with the scalar field can be introduced. Finally, the action for the fermions, can be written in a general form as
(2.127)
with f an arbitrary constant, which, in addition of (2.125), allows us to describe a theory containing a fermion and a complex scalar field coupled via an intermediate vector. We can also see that the fermion can have a purely massive term in addition to its coupling with the scalar field , while respecting the invariance. 2.5.2
Higgs mechanism
The Higgs mechanism allows us to build a theory invariant under the transformations of a given group, while this invariance is not manifest. In other words, it allows us to impose an invariance with some properties to theories that do not seem to have it, as is, for instance, the case for theories having massive gauge bosons.
2.5.2.1
Higgs potential
We consider a complex scalar field ¢ and a gauge field AI-', the dynamics of which is described by the action (2. 125). For technical reasons that we will not discuss here, (of renormalization, see, for instance, Ref. [7]), the potential V(I ¢I ) cannot introduce powers of I¢I higher t han 4. We generally choose a quadratic term, i.e. we postulate a mass for the scalar field, and a quartic term, in AI¢1 4 . In the case of the Higgs mechanism, the chosen potential is given by
VHiggs (¢) = A ( I¢I 2 - Ti 2)2 ,
(2.128)
depicted in Fig. 2.2. The parameter Ti, having the dimension of a mass, is called a 'vacuum expectation value' (VEV).
Symmetry breaking
109
!Jle (1/1 / 17)
'i5'rn
(1/1 /17)
Fig. 2.2 The Higgs potential as a fun ction of the components (real and imaginary parts) of the Higgs field . The circle 11>12 = TJ2 indicates the set of possible minima.
For the theory to make sense, one should first define the vacuum. It can be obtained , at the classical level, by demanding the energy, i.e. the Hamiltonian, to be a minimum. A simple generalization of (2.88) gives in that case H(x , t)
= ~ [1>2 + (V¢) 2 + 2V(¢)]
,
(2.129)
which is the sum of two positive-definite terms and of the potential. As a consequence, the minimal energy is reached when the field is invariant with respect to the transformation of space and time, so that 1> = V ¢ = O. Furthermore, the potential should also be minimized , which leads to
(2.130) As illustrated in Fig. 2.2 , one of the solutions, here ¢ = 0, represents a local maximum of the potential, thus it is an unstable state of the theory. The second solution, i¢i = T), on the other hand, is the absolute minimum of the potential. This is the value the field will hence naturally take and that describes the vacuum st ate of the theory (thus the name of t he parameter T)) .
2.5.2.2 Goldstone boson The expansion of the field ¢ around its VEV is
¢ = [T) +
~h(X, t)]
ei8(X,t )/V2rJ,
(2.131)
110
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
e
where h and are two real fields. Noting be written as ,
mh
==
2,j),'rJ , the potential for h and
e
(2 .
and is independent of e. This can easily be understood by examining the poten the fluctuations h and e around the expectation value 'rJ of the field correspon fluctuations either along the radial direction (h) , thus changing the energy of configuration , or along the circle of the minima (e) , which by definition do not any energy. The field h is called the Higgs field , whereas e is the Goldstone boson
2.5.2. 3
Masses of the bosons and fermions
The degree of freedom corresponding to the Goldstone boson is not physical. Actu it is always possible to choose a gauge in which it is suppressed , since the only p where it comes in is in the kinematic term of the field cp, which can be expanded
(2.
Choosing the gauge in which CI-' ----> CI-' + (0l-' e) / (V2'rJ9 Cf ) , the field e comple disappears. After expanding the kinematic part (2.133) ofthe scalar field cp, one can see app ing a term similar t o Proca's one (2.70) for the vector field C w This implies that field has gained a mass during this process. After identification, we find Me = V2g The appear ance of a massive vector field can be explained by the loss of the G stone boson. Its corresp onding degree of freedom cannot have completely disappea and it has actually been completely absorbed ('eat en ', as it is sometimes writ by the gauge field. A massless vector field has indeed only two degrees of freed corresponding in t he classical theory to t he two t ransverse polarization modes ther circular or linear. On the other hand , a massive vector field evolves such its angular moment um has a vanishing projection , and therefore has three poss modes. The coupling of the scalar cp to the fermion in (2.127) leads to a modification of fermion 's mass, which is increased (or decreased , depending on the sign of the coup const ant f), by 6.mf = i'rJ. Thus, if the fermion was by symmetry initially mass as is the case in t he electroweak and strong st andard model, it will t hus acqui mass, in the same way as the gauge field. This is why fermions of extremely diffe masses can be placed in the same multiplet . We will see later , in the context of st andard model of the electroweak and strong interactions , how this process is app in a precise case, and is checked experimentally. 2.5.3
Non-Abelian case
T he Higgs mechanism can easily be generalized to an arbitrary group Q, which coul non-Abelian , but t hat we suppose is simple. We now consider a field in a representa
Symmetry breaking
111
of dimension n , i.e. a column vector ¢ composed of n real scalar fields ¢a, with a = 1, ... , n. The VEV is now a vector
~~
(Oi¢ iO)
~
C) ·
(2.134)
with 10) the vacuum st at e of the scalar fields. The individual VEVs , 7]a = (OI ¢a IO), satisfy L a7]; = 7]2 . The potential of ¢ is always of the form (2.128) , with I¢I = L a¢; , so that once again we have oV(¢) I =0
O¢a
> =TJ
'
and we define the quantum fields ¢a == ¢a - 7]a. The mass term then t akes the general form 1 02V ' , Lm ass
= - "2 O¢aO¢b¢a ¢b·
If we perform a global infinitesimal transformation with paramet er a c tential transforms as V(¢) --> V (¢) + SV(¢) , with
«
1, the po-
OV .oV C b SV (¢) = o¢a S¢a = Z o¢a (ac R) a ¢b, where we assume that ¢ transforms under the given representation with the matrices
RC For the pot ential to be invariant under the previous transformation, we need OV (¢ ) = 0, implying that
oV (Rc)b A. = 0 O¢a a 'f' b . Differentiating with respect to ¢d for ¢ = ry (for which t he first partial derivative of the potential cancels), leads to
I
0 2V o¢ o¢ a
d
> =TJ
(RCry)a = O.
There are now two possible ways to make these terms vanish , according to whether or not (R Cry) a vanishes. The set of the generators satisfying (RCry )a = 0 forms a subgroup 'H of 9 under which the vacuum is still invariant. Thus, the scheme of the symmetry breaking is 9 --> H. The expansion (2.131) around the VEV can be generalized t o 7]1
+ hI (x) (2.1 35)
o
112
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
assuming that only the p first values of
so that
(2 .
o
which defines the p physical Higgs fields of the theory. Under a general transformation with parameters aa, the gauge bosons Cal" tr form as the generalization of (2.124) to the non-Abelian case, more precisely
(2.
where 9 gives the coupling of the group and the r bca its structure constants. We sh stress t hat there is only one coupling constant , valid for all the fields submitted to required invariance. This property is only valid for a simple group or a simple g risen to any power with a transverse symmetry, which allows us to identify the diffe groups. In t he case of the Higgs mechanism, we use this relation for the transformat t hat only bring into play the n - (p + 1) Goldstone fields (h, i = p + 1, . . . ,n ins of the general paramet ers aa' To first order in Bi , the relation (2 .137) gives
Substituting t his expression, together with (2.136) in the kinetic term of
2.6
The standard model SU(3)c x SU(2) L x U(l)y
The standard model of non-gravitational interactions accounts for all the interact mentioned in Section 2.3 classified dep ending on the representations of the gr
The standard model SU(3)c X SU(2) L X U(1)y
113
SU(3)c for t he strong interactions, and SU(2)L x U(l)y for the electroweak ones. This last symmetry is broken by t he Higgs mechanism described in Section 2.5.2 along the following symmetry-breaking process SU(2)L x U(l)y
--+
U(l) elec,
leaving the photon m assless, as observed. 2.6.1
The strong interaction (QeD)
The description of the strong interaction is based on an invariance under the transformations of the group SU(3). Since t his group has 8 generators, its joint represent ation, in which t he gauge bosons G~ are placed , is of dimension 8: a = I , . . ·8. T he leptons are not subj ect to these interactions , and t hus appear as singlets of SU(3), which do not couple to the gauge boson. The quarks exist in three possible states, and are thus placed in a three-dimensional representation, denoted by 3. The quarks are therefore represented in column vectors with these three elements , Q ==
(ur) (dr) (sr) (Cr) (tr) (br) ug
'ub
,
dg
,
db
Sg,
cg
sb
cb
,
tg
,
tb
bg
.
(2.138)
bb
The index is called colour ,4 which has nothing to do with any actual coloured appearance. Inst ead , this terminology comes from an analogy: due to the fundamental properties of the strong interaction , a quark can never be observed alone but only in pairs of quark- antiquarks, or in sets of t hree quarks. In the latter combinations, the total colour cancels, in the same way as it is possible to combine the three fundamental colours to give white, which can be seen as t he absence of any colour. This is why t his SU(3)c group is called the colour group. The covariant derivative of each quark Q, with respect to the strong inter action is given by (2.139) where t he Aa are 8 m atrices forming the algebra of SU(3). We often take the Gell-Mann matrices (see, for instance, Refs. [7, 13] for more details) which satisfy the appropriate commutation relations of SU(3) , i.e. (2 .119) with the structure constants of SU(3) , denoted as r~. The coupling constant g3 of the group measures the intensity of the interaction. Experimentally, it has been measured that this coupling constant has a higher numerical value than those for the other interactions, t hus the name of strong interaction. By analogy with the colour states, this interaction is also called quantum chromo dynamics 'QCD'. The Lagrangian of QCD takes t he form .cQCD
=-
L
Q'"YJ1. D (3 )Q -
~GaJ1.vGaJ1.v,
(2.140)
quarks
4The index tha t t a kes the va lue r, g and b represents the ' fund amental ' colours red, green and blue.
114
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
2.6.2
Electroweak interaction
The electroweak interaction combines the properties of the weak interaction , com from the invariance under transformations of the group SU(2)L' and of electrom netism , based on U(l)elec, brought together as a unique interaction. All particles combined in singlets or doublets of SU(2)L' 2.6.2.1
Quarks
The quarks of each generation are supposed to be equivalent , so that the doublets
(2.1 where each fermion appears as an eigenstate of chirality with the definition 1
+
,5)'I/J,
(2.1
'l/JR== ( - 2where the matrix
,5is defined as - 10) ( 01'
One can explicitly check that (,5) 2 = 1, so that the operators P R,L == ~ (1 ± are proj ectors orthogonal to each other , i. e. they satisfy P ; ,L = PR,L and PRPL = Another useful property is to do with the anticommutation relations: anticommu with all , l-' , or (2.1 {,5"I-'} = 0,
,5
relation that will be very useful in the following sections. Finally, the quarks with right chirality are defined as singlets of SU(2)L:
2.6.2.2
Chirality
The proj ectors PR,L on the state of definite chirality 5 come into playas soon as we interested in the properties of the spinor with respect to the Lorentz transformatio In terms of the so-called chiral representation (2.65), t he projectors are found to t the following explicit form
1_,5 (10)
P L = -2- =
00
'
and
P = R
1+2,5 = (001' 0)
(2.1
In this form, the proj ection properties of these operators become transparent. N by the way that due to the fact that and anticommute (2.143), the joint spin 7jjL,R are defined using opposite proj ectors
,5
,0
5The op erator 'Y 5 is called chirality b ecause it indicates how its eigenstates transform unde parity transformation [6 , 9].
The standard model SU(3)c X SU(2)L X U(l)y
~L = ~ (I ~15 ) = ~PR
and
115
(2.145)
Thus, they satisfy (2.146) and and
(2 .147)
which confirms that a spinor existing only in one chirality state, cannot have any mass term in the Lagrangian. From the projectors (2.1 44) , one can deduce that the eigenstat es of the chirality are quadri-spinors and where ~ and X are two bi-spinors representing respectively the left and right components of the total spinor. The Dirac equation (2.62) can then be written as two coupled equations, the Weyl equations, for the bi-spinors
(at + ( j . V ) ~ = -imx, (at - ( j . V )X = -im~ ,
(2.148) (2.149)
where the mass m should now be understood as a coupling t erm between the two components. For a massless spinor , both equations decouple and each bi-spinor , ~ and X, called Weyl spinors, evolve independently. We will see lat er that these kinds of spinors have an especially important role to play in the formalism of supersymmetry.
2.6.2.3
Leptons
For a long time, neutrinos were thought to be represented by some Weyl tensors. Experimentally, t hey are only observed in the left state V L , leading to the conclusion that they should be massless. Since they only have two degrees of freedom , in order to put them in similar doublets as in (2.141), it is only possible to pair them with the left component of the corresponding lepton, leaving the right component in a singlet of SU(2)L' thus the index 'L' of the group . The structure is thus
(:eLL) , R, (~LL ) , e
~R '
(V;LL) ,
TR
,
(2.150)
which gathers in a similar scheme, the electron, the muon and the tau with their associated neutrinos. The covariant derivatives are defined as
D12) (:e L
)
== (01" -
ig2 B il"ai )
L
(:e L
)
•
(2. 151 )
L
(Ji (i = 1,2, 3) are the Pauli matrices (2.66), generators of the group SU(2) since the satisfy the algebra
[a i ,a j
]
= 2i Ei\ a k .
(2 .152 )
Similar to the strong interaction, the vector bosons B il" are in the adjoint representation of SU(2). The coupling constant of the group is here called g2 . The coefficients
116
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
ij E k
take numerical values +1 (resp. - 1) if (i,j,k) is an even (resp. odd) permutat of (1,2 , 3), and 0 otherwise (i .e. if two indices are the same) . The structure constant the group SU(2) are given by the rank 3 Levi-Civita tensor 6 , and this group is loc equivalent to that of rotations. Moreover, a charge with respect to the phase transformations is associated to e particle. This 'hypercharge' , to distinguish it from the electric charge Q, is deno by Y and we have YR = -2 for the right leptons, YL = -1 for the left lepto Y(qJ = ~ for the quark doublets (2.141) , of left chirality, and for the right chiral Y(UR , cR , t R) =! and Y(dR , SR , bR ) = -~. The doublet structure of (2.141) and (2.150) reminds us of that of spin ~ w its components 11) and 11)· This is why the doublet classification of SU(2)L is a called weak isospin, denoted by T to avoid any confusion with the spin S. The val T3 = ±~ are respectively given to the top and bottom component of the doub Using this analogy and bearing in mind that the electric charges of the quarks Qu ,c,t = + ~ and Qd,s ,b = -~, the ones for the massive leptons Qe,/-"T = - 1 and t neutrinos have no electric charge, we obtain the Gell-Mann- Nishijima relation
(2.1 Note that for this relation to hold for all particles, we need to set T = 0 for singlets. We can then add a covariant derivative t erm U(l)y for each field ,
where gl is the coupling constant associated with the group U(l)y. 2.6.3
A complete model
Putting together all the previous building blocks, a complete Lagrangian can be writ down to describe the three non-gravitational interactions and all their invariances
2.6.3.1
Kinetic terms
The kinetic terms of the standard model for the electroweak and strong interacti are thus given by
.c kin
=
- i-;!ry/-'
(a/-' -
- 4"1 (o/-,Gv -
- ~ (O/-,G av -
ig 3 G a /-,)...a
ov G/-,)
-
ig2Bi/-,ai - ig1YG/-,) 'ljJ
2
OvGa/-,
+ ifbcaGb/-,Gcv)
2
(2.154
6The Levi-Civita tensor components El , ... ,n = + 1
€
in n dimensions is the completely antisymmetric rank n tensor w
The standard model SU(3)c X SU(2)L X U(l)y
117
where t he action of the covariant derivative depends on which particle it acts. For inst ance, for the lepton doublet of the first family, using the hyper charges obtained earlier , t his gives,
since the leptons are not subj ect to the strong interaction. 2.6.3. 2 W± and ZO bosons and photon ; Weak angle Equation (2. 155) can explicit ly be expanded in left and right components as .c~ in
= - iv eL, I-'81-'ve L
-
ie,l-' (81-'
+ 2ig2 sin Bw A I-') e
- V2g2 (veL,I-'W:e R + eR,I-'W;veJ - L ' I-'Zl-' e L - - g2 -B - (-VeL' I-'ZI-' VeL - COS 2B WVe cos w
-
2 SIn . 2 BWV - e R' I-'Zl-'e ) , R
(2.156) where t he weak a ngle Bw is defined by t he relations
g1
-
g2
=
tanB w ·
(2. 157)
As for the vector fields, they are defined by
(2.158) and
Bw - sinBw) (B31-') ~ (B31-' ) == ( CO~Bw sinBw ) (AZ~,.. ) == (C~S sm Bw cos Bw CI-' CI-' - smBw cos Bw
(AZ~ )
,
,.. (2. 159)
AI-' being t he electromagnetic field. The Lagrangian (2.1 56) can be understood in the following way. First , we notice that the kinet ic term of the electron leads to a gauge coupling of the U( l ) type with the photon , since it can be written in the form
with
q = g2 sin Bw the electromagnetic coupling const ant and Q the electric charge operator , with value Qe = - 1 for the electron. This coupling is the same fo r the left and right degrees of
118
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
freedom of the electron. In addition to the coupling terms, an intermediate neut boson ZJ1. has appeared , coupling both right and left components of the electron a different way, and also adding a self-coupling term for the (left-handed) neutri Finally, charged intermediate bosons make interactions between neutrinos a electrons possible (the charges of t he W± come from the fact that each term of final Lagrangian should preserve the electric charge, which between a neutral neutr and an electron is only possible wit h the indicated signs for the charges). For a quark doublet , one can perform the same expansion, which gives us electric charges of the quarks, but leads to 36 different interaction terms for e generation of quarks once the triplet of colour is made explicit .
W:
2.6.3.3
Symmetry breaking
The Lagrangian (2.154) counts almost all possible terms that satisfy the invariance t he standard model and bringing into play t he particles known experimentally. D to its invariances, and in particular due to the weak isospin, it is not possible to wr mass terms for the leptons. As for the quarks, all elements of the same doublet SU(2)L should have the same mass, like for instance both quarks u and d, which is contradiction with the measurements. Thus t he model can only be made compati with experiments if the SU(2)L symmetry is broken. For this , we introduce a complex field doublet
the dynamics of which is governed by the potential (2.128)
The minimum of this potential is 14>112 + 14>2 12 = ry2. Assuming that the Higgs field not subject to the strong interaction, the kinetic term becomes
(2. 1 which can be expanded as
1&4>11 2 + 1&4>21 2 + v2g2 (.JJ1.- W+J1. + .JJ1.+ W - J1.) + (g2 B 3J1. + gl Yq, C J1.).Ji - (g2 B 3J1. - gl Yq, C J1.).Ji: + (g2B3J1. + glYq,CJ1.)214>112 + (g2B3J1. - gl Yq,CJ1.)2 14>21 2 + v2g2 (4)~4>2 + 4>14>;) [w-J1. (g2B3/l- + glYq,C/l-) - W+J1. (g2 B 3/l- + 2g2 (14)11 2 + 14>212) W:W-J1..
ID12 =
glYq, CJ1.)]
(2.16
In (2 .160) , we have introduced the Uy(l) hypercharge Yq, of the Higgs doublet; determine its value below.
The standard model SU(3)c X SU(2)L X U(1)y
119
The currents are defined by
and
JI-'- == i (cP~0l-'cP2 - cP20l-'cP~) , with J + = (J- )t = i (cPZ0l-'cPl - (h0l-'cPz) . We now work around the minimum of the potential, and perform a gauge transformation to suppress any of the three redundant degrees of freedom . In the unitary gauge, for which cPl = 0, and cP2 = 7) + hlJ2, i.e.
+ O
with
(~)
and
(2.162)
we are left with only the Higgs field, h, which is real. We then get
c :r =
- ~Ol-'hOl-'h - (7)2+ ~h2 + V27)h)
[(92B31-' - glY<jJ CI-')2
+ 29~W+I-'W;],
(2.163) where we can recognize the intermediate vector boson ZI-' provided that we fix the hypercharge of the Higgs scalar doublet to Yq, = 1. It is the only value that will preserve the electromagnetic invariance after the symmetry breaking, ensuring the photon defined by the relation (2.159) remains massless.
2.6.3.4
Masses of the intermedia te bosons
Equation (2.163) contains interaction terms between the Higgs boson, h, and the intermediate bosons, ZO and W±. The mass term of the latter can be extracted. Taking h = 0 in (2. 163) , we get
.c masses --
-
2g27) 2 2W+ W - 1-' I-'
-
7) 2 cosg22 Bw
Z I-' ZI-' =-
-
M2W W+W-I-' I-'
-
-21 M Z2ZI-' ZI-' ,
(2.164) so that we can make the identification
Mz =
and
..)2g27)
= Mw .
cosBw
cos Bw
(2.165)
This last relation allows us to derive the value of the weak angle Bw from the masses of the intermediate bosons. This has been done following their discovery at CERN in 1982 . Their actual masses are [11]
Mw = 80.419 ±0.056 GeV
and
Mz = 91.1882 ±0.0022 GeV,
which gives the weak mixing angle, namely sin 2 Bw ,...., 0.22 , that is approximatively ()w ~ 280. Note that no term of the type AI-'AI-' appears in the Lagrangian (2.164). The photon remains massless, in agreement with Maxwell 's electromagnetism.
120
Overview of particle physics an d the Sta ndard Model
2.6.3.5
Masses of the fermions
T he particles of right and left chirality belong to different representations of SUL (2 thus it is not possible to construct mass terms in a simple way just as for t he gau fields, one should impose that all the fermions are massless before the symmetry brea ing. Moreover , since the right neutrino should be absent from this theory, one shou postulate that the neutrino is massless, even after symmetry breaking. The most general coupling terms between the fermions and the Higgs field th satisfy the required invariances, are given by 7
(fleptonsfL . cpe R
+ f qT ii L
. ;PU R
+ fqlii L
.
cpd R
+ h. c. )
,
generations
(2.16 with ;;,. 'f'
. 2 A.*
=W
'f'
(
¢2 )
= -¢r '
where the matrix (j2 is defined by (2 .66), with hypercharge YJ) = -Y¢ = -1 , an where the sum is over the three different generations , so that the fields e R , u R an dR represent, respectively, (e, j.L , T)R ' (u , c, t) R and (d , s, b)R' In (2.166), the numbe iteptons, fqT and fq l, called the Yukawa coefficients, not only represent the coupling the quarks and leptons with the Higgs fields, but, once the symmetry is broken , als give the values of the m asses of the different fermions. One can see that the interactio of a given particle with the Higgs field is all the more important that it is massive. 2.6.3.6
Electromagnetic symmetry
Working in the unitary gauge defined by (2.162), we see that the vacuum configuratio CPo is identically annihilated by the electric charge operator Q given by the Gell-Mann Nishijima relation (2.153). Indeed, with
T3 =
~2(j 3 = ~2
(1 0) 0-1
'
and Y¢ = 1, we have
The annihilation of the vacuum state by the generator of electromagnetism impli that this state satisfies (2.167
and hence it is invariant under a transformation U(I)elec. Thus, the symmetry breakin is not total and the electromagnetic invariance is recovered, as required for the theor to be compatible with experiments .
70 ne can explicitly check that with the hypercharges given previously for all particles, these term are the only possible ones t h at are invariants under the tran sformation of U(1)y.
Discrete invariances
121
Note that even if here the relation (2.167) has been explicitly obtained in a unitary gauge, from the invariance of the initial gauge of the theory we can conclude , independently of the gauge , that this result will apply for a ny choice of gauge, i.e. that for any choice of the configuration of the Higgs doublet, as long as it is at the minimum of the potential.
2.7
Discrete invariances
In addition to the continuous symmetries, usually gauged ones, there exist discrete symmetries such as parity, charge conjugation and time-reversal invariance. The first one appears to be maximally violated by the weak inter actions, and the last one weakly, for instance , in the system J(o - Ko · In what follows, we will limit ourselves to the study of the scalar field, all results being generalizable to the fermionic and vector sectors [8]. For a classical field, a symmetry operation can be obtained in the following way. For a given transformation x f---7 f( x , a), where a represents a set of parameters defining the transformation , the field ¢( x) transforms as ¢'(X')
= A(a)¢(x) ,
(2. 168)
where A is a matrix if the scalar field ¢ has several components. A state I'lj;) in the Fock space, corresponding to the field operator ¢, transforms linearly i'lj;') = U(a)I'lj;), where ut = u - 1, enssuring that ('lj;I'lj;) = ('lj;' i'lj;'). We require that the matrix elements of the field operator satisfy the relation (2.168) ,
between two arbitrary states I'lj;l) and 1'lj;2) and the transformed states I'lj;D and which leads to ut(a)¢(x')U(a) = A(a)¢,
14)~) ,
i.e. to where the dummy variable x' has been replaced by x and expressed using the inverse transformation law. We can now see how these general transformations can be applied to different particular cases, useful in particle physics. 2.7.1
Parity
Let us assume that we perform a reflection transformation on the spatial coordinates
{
X
f---7
x' = -x,
t
f---7
t'
=
t.
(2.169)
If the physics remains unchanged under t his transformation (as is the case, for instance, for the Klein- Gordon equation t hat is of second order in the spatial derivatives) , t hen a classical field can only be modified by at most a phase factor
122
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
¢'(x') = sp¢(x), with Isp 12
=
1. For the field operator this translates into
p - l ¢(X , t)p =
sp¢( - x , t),
(2.1
where P is a unitary operator representing the parity. If ¢ E C, then the variation can be performed via a phase, i. e. sp = e iQ , a E However, for a real field (¢ E ~), the corresponding operator should be Hermitian, ¢t = ¢, and hence
pt ¢t (x , t)
(P-l) t =
p - l ¢ (X , t) p = s;¢( - x , t) ,
s;
from which we deduce that = sp. This, together with the relation Isp 12 = 1, imp t hat sp = ± 1. In this special case, the particle associated with the field will be s to be scalar if sp = + 1 and pseudo-scalar for Sp = -1 , i.e. when it has a negat intrinsic parity. The action of the parity operator on the Hilbert space can be obtained by expand the field in the basis (2 .106) (we consider from now on a complex field) and rewrit t he equation. We find
J
d3k [Pa pt ei(kx-wktl (21T)3 / 2V2wk k =
s p
J
3
d k
(21T)3 / 2V2Wk
+ Pb t pt e- i(k'X - wktl] k
[a e-i(k,x +Wktl k
+ bt ei(k'X -wktl] k
,
(2.1
where the sign of x in the plane-wave exponentials of the right-hand side have b inverted, in accordance with (2.170). Since t his last operation is equivalent, in exponentials , to the one that changes the sign of k , it gives the transformation la of the creation and annihilation operators
Pakpt = spa_ k and
Pblpt
= Spb~k'
(2.1
T hus, the parity operator reverses the sign of the momenta, which had to be expec since t hey are 3-vectors. For the case of a free complex scalar field, i.e. massive but with no interact with any other field , the Hamiltonian, given by the relation (2.108), transforms un parity as
(2. 1
since the integral is p erformed on all values of the vector k and Isp 12 = 1 whicheve the parity of the states we consider . Similarly, the field momentum, equal to
(2.1 transforms as
ppp-l =
_P,
which corresponds to the transformation law of a vector. At this point, it is interest to note from (2.173) that the parity operator commutes with the Hamiltonian, and th
Discrete invariances
123
the parity of a physical state is a constant of motion for the free complex scalar field. Some interactions can modify this conclusion: this is the case of the weak interactions. A parity can also be attributed to the vacuum, and we choose PIO) = 10) (the vacuum must remain identical to itself if the coordinates are inverted). Note that we can explicitly construct an operator P satisfying (2.172) for which this relation is verified, but it is also possible to give a negative intrinsic parity to the vacuum: this only complicates things a little and simply inverts all the fields parities. In other words , this is only a matter of convention. 2.7.2
Charge conjugation
Another discrete transformation as simple as parity can also be performed. This is charge conjugation C, which consists in replacing each particle in a given physical state by its antiparticle. In terms of operators, this amounts to transforming (p into (Pt and vice versa. We can therefore write (2 .175)
and
the second relation of (2. 175) , being simply the Hermitian conjugate of the first one. Just as with parity, in (2.175) , t he eigenvalue of Sc has a unit modulus since transforming twice in a row all the particles and their antiparticles is in the end equivalent to no transformation at all. This is equivalent to saying that C2 = 1. Furthermore, note that C should be unitary, so that finally, we have = C- 1 = C. In terms of the annihilation operators, we find
ct
(2.176) and the Hermitian conjugate relations for the creation operators . Assuming, as before, that the vacuum is an eigenstat e of the charge conjugation, with eigenvalue + 1, i.e. CIO) = 10), we can then determine the charge C of any physical state created with a determined number of particles. Here again, we find t hat for a free scalar field , the charge conjugation is a constant of motion, leaving the Hamiltonian (as well as the momentum) unchanged. However, the conserved charge Q of (2.11 3) changes sign, as one could expect,
CQC- 1 = - Q, so that an eigenstate of the conserved charge Qcannot simultaneously be an eigenstate of the charge conjugation. The time conservation of the latter is thus only useful for physical states with a global vanishing charge. = 0, and the ones that violate parity conserMost of the interactions satisfy
[iI,C]
vation, such as t he weak interactions, more often than not, leave the combination CP invariant . In the section dedicated to baryogenesis in Chapter 9, we will discuss the cases where even this constraint is not valid. However, in all field theories analogous to the one presented here, a discrete symmetry is satisfied, it is the combination CPT, where the last symmetry, the t ime-reversal invariance, requires some technical details that are given in what follows .
124
2.7.3
Overview of particle physics and the Standard Model
Time reversal and CPT theorem
The last discrete invariance, valid for instance for a free scalar field, is that related t time reversal T: {
X
f---+
x' = x ,
t
f---+
t' = - to
(2 .177
Unlike the two previous symmetries, which are unitary operators, this symmetry ca be implemented in the Fock sp~ce of states only in the form of an antiunitary operator An operator T is antiunitary if it is antilinear, i.e. such that
(2.178
and if it satisfies TTt = TtT = l. Thanks to this last operator , one can prove [14] the following very general theorem If a local quantum field theory can be represented by a Hermitian Lagrangian .c(XD that is invariant under proper Lorentz transformations (i.e. without the space an time inversions) and if its field operators satisfy the spin-statistics theorem,9 then w have
(2.179
Due to this relation (2.179), the action integral S = J d 4 x..c is invariant under th transformation CPT. Thus, the equations of motion, which are obtained by varyin the action, and the canonical commutation relations, are also unchanged under th transformation. We can also deduce that the Hamiltonian of the given theory mu commute with CPT,
[CPT, iT] = 0,
and hence any realistic theory, i.e. satisfying the hypothesis of this theorem, has th invariance. This result is often written in the symbolic form 'CPT = 1' . A non-trivial consequence of this theorem is the following: for any theory satisfyin it , i.e. for any realistic theory, the particles and antiparticles should have exactly th same masses and the same lifetimes. This consequence is verified with a very hig precision since, for example, for the Ko/ Ko system, we find [ll]iMKo - MRoi/MKo 10- 18 . For most of the other particles, we find typical values of order of ib.M i/M 10- 5 , and constraints on the differences of lifetimes of order of ib.Ti/T < 10- 3 .
8This happens b ecause of technical reasons related to the fact that the time-reversal operator mu also reverse the roles of the initial and final configurations [8] . 9The spin-statistics theorem , itself also very general in field theory, specifies that the particl associated to integer-spin fields (for instance bosons, scalars and vectors) have a statistics describe by the Bose- Einstein distribution function , whereas the ones corresponding to half-integer fiel (fermions, Dirac spinor, for instance) , are d escr ibed by Fermi- Dirac statistics. This theorem on relies on microcausality. It is discussed in detail in Ref. [15] .
Discrete invariances
125
The standard model of particle physics presented in this chapter has so far never displayed any flaws from the point of view of experimental physics. However no one sincerely thinks that it describes all interactions between the elementary particles in a final way. There are many reasons for this, which are as much experimental as theoretical. From an experimenta l point of view, the recent discovery of the existence of a mass for the neutrinos and the discussion concerning the chirality (Section 2.6.2) indicate that they cannot uniquely exist in the left chirality as attributed by the standard model. There must therefore exist a right neutrino , which has different properties from the left one since it would have otherwise already been detected experimentally. They therefore need to have a very large mass, in order to explain why no accelerator has already produced it. At the experimental level, there is still an unknown . Since the discovery of t he 'top' quark , all particles of the standard model are identified except one , which is maybe the most important since the principle of symmetry breaking relies on it, namely the Higgs boson . As long as it has not been produced directly in an accelerator , it will remain hypothetical, and the model will not have been fully verified. Now from a theoretical point of view, t he situation is even worse. First, this model, although it unifies in a quantum framework the three non-gravitational interactions (electromagnetism , weak and strong) , makes no mention of the last interaction, gravity, despite t he fact t hat one of its pillars, the Higgs mechanism, is supposed to be at the origin of the mass of elementary particles. Interestingly, these masses are also the gravitational charges of these particles . Moreover, t he standard model relies on three different symmetry groups, wit h t hree coupling constants having no links between them, which is not justified by any fundamental principle. Finally, and this may be the most serious, there are 19 free parameters in the theory, which can only be measured. T his proliferation of parameters is often considered as t he sign t hat it is not a fundamental theory but actually a low-energy effective theory. We will see later that in many extensions, the number of free parameters is seriously reduced, and that it is in principle possible to calculate t he 19 arbitrary coefficients that appear in t he general Lagrangian in terms of a much sm aller set of parameters.
References
[1] L. D. LANDAU and E. LIFSCHITZ, Mechanics, Pergamon Press, 1976. [2] N. D ERUELLE and J. P. UZAN , Mecanique et gravitation newtoniennes, Vuibe 2006 . [3] C. COHEN-TANNOUDJI , B. DIU and F. LALOE, Quantum mechanics, John Wil 1992. [4] P. R. HOLLAND, The quantum theory of motion, Cambridge University Pre 1993. [5] J. SCHWINGER, Quantum mechanics, Springer, 200l. [6] F. HALZEN and A. D. MARTIN, Quarks & leptons, John Wiley and Sons, 198 [7] M. A . PESKIN and D . V. SCHROEDER, An introduction to quantum field theo Addison-Wesley, 1995. [8] W . GREINER and J. REINHARDT , Field quantization, Springer-Verlag, 1996. [9] L. H. RYDER, Quantum field theory, Cambridge University Press, 1987. [10] J. 1. Kapusta, Finite-temperature field theory, Cambridge Monographs on Ma ematical Physics, 1994 [11] W. -M. YAO et al., 'The review of particle physics', Journal of Physics, G 33 2006; see also the website http ://pdg .lbl. gov / that gives the same informati Updated almost every two years to take into account new experiments and th results. [12] E. SEGRE, From X-Rays to quarks: modern physicists and their discoveries, Fr man , 1980. [13] H. GEORGI, Lie Algebras in particle physics, Westview Press, 1999. [14] W. PAULI, in Niels Bohr and the development of physics, Pergamon Press, 19 G. LUDERS, Ann . Phys. (NY) 2 , 1, 1957. [15] B. DIU et ai. , Physique statistique, Hermann, 1996.
Part II The modern standard cosmological model
3 The homogeneous Universe The first cosmological solution of Einstein's equation was given by Einstein himself in 1917. At the expense of introducing a cosmological constant, he was able to construct a closed and static space. The general cosmological solutions were discovered independently by Alexandre Friedmann and Georges Lemaitre in 1922 and 1927. This chapter details t he derivation of these solutions from Einstein's equations and studies their kinematics and dynamics before defining the various observational quantities that will be used in this book. It ends on some considerations on lesssymmetric space-times. For complementary developments , see Refs . [1-7].
3.1 3.1.1
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemaitre Constructing a Universe model
Within the framework of general relativity, one can try to answer the question of which solution of Einstein's equation describes the Universe we observe, or more modestly, which solution is an idealized (but good) model of our Universe. To carry out this program, we need enough input from astrophysical and cosmological observations. This program is indeed difficult to tackle and its solution will, in particular, depend on the amount of available data. But , as we noted in the introduction, even with ideal data, there are limitations to the answers one can give to this problem. These limitations arise mainly because we observe only a finite part of one Universe (it is a unique object and we cannot discuss its probable nature by comparing it to similar objects) from a given space-time position (and we are unable to choose this point) . Astrophysical data are mainly localized on our past light cone and around our past worldline for geophysical data. They are thus localized on (just a portion of) a 3-dimensional hyp ersurface. First, it may be that various space-times are compatible with the same data and second, the interpretation of these data is not independent of the space-time structure. Thus , we must distinguish between the observable Universe (for which , by definition , we have data) and the Universe, which includes regions we cannot directly influence or experiment. The inference of the geometrical properties of the Universe from the observable Universe cannot b e achieved without hypothesis and philosophical prejudices. The standard cosmological model, in its simplest form, relies on four central hypotheses. HI Gravitation is well described by general relativity. Indeed , as discussed in Chapter 1, general relativity is well t ested on small scales (e.g. , Solar System scales),
130
The homogeneous Universe
but we cannot exclude that it is not t he case on large scales or at early times (se e.g., Chapter 12 for examples of theories that dynamically become more and mo similar to general relat ivity during t he evolut ion of the Universe). In particula t he E instein equivalence principle implies that the laws of physics can be extrap lated at all times (see Chapter 1). We will thus keep applying, as long as possibl the standard laws of physics, in particular for non-gravitational interactions. H2 Hypothesis on the nature of matter. We do not examine the space-time itself or i matter distribution. Rather , we observe particular objects (e.g. , galaxies, ... ) t h are supposed to be representative of t he total matter content . The influence of th variations of the properties of individual objects on the inference of the matte content of the Universe has to be quantified. On large scales, we will assume t h matter is described by a mixture of a pressureless fluid and radiation, allowin also for a cosmological constant. In particular , we assume that there is no matt outside the standard model of particle physics described in Chapter 2. The perfe fluid hypothesis will be shown to derive from the hypothesis H3. H3 Uniformity principles. The previous hypotheses are not sufficient to solve th E instein equations. We must assume some symmetries for t he space-time. Th hypothesis and their consequences are discussed in Section 3. 1.2 H4 Global struct ure. Hypotheses H1- H3 enable us, as we shall see, to solve Einstein equation and to determine t he lo cal structure of the Universe model. Howeve there may exist various manifolds with identical local geometry and differe global topology, which correspond to the choice of various boundary condition For a globally hyperbolic space-time, the choice of the topology reduces to th choice of the topology of the spatial sections.
As we shall see, t hese hypotheses allow us to construct very successful Univer models but there are reasons to challenge everyone of t hese four assumptions. Th will be discussed mainly in Chapter 12. 3.1.2
Cosmological and Copernican principles
Galaxies seem to be spread isotropically around us, just as the cosmic microwav background radiation. This indicates that the space-time describing the observab Universe should have a spherical symmetry around us. T here are two possible expl nations: either our Galaxy lies in a special place in the Universe so t hat it is no homogeneous and must have a centre. Or the space-time is homogeneous; every poin is then similar and the Universe is isotropic around each point (see F ig. 3.1 ). To construct cosmological models, we can distinguish two uniformity principle T he cosmological principle supposes t hat t he Universe is spatially isotropic and homo geneous. In particular, this implies that any observer sees an isotropic Universe aroun him. We can distinguish it from t he Copernican principle that merely states t hat w do not lie in a special place (the centre) of the Universe. This principle, together wit the isotropic hypothesis, actually implies t he cosmological principle. The cosmological principle makes definite predictions about all unobservable r gions beyond the observable Universe. It completely determines t he entire structu of the Universe, even for regions that cannot be observed. From this point of view this hypothesis, which cannot be tested, is very strong. T he Copernican principle ha
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemaltre
{:] p
{:] Q
131
.......... .. .... ..-. ... .. .. .. ...... ........ .... ··· .. . .. •.. . .... ··.. . -.. U .- ....... . . . . . . .. -. -. .. .... ....... .. ........ {:] p
• • Q.
•
Fig. 3.1 A point distribution , statistically isotropic around every point (left) and around a unique point (P) (right). In the second version, P and Q are not equivalent. The cosmological principle excludes such kinds of solutions, which would assume that we lie in a sp ecial place in the Universe . From Ref. [l J of the introduction.
more modest consequences and leads to the same conclusions but only for the observable Universe where isotropy has been verified. It does not make any prediction on the structure of the Universe for unobserved regions (in particular, space could be homogeneous and nOn isotropic On scales larger than the observable Universe). Some cosmological spaces that do not satisfy this cosmological principle are described in Section 3.6. From a pragmatic point of view, these uniformity principles should be considered in a statistical sense, i. e. for a Universe smoothed On dist ances greater than its larger structures. Thus, they implicitly involve a smoothing scale and a smoothing procedure to which we shall return. They lead to the Friedmann- Lemaitre solut ions that are at the basis of modern cosmology. Recently, a test of the Copernican principle was proposed [8J. 3.1.3
Cosmological principle and metric
Homogeneity and isotropy are two distinct notions that we should define more precisely. The homogeneity of space means t hat at every moment, each point of space is similar to any other One. More precisely, a space-time is (spatially) homogeneous if there exists a one-parameter family of space-like hypersurfaces, I: t , foliating the spacetime such that for any t and for any pair of points (P, Q) of I: t , t here exists an isometry of the space-t ime metric taking Pinto Q (see Fig. 3.2). Isotropy means that at every point the Universe can be seen as isotropic. More precisely, a space-time is (spatially) isotropic at each point if there exists a congruence of time-like worldlines with tangent vector uJ.L (called isotropic observers) such that at any point P and for any pairs of unit spatial tangent vectors ei, e~ E Vp (see Chapter 1), there is an isometry of the metric that leaves P and uJ.L at P fixed and that rotates the vectors ei into e~. Thus, it is impossible to construct a preferred tangent vector perpendicular to uJ.L.
132
The homogeneous Universe
/ /
~
... Q
p. III
..
..
·x7 ./
p
Fig. 3.2 (left): A homogeneous space-time can be foliated by a family of homogeneous spaces (right) : for an isotropic space, there is an isometry that rotates any unit spatial tangent vecto ei to any other e~, while the vector u lL remains invariant . From Ref. [9J.
We recagnize that for a hamageneaus and isatropic space-time, the surfaces of ho mogeneity, ~t, must be orthogonal to the tangent vector uj.t of the worldline of the isotropic observers , that are thus called fundamental observers. (Proof If it were no the case; then, assuming that the homogeneous space and the cangruence of isotropi observers are unique, the failure of the tangent subspace perpendicular to uj.t to coin cide with ~t wauld enable us ta construct a geometrically privileged spatial direction This is in cantradiction with isotropy.) The metric gj.tv induces a spatial metric :rj.tv(t) on each hypersurface ~t · As w have just seen, there must exist an isametry of :rj.tv bringing any point of ~t into another point of ~t and it must be impossible to construct a preferred vector from :r,w. As one can show, this implies that the Riemann tensor canstructed from :rj.tv fo the three-dimensianal spaces ~t must be ..of the farm I [2, 9, 10]
where K has , because ..of homogeneity, the same value at any paint ..of ~t, and can ..onl be a functian ..of t, K(t) . A space satisfying this property is called a maximally sym metric space (as we shall see it has the maximum number ..of Killing vectars allawed by its dimensian) and is a space of constant curvature. Two spaces ..of canst ant curvatur with the same dimensian, signature and the same value ..of K are isametric. Thus, it) sufficient ta enumerate the three-dimensianal spaces ~orresJ::>0nding ta all values ..of K We classify these spaces according ta the sign of K . If K is pasitive, ~t is a three dimensional sphere ..of radius R(t) , with embedding equatian x 2 + y2 + z2 + w 2 = R2(t in a faur-dimensianal Euclidean space. In spherical caordinates,
1 As shown in Ref. [9], this conclusion can be drawn from the isotropy a rgument. Consider (3) R ILv cx { as the components of a linear map, L, of the vector space of 2-forms into itself. Since L is symmetric it can b e diagonalized. If its eigenvalues were not equal, then one could construct a preferred 2-form and then a preferred direction. Thus , isotropy implies that L is proportional to the identity and thu (3) R cx{3 = 2K b cx b{3 by symmetry. ILl.'
[IL
vi
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemai'tre
x
=
RcosX,
y
=
Rsin xcos B,
z
=
R sin x sinB cos
w
133
Rsin xsinBsin
=
t he E uclidean metric ds 2 = dx 2 + dy2 + dz 2 + dw 2 induces the three-dimensional metric on I;t If K
= 0, I;t is a three-dimensional Euclidean space with metric
If K is negative, I;t is a t hree-dimensional hyperboloid , with embedding equation _w 2 + x 2 + y2 + Z2 = _ R 2(t). In spherical coordinates ,
x
=
R cosh X,
y
=
R sinh xcos B,
z
=
R sinh xsinB cos
w
=
R sinh xsinB sin
the Minkowski metric ds 2 = - dw 2 + dx 2 + dy2 + d z 2 induces the three-dimensional metric on I; t dS(3) = R 2(t ) [dX2 + sinh2 X (dB 2 + sin 2 Bd
3.1. 3.1
Four-dimensional m etric
The worldlines of the fundamental observers are orthogonal to the hypersurfaces I;t. The coordinates syst em can be transported from one hypersurface to another by means of this congruence of worldlines. The general form of the space-time metric is imposed by these symmetry considerations 91.1.1/ = - uJ.L UV + ~J.Lv(t), where, for each value of t , ~J.LV is the metric of a three-dimensional sphere, Euclidean space, or hyperboloid. It follows that the line-element of the cosmological space t akes the form ds 2 = - (U J.L dxJ.L)2 +~J.L v( t)dxJ.Ldxv . Setting uJ.LdxJ.L == dt , t he coordinat e t is t he proper time measured by the fundamental observers (i. e. co moving wit h uJ.L) and we get the general form of the space-t ime metric as (3.1 )
t being the cosmic time, a(t ) t he scale factor and
lij the metric of constant t ime hypersurfaces, I;t , in comoving coordinat es. 2 Latin indices i, j , . .. run from 1 t o 3. The conformal t ime 7) , defined by
2This implies t hat ;Yij (xk, t ) = a 2 'Yij (x k ), so that the sp atia l met r ic satisfies (3) R ijkl
and K(t )
= K/a 2 (t).
= 2K 'Yk(i'Yj]I ,
134
The homogeneous Universe
(3.
dt = a(t)d7] , can also be introduced to recast the metric (3.1) in the form
(3. T he spatial metric, in comoving spherical coordinates, takes the general for m
(3.
where X is a radial coordinate and dn 2 = dB 2 + sin 2 Bd'P2 is the infinitesimal so angle, 'P runs from 0 to 27r and B from - 7r to 7r. T he quantity runs from 0 to when K > 0, and from 0 to +00 otherwise. The function f K depends on the curvatu K (which now is a pure number) as
vTKTx
K - l / 2sin
fK( X) =
(VRx)
K
>
0
X
K =O { (- K) -1/ 2 sinh(v'- Kx) K < O.
(3.
It relates the surface S(X) of a comoving sphere to its radius X by S(X) = 47rf'k( that reduces to t he E uclidean expression for distances small compared to t he curvatu (i.e. for X « II Using the radial coordinate r = fK( X), (3 .1) can also take t for m
vTKT)·
(3.
This metric, or the equivalent forms (3 .1) or (3.3) , is called the Friedmann- Lemait metric. T his construction shows how the cosmological principle, and thus the symmet assumptions that follow, has allowed us to reduce the ten arbitrary functions of t space-time metric to a single function of one variable, a(t ), and a pure number , K.
3.1 .3.2
Geom etrical quantities
The expression for the Christoffel symbols can be obtained , using the definitions Chapter 1 and the metric (3.1). Their only non-vanishing components are f
o ij
= H a2'Yij,
fjo. = HOj,.
i
_
f jk -
(3)
rijk ,
(3 .
where the (3)fjk are the Christoffel symbols of the spatial metric 'Yij . The quanti H = ala is t he Hubble parameter , and a dot represents the derivative wit h respect the cosmic time t. The explicit form of (3)fjk is not needed to compute the component of the Ric t ensor because the spatial metric 'Yij satisfies (3) R ij kl = K hik'Yjl - 'Yinjk) , so th
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemai'tre
135
(3) Rij = 2K lij and (3) R = 6K. It follows that the only non-vanishing components of the Ricci tensor are 3
Roo =
a a
-3~,
R ij
=
(
2H
2
K) a
+ ~ii + 2 a 2
2
(3.8)
lij,
from which we deduce the expression for the scalar curvature
R=6 ( H 2
K) ,
ii a
(3.9)
+~+2
a
and for the non-vanishing components of the Einstein tensor
Goo 3.1.3.3
=
3 ( H2
+
~) ,
G ij
=-
(
H
2
+ 2~ii +
K) a
a2
2
lij.
(3.10)
Killing vectors
As explained in Chapter I, to each symmetry of a space-time is associated a Killing vector field,~ , satisfying (1.58). We have seen that for a space-time of dimension n , the maximal number of independent Killing vectors, and thus of symmetries, is n(n + 1)/2. For the Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times, the spatial sections are maximally symmetric so that we expect to obtain 6 Killing vectors. They can be explicitly determined by considering the Weinberg coordinates
in terms of which the spatial metric, and its inverse , take the form
(3.11) with r2 == 6mn xmxn. The Killing equation, \7 I-'~V + \7 V~I-' = 0, gives for the OO-component, ~o = 0, so that ~o is a function of the spatial coordinates only, ~o = F(xk). Then, the Oi and ij components take the form ~i = gki Dk~O and likDj~k + IjkDie + 2H lij~O = 0, where Di is the covariant derivative associated to lij. They can be combined to get
Only iI a 2 may possibly depend on time in this equation. If this is the case, iI a 2 is not a pure number , then this implies that F = O. We thus have six solutions to the Killing equations: 3 As
fbpf?j
an example, consider the computation of R ij . It can b e decomposed as Rij = oor?j - OJ
~
r3jrf", + (3) R ij , where
r?o +
all terms involving no p, = 0 component have been gathered to
identify the Ricci tensor of the spatial metric. We then use that
(3) Ri j =
2K "Iij = 2(K / a 2 )gij.
136
The homogeneous Universe
• three Killing vectors associat ed to spatial translations
r = 1, . . . , 3,
(3.12)
• three Killing vectors associated to spatial rotations
r , S = 1 ... , 3.
(3.13)
When Ha 2 does not depend on time, Ha 2 = K, as we shall see from the Friedman equations. This occurs for the Minkowski, de Sitter and anti-de Sitter spaces. It follow that there are four additional solutions associat ed to time translation and Loren boost s. They are , respectively, given by
(3 .14 and
L /-L[rJ ..
L o[rJ -_
for K = 0, r . X ,
(3.15 for K = ±1 ,
in t erms of the conformal time TJ. Because of the expansion of the Universe , these four vectors are no longer Killin vectors of the Friedmann- Lemaitre space-time. They now satisfy the equation V /-L ~lI V lI~/-L = (V (X~(X)g/-L lI /2 and are called conformal Killing vectors. The symmetries in volving t ime (i.e. time translation and Lorentz boosts) are lost due to the fact tha the cosmological space-times are not static but they are still conformal to a stat space-time, a property related to the existence of these four conformal Killing vector 3.1.4
Kinematics
Without knowing the evolution law for the scale factor, a(t) , a few general consequence can be obtained simply from the form of the Friedmann-Lemait re metric. 3.1.4.1
Fundam en tal observers
Notice first of all that in the metric (3.1), the coordinates xi are comoving. Th worldline of a fund amental observer with traj ect ory orthogonal to the hypersurface I;t is given by x O = t and X i =constant (one can check that this is indeed a time-lik geodesic). As a consequence , this observer has a four-velocity
(3 .16 As seen earlier , this metric can be re-expressed in the form
(3 .17
The cosmological solution of Friedmann- Lemaitre
137
where 9 /-Lv = g/-LV + u/-LU V is the projector t ensor introduced in Section l.2.5. The expansion of the Universe thus allows a comoving observer to naturally decompose any vector p/-L into a time-like and space-like component as (3 .18) In particular, all tools introduced in sections l.2.5 and l. 3.2 of the first chapter can be used. 3.1 .4.2 Hubble law Let us now consider two comoving observers with traj ectories given by x = x = X2. In the physical space, their separation is given by r12
Xl
and
= a(t)(xl - X2)'
It follows that
(3 .19) The farther the observers are from each other , the greater is their relative velocity. T his is what is usually called the Hubble law. Notice t hat H depends a priori on time and can only be approximat ed as a constant for obj ect s whose distance is small in comparison to the Hubble radius. Note that this law is a special case of the generalized Hubble law (l. 119) with e = 3H and (J/-LV = 0, as imposed by homogeneity and isotropy. 3. 1.4.3
Recession velocity and proper velocity
Since the physical distance r is related to t he co moving distance x wit h the relation r = a(t)x, we deduce that
r = Hr + a(t)x ==
V rec
+ vpro p er '
(3.20)
The recession velocity, V rec , is a t ime-dependent quantity and represents t he component of the velocity relat ed to the Hubble flow. As for v proper, it is the proper velocity of the object with respect to the cosmological reference frame privileged by the expansion. 3.1.4.4
Properties of ligh t
In the geometrical optics limit , it was shown that the traj ectory of a light ray, X"' (A) , is given by a null geodesic with wavevector k'" = dx'" / dA satisfying (3 .21 ) Using the general decomposition (3. 18), we obtain
where E = - k/-Lu/-L represents the energy of a photon measured by the comoving observer and p/-L its momentum (p/-Lu/-L = 0). It follows that
138
Th e homogeneous Universe _E2
+ a2iij p i p j = 0,
which is simply the generalization of the well-known relation between the energy of obj ect , its momentum and its mass. Moreover, the projection along ul-' of the geode equation gives . Oij . 2 i' EE + f ijP P = EE + H a iij P rY = 0,
so that t/E = - H and hence E = ko la , ko being a constant. The energy, a hence t he frequency 1/ oc E , of any photon varies as the inverse of t he scale fact Its wavelength varies as the scale factor. In an expanding space, wavelengths are th redshifted achromatically. T he redshift defined by the general equation (l.122) is t herefore given by 1+ z
=
(ul-'kl-')emission
(ul-' kl-' )observation
a( t o b servation) a( temission) .
(3. 22
The redshift can be measured from the comparison of an observed spectrum to laboratory spectrum , from which one can deduce how much the Universe has expand since it was emitted. We stress at this point that most observations give an angu position on the celestial sphere and a redshift. The radial distance cannot be measur directly but is obtained from the redshift and requires the knowledge of the expansi law of the Universe, that is a(t). 3.1.4.5
Beh aviour of a m assive test particle
Consider now the trajectory of a massive t est particle with 4-velocity vI-' . It satisfie
(3.2
can be split as vI-' = aul-' + pI-', where ul-' is t he 4-velocity of t he fundamen observers and pI-' satisfies ul-'pl-' = O. It follows from ul-'ul-' = vl-'vl-' = - 1 t hat pl-'pl-' p2 = - 1 +a 2 . The geodesic equation fo r vI-' then leads to -aa = (8/3)11-'''PI-'P'' = H so that aa + H( - 1 + ( 2 ) = 0 from which we obtain that - 1 + a 2 oc a- 2 . We conclude that p2 oc a - 2 so that a --+ 1 and vI-' --+ ul-'. The proper velocity any massive t est part icle is damped as a -I and its worldline tends to adjust to t Hubble flow , that is to the worldlines of the fundamental observers. vI-'
3.1.5
Space-time dynamics
Up to now we have described the implications of the Robertson- Walker geometry. investigate the dyna mics of these space-times, we must obtain the equations of moti deriving from the E instein equation. When these equations are fulfilled , we refer these solutions as Friedmann- Lemaitre space-t imes. 3.1. 5.1
Energy-moment um tensor
The energy-momentum tensor, TI-'''' is a symmetric tensor of rank 2. The possi forms this tensor can take are reduced by t he space-time symmetries. Indeed , t most general form compatible with symmetries is
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemaitre
139
B represents the only spatial component (for the fundamental observers); it is therefore identified with the pressure that is thus seen to reduce to a unique number for a homogeneous and isotropic space. A = TjJ,vu jJ,u v == p is the energy density measured by the fundamental observers. In conclusion, the most general form of the energymomentum tensor is that of a perfect fluid (3.24) The energy density, p, and the pressure, P , only depend on time. This form is completely fixed by the cosmological principle and is not an independent choice. Thus, the only remaining freedom is the choice of the equation of state, that is the relation between the pressure and the energy density.
3.1.5.2 Friedm ann and conservation equations Using the expressions for the E instein t ensor and the form (3.24) of the energymomentum tensor, we can easily deduce that the two Einstein equations reduce to two independent equations
(3.25)
(3 .26 ) recalling [see (1.130)] that r;, == 87rG N • As for the matter conservation equation (\7 jJ,TjJ,v = 0) , it reduces to a single equation
I p + 3H (p + P) = o. I
(3.27)
We can convince ourselves that t he three equations (3.25) , (3.26) and (3 .27) are not independent [indeed, by differentiating (3.25) with respect to time and expressing (i / a using (3 .26) and (3 .25) to eliminate H2 , we find (3.27)]. This is a consequence of the Bianchi identities.
3.1.5.3
Covariant approach
In the covariant approach, a Robertson- Walker space is defined by the conditions V/-Lf = 0 for any scalar function f , which implies that ilP = 0, and CJ jJ,V = wjJ, = 0, so that \7 jJ,u v = 8 9jJ,v/3 . Space being isotropic , we can set S = a, and thus H = 8/3 and the Raychaudhuri equation (1.73) gives (i
1 r;, ujJ,u v = - -(p 2 jJ,V 2
3- = -- R a
+ 3P ) + A'
140
The homogeneous Universe
and the generalized Friedmann equation (1. 78) gives 4 ~ 6K 2 (3) R = - 2 = 2KP + 2A - _ 8 2 = 2KP + 2A - 6H2. a 3
We recover the Friedmann equations, but the regime of validity of the Raychaudh and generalized Friedmann equations is larger since they also apply to non-isotro Universes , such as Bianchi Universes (see below).
3.1 .5.4
Equations in con form al time
It will sometimes be convenient to work in t erms of the conformal time. Rememberi that dt = ad7] , we find that the derivative of any quantity X with respect to 7], X', related to that with respect to t by XI = aX. It will be convenient to remember th
X" - HX I = a 2 X.
XI=aX ,
al / a has b een introduced, which satisfies
The comoving Hubble constant H particular
a" aii = - - H 2
H = aH,
a
'
a2if = HI - H2.
We deduce that the Friedmann and conservation equations [(3.25) to (3.27)] take t form
(3.2
I
H =
K
2
-"6 a
(p
A
2
+ 3P) +"3a ,
I pI + 3H (p + P) = o. I
(3.2
(3.3
Notice also that if the scale factor is a power law in cosmic time , then
a(t) ex t n as long as n
3.1.5.5
i=
{==}
a(7]) ex 7] ''.'.n,
(3.3
1.
Eq uation of state
We hence have two independent equations for three unknowns (the scale factor , t energy density and the pressure). We therefore need some additional information solve this system. For that, the most convenient way is to give an equation of sta for the matter in the form P=wp. (3.3
For instance, pressureless matter will be described by w = 0 whereas for radiation , will have w = 1/ 3. For the cosmological constant, A, which corresponds to a consta
4Note t h at here (3) R refers to the Gaussian curvature of the hypersurfaces L;t with metric ~I This explains why (3) R = 6K Ia 2 .
The cosmological solution of Friedmann-Lemai'tre
141
energy density, (3 .27) implies P = - p and thus w = -l. The resolution of (3.27) implies that for any constant w, p ex
a- 3 (l+w).
(3.33)
Comparing this general result with equations (3.25) and (3.26), we notice that the curvature term can be assimilated with a fluid with equation of state w = -1/3. By differentiating w with respect to time and expressing pi with the conservation equation (3.30) we get Wi = -3H(1 + w)(c; - w), (3.34) where
Cs
is the speed of sound, defined by
pi
cS2 =pi For a barotropic fluid w
=
(3.35)
c;, so that w is a constant.
3.1.5.6 Reduced form It is useful to rewrite the Friedmann equations in a dimensionless form in terms of reduced quantities. For that, we introduce the energy density parameters
(3.36) respectively, for the matter , the cosmological constant and the curvature. The matter term can be decomposed as a sum of components with different equations of state as o = I:x Dx with
(3.37) and we will denote by D xo its value today. The first Friedmann equation (3.25) then takes the form of a constraint
(3.38)
Using the solutions of the conservation equation, it follows that
_
Dx - D xo for a constant equation of state 5 as 5 For
a
general
Oxo (Hal H)2 exp [- 3
time-dependent
(~) -3(1+WXO) ao
Wx
= Wxo, so that
equ ation
J:o (1 + wx)d In a].
(Ho)2 H '
of state,
E(a) == it
can
H/H
o
be
can be expressed
checked
that
Ox
142
The homogeneous Universe
(3.3
°
Quantities with an index are evaluat ed today. Thus, to will be the dynamical age the Universe and ao = aCto) . Notice t hat E only depends on x = a/ao = 1/( 1 + Depending on the case, it will be denoted by E(a), E(x) or E( z). For the matter , t he following different components can be distinguished Tot al matter
0
Different equations of state
Om ~
Db
Different species
Dc
where the total matter component is decomposed into matter (w = 0) and radiati (w = 1/3) and then, respectively, into baryons (b), cold dark matter (c) , photons h and neutrinos (v). Of course , other species can be added, whether as a species with new equation of state or as a new component.
3.1 .5.7
Units and conventions
Two conventions are often used for the choice of dimensions. The decomposition any physical length as the product of t he scale factor and a co moving length , C(phys) a(t) C(com) can indeed lead to an ambiguity since we can arbitrarily choose either t scale factor or t he co moving length to have dimension of length. We will use bo conventions according to the situation at hand.
- The scale factor can be chosen to have dimension of length , and X to be dime sionless. This implies that K can be normalized to K = 0, ± l. The value of can t hen be determined by evaluating the Friedmann equations today.
I [aJ ~ [, and [xl
LX
=x,
K = 0, ± 1,
1
ao = Ho
1
J 11- Dol
.
For a Universe such t hat Do = 1 (i. e. K = 0) , ao is arbitrary, which reflects t invariance of the Euclidean space under dilatation. - The scale factor can be chosen to be dimensionless. X will then have dimensi of length , and thus K the dimension of inverse length squared. It is t hen oft convenient to set ao = 1.
[aJ = 1 and [xJ
=
L: K = (0, ±1)/ R~,
We recover that for Do = 1 (i.e. K charact eristic curvature scale.
1
Rc = - aoHo 0) , Rc
= 00 .
1
Jl1 - Do l
.
A Euclidean space has
I 1, the conservation equation implies that p o( a the Friedmann equation (3.25) implies H2 x o-3(1+ru). It follows that a By integrating this relation, we obtain, As seen earlier, if uL
so o<
2
(3.40)
a(l) x ,3{1+u) From this expression, the conformal time can be computed by integrating
giving 4
o li#b if w I -1/3. o(r1)
that
a-Q+3u)/2.
dl :
dt I
a(t)
,
We cleduce that
21 x q' ts;
if
al
(3 41)
;.
and a(4) o( exp ? otherwise.
3.2.1.2
K:0andu:-\
If the matter density is dominated by a cosmological constant, we have H2 x p x so that a x a. By integrating this relation, we get a(t) x eHt
a0,
(3.42)
This space has an accelerated expansion and is called de Sitter space. In terms of the conformal time, the scale factor is of the form
aQi)x-h,
4<0.
This space can also be written in such a way that Chapter 8). ds2
3.2.1.3
:
-dt2
. *+f!
it
(3.43)
has spherical spatiai sections (see
(dx, +sin21d02)
.
(3 44)
K:IIandu+-Il3
It is more convenient to work in conformal time to obtain
{"0i,t(:d}.
Using p
:
Qr_ Jlr: , {)sl, (g) ll \osl
in units such that l1{l
n,(t) in the parametric form
po(alas)-3(1+u) and (3.25), we get
: 1 This equation
t'-t''
_*.
can be integrated to give
144
The homogeneous Universe
(aoa) = (11 -0 00
)1 / 20: {(Sinh o.'TJ)1 / 0: if 1 (sin o.'TJ) 1/ 0: if 0
K = - 1, K = + 1,
(3.4
with 20. = 1 +3w. This solution is valid for all constant w of. - 1/3. The case w = - 1 corresponds to a Universe with no matter since matter can then be absorbed into curvature term. 3.2.1.4
K = 0, w = 0 and A of. 0
Let us mention the solution for a spatially Euclidean model dominated by a pressurel fluid and a cosmological constant [11]
a(t)
=
(1 ) OAO -
1
1/ 3
sinh
2 3 /
(3Tt) '
(3.4
where we a = HOVOAO. This solution is relevant for describing the late time evolut of a flat ACDM model. 3.2.1.5
Other solutions
We present in Fig. 3.3 the profile of the scale-factor evolution in a large number of si ations, including for different kinds of matter, curvature and value of the cosmologi constant. We may notice the presence of periods of slower evolution (a 'hesitating' phase) various lengths depending on the values of the cosmological constant (see, e.g., ca F, L or K). During these phases, the Universe gets closer to an Einstein static Unive (i.e. a = 0) for which
Thus, this is a spherical Universe for which the gravitational attraction is just co pensated by the repulsive effect of the cosmological constant. The behaviour of th solutions depends mainly on the relative values of the cosmological constant and A Another interesting solution is the one obtained for an empty Universe with hyp bolic spatial sections (K = - 1) . This space, called the Milne space, has t he follow metric (3.4
It can be shown that this metric corresponds to a Minkowski metric by an appropri change of coordinates (T = t cosh X, R = t sinh X leads to the Minkowski metric spherical coordinates) , but this space only covers a quarter of the Minkowski spa time.
3.2.2
Dynamical evolution
In order to study the general dynamics of the solutions of t he Friedmann equatio it is interesting to rewrite the system (3.25) and (3.26) in the form of a dynami system for t he quantities 0 , OA and OK (see Refs . [12- 14]).
Dynamics of Friedmann-Lemaitre space-times 3.0
0
<
*·····
c\\\~..
\,>o\}~.. ····
2.0
145
LK
~............
H
1.0
OJ
..................... ...G
0.0
B
A
D
oj
- 1.0 0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
QmO
3.0
3.0
a
a ao
3.0
2.0 a
ao 1.0
0.0 -3 -2 -1
0
1
2
1.0
0.0 - 3 -2 -1
3
Hot
2.0
0
1
2
0.0 -3 -2 -1
3
Hot
3.0
a
a
ao
A =0
2.0
2
3
a
\
......
1.0
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
3.0
ao 1.0
0
Hot
3.0 Hesi tating ~ (Spherical:
0
2.0
0.0 -3 -2 -1
Hot
0
1
Hot
2
2.0
Hyperbolic
ao 1.0
...:
3
0.0 - 3 -2 -1
0
Hot
Fig. 3.3 Depending on the values of the cosmological parameters (upper panel) , the scale factor can have very different evolutions.
3.2.2.1 Using
Dynamical system
if =
ii/a - H2 and expressing ii/a with (3.26) and H2 with (3.25) leads to H
H2 = -(1 + q) .
(3.48)
q is the deceleration parameter defined by
(3.49) with 'Y == w + 1. The system of Friedmann equations can thus be rewritten using the new time variable p == In( a/ ao). The derivative, XI, with respect to p of any quantity X is then given by XI = X/H.
146
The homogeneous Universe
The evolution equation for the Hubble parameter (3.48) then becomes
+ q)H.
H' = -(1
(3.5
n
If we differentiate n, n A and K with respect to p and use (3.50) to express H noticing that a' = a and that (3.30) can be used to obtain pi = - 3,p, we then obta the system
n ' = (2q + 2 - 3, )n , n~
(3.5
= 2(1 + q)nA '
n~ = 2qn K
(3.5
(3.5
.
It is useless to keep all of these equations since (i) H does not enter in (3.51)- (3.5 can be deduced algebraically using (3.38). and (ii)
n
The dynamics of Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times can thus be studied by considering the dynamical system
(3.54) where q is a function of
nA
and
nK
given by (3.49).
This system associates a unique tangent vector to each point so that only o integral curve passes through each point of the phase space where the tangent vect is defined. If two trajectories crossed each other, the tangent vector at this point wou not be unique. Points where the tangent vector is not defined are called fixed point 3.2.2.2 Determination of the fixed points The fixed points are defined by the conditions solutions of (1 + q)nA = 0,
n~
= 0 and
n~
o and
are thu
(3.5
They represent the equilibrium positions (stable or not). This equation has thr solutions (nK,n A) E {(O,O),(O, l) ,(l, O)} , (3.5 and each of these solutions represent a Universe with different characteristics.
- (n K , n A)
= (0, 0): the Einstein- de Si tter space (EdS). This is a space-time wi no curvature (Euclidean spatial sections) and no cosmological constant. - (nK' n A ) = (0, 1): the de Sitter space (dS). This is a space with no matter b with a cosmological constant and the spatial sections have a positive curvatur This Universe is in eternal exponential expansion. - (nK , n A) = (1 , 0): the Milne space (M). This is an empty space with no cosm logical constant but with hyperbolic spatial sections (K < 0).
Dynamics of Friedmann-Lemaitre space-times
147
3.2.2.3 Stability of the fixed points To determine if these fixed points are attractors (A), saddle points (S), or repellers (R), we should study the evolution of a small perturbation around each equilibrium position. For this we set
== 0,K +WK, == 0,1\ + W1\,
OK 01\
(3.57) (3.58)
with (0,1\, 0,K) the coordinates of a fixed point and (W1\' WK) a small deviation. Rewriting the system (3.54) in the form
(3.59) where FK and F1\ are two functions determined by the system (3 .54) that vanish at the fixed point , it can be expanded to linear order as
~j ' WK
_ p_ _
W
-
(!tA,!tK)
~WKj W
with
p(IT IT ) A,
K
==
(;~: ~~:) aF1\
(3.60)
aF1\
aO K a01\
(ITA ,IT K
)
The stability of a fixed point depends on the sign of the two eigenvalues (A1,2) of the matrix P(ITA,IT K ) ' If both eigenvalues are positive (resp., negative), the fixed point is unstable (resp ., stable). If the two eigenvalues have different sign, it is a saddle point. The eigenvector U.\ 1,2 then gives the stable and unstable directions . - EdS: we have PEdS
= (
3"1 - 2 0 ) 0 3"1 '
with eigenvalues 3"1 - 2 and 3"1- EdS is thus an attractor for "1 Ej- 00, 0[, a saddle point for "1 Ej O, 2/3[ and a repeller for "1 Ej2/3, +00[. The associated eigendirections are U(3,. - 2) = (1,0). - dS: we have PdS
=
(2 =~'Y -~'Y
) ,
with eigenvalues - 2 and - 3"1- If "1 Ej - 00, O[ then dS is a saddle point and for "1 EjO, +00[, it is an attractor. The two eigendirections are given by U(-2)
= (1 , -1).
- M: we have PM
_ (2 - 3"1 - 3"1 ) -
0
2
'
with eigenvalues 2 and 2 - 3"1- If "1 Ej - 00,2/3[ then M is a repeller and if "1 Ej2/3, +00[, it is a saddle point. The two associated eigenvectors are U (2)
= (1 , - 1).
148
The homogeneous Universe
These results are summarised in Table 3.1 and in Figs. 3.4 to 3.6. Table 3.1 Stability of the fixed points as a function of the value of the equation of state, , = w+ 1, (A: attractor, R: repeller, and S: saddle point). ] -
EdS dS M
00,
o[
°
A
N.A.
S S
A R
]0,2/3[
2/3
]2/3, +oo[
S A R
NA A R
R
A S
0.5
E
C
0.5
- 0.5
- 1~
- 0.5
__~~~__~__~__~~__- J 1.5 o
0 -0.5
0
0.5
1.5
QA
Fig. 3.4 Dynamical evolution in the plane (r:lK , r:l A) (left) and (r:lm , r:lA) (right) for, = (w = 0). From Ref. [14].
3.2.3
Expansion and contraction
When the total energy density vanishes, the expansion rate of the Universe can chan sign. For a Universe with non-flat spatial sections and with matter, radiation and cosmological constant , there are four possibilities (see Fig. 3.3) . The expansion lasts eternally starting from the Big Bang. This is the case if K or - 1 for a Universe without cosmological constant.
=
The expansion is followed by a contracting phase leading to a big crunch. This the case for a Universe with K = + 1 with no cosmological constant.
The expansion lasts eternally but was preceded by a contracting phase; the must therefore have been a bounce. This situation can occur when the Univer has spherical spatial sections (K = + 1). - The Universe undergoes a series of contraction and expansion phases; this is oscillating Universe .
149
Dynamics of Friedmann-Lemaitre space-times 1
1.4 Qm
0.8
1.2
1
0.6
" 0.8
cf°.4
cf
0.6 0.2 0.4 0 - 0. 2 - 0. 2
0.2 O ~
0
0.2
0 .4
0 .6
0.8
1
__
~~~~~-L_ _~-w~~
-0.4 -0.2
0
QA
0.2 0.4 QA
0. 6
0.8
Fig. 3.5 Dynamical evolution in the plane (O K , Ot>.) (left) and (Om , Ot>.) (right) for 'Y From Ref. [14].
1
=
1/3 .
E
c:
- 0.2
0
0.2 0.4 QA
0.6
0.8
Fig. 3.6 Dynamical evolution in the plane (OK , Ot>. ) (left) and (Om , Ot>. ) (right) for 'Y = - l. From Ref. [14].
The separation between a Universe with infinite expansion and a Universe with a big crunch is obtained when
2
nAO = 1 - nmo + :3 cos [arct an (S;;;~) - 7r] )
(3.61 )
with SmO = JI2n mo - 11. The separation between a Universe with infinite expansion and a bouncing Universe is obtained when
150
The homogeneous Universe
nmO = 0, or 1
_
o ::; nmo ::; 2'
nAO - 1 - nmO
3 [ + 2(n 1110 )1 /3 (1
- n mo
+ '::'~mO )1 /3
+ (1 - nmo - :=:mo) 1/3] , nAO = 1 - n mo
3.3
2
+ 3" cos [arctan (:=:;;;6) + 7r].
(3.6
Time and distances
The characteristic distance and time scales of any Friedmann- Lemaitre Universe a fixed by the value of the Hubble constant. We define t he Hubble time and distance 1
c
tH = H'
DH = H'
(3.6
The sphere with radius equal to the Hubble radius is called the Hubble sphere. T order of magnit ude of these quantities is obtained by expressing the current value t he Hubble parameter in the following way
(3.6 with h typically of the order of 0.7. We will come back later to the measurement of t he parameters introduced in t his chapter. We obtain t hat
DHo = 9.26 h- 1 x 10 25 m ~ 3000 h - 1 Mpc ,
tHo = 9.78 h - 1 x 10 9 years.
(3.6
All the quantities that will be introduced in this section (distance and time) will expressed in terms of E( z ) defined in (3.39). As can be seen in Fig. 3.7, this functi has some degeneracies that change with t he redshift. By combining observations different redshifts, one can lift these degeneracies and thus use them jointly to bett constrain the cosmological parameters.
3.3.1
Age of the Universe and look-back time
From the definition of the Hubble parameter, it follows that dt = da /a H . Thus, t expression (3 .39) for the Hubble constant gives
da dt = tHo aE(a)'
The age of the Universe is thus obtained by integrating this equality between a = and a = ao, or equivalently between z = 0 and z = 00,
r dx tHo J xE(x)
roo
1
to
=
o
=
tHo Jo
dz
(1
+ z)E(z)'
(3.6
This function is represented for various sets of cosmological parameters in Fig. 3.8.
Time and distances 0.9
0.')<=== == =-=---:--.
0.8
o.
0.7
151
o
0
a<
c:< 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
QmO
Fig. 3.7 Isocont ours of the funct ion E( z ) in terms of the cosmological parameter (Dmo , DAO) for a J\CDM modeL T he degeneracies at z = 1 (left), z = 3 (middle) and z = 10 (right) are not the same. The code of grey shade is arbitrary.
The analogous expression in conformal time is 1
'T}o
=
tHo
10 x2~x) ·
(3.67)
In a similar way, the age of the Universe at t he t ime when a photon with redshift
z. was emitted is defined by
roo
t( z.) = tHo Jz. (1
dz
+ z)E(z) ·
(3.68)
The look-back time is the difference between the age of the Universe and its age when the photon was emitted by the source. The previous relations lead to
llt( z*) = to - t( z*) = tHo
3.3.2
Jro ' (1 + dz z)E(z )·
(3 .69)
Comoving radial distance
The co moving radial distance X of an object of redshift z t hat is observed by an observer located at X = 0, is obtained by integrating along a radial null geodesic. The form of the metric (3.4) gives dX = dt /a, so that dz
H( z) . It follows that
aoX( z*)
=
DHo
Jr' o
dz
E( z )·
(3.70)
The dependance on ao simply reflects the arbitrary choice of the system of units. This function is represented for various sets of cosmological parameters in Fig. 3.9.
152
The homogeneous Universe
9
11
10
8 9
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
QmO
Fig. 3.8 Isocont ours of the functi on to as a fun ction of the cosmological parameters. curve indicat es t he value of to in units of 10 9 years. The grey zone represents the zo paramet ers for which there is no Big Bang.
For a fiat Universe with no cosmological const ant, we find, for instance,
(
For a Universe with a non-vanishing curvature, we can give the expression for radial dist ance in units of the curvature radius
( 3.3.3
3. 3.3.1
Angular distances
Comoving angular diam eter
The co moving angular diameter relates the comoving transverse size of an obj ect the solid angle under which it is observed . It is defined by the relation
between the solid angle and the apparent surface of an obj ect. Remembering t h comoving sphere centred a t X = 0 and with comoving radius X has a comoving su s (co m ) = 47f jk (X ), we deduce that
Rang (z) = jf( [X( z)] .
(
Time and distances
153
................__... -_.. ... .... .
..:.: :.: ..
-:":;'
3
5
4
Redshift z
Redshift z
Fig. 3.9 (left): Age and look-back time in units of the Hubble time, t( z )j tHo and 6t( z )j tHo as a function of z for three cosmological models defined by (Dmo, DAO ) = (1 , 0) , (0.05 , 0) and (0.2 , O.S), respectively, as plain , d otted and d ashed lines. (right) : Comoving radial distance in uni ts of t he Hubble length , aox(z ) j DHo, as a fun ction of z for the same cosmological models.
Notice that t his function is not necessarily increasing wit h z . Indeed , if K = +1 , then two objects with the same comoving size, located at X and 7r - X will have the same comoving angular diameter.
3.3.3.2 Angular dis tance The angular dist ance is the not ion that generalizes the concept of parallax. It is defined , for a geodesic bundle converging at t he point where the observer is, as the ratio between the transverse physical size of an object and the solid angle under which it is observed . The physical area of the source is related to the co moving one by dS p hys = a 2 dS com . With this defini t ion phy s com dSso 2 urce 2 dssource D A= 2 = a 2 dD o b s dD obs This quantity will also be denoted by T o . Using the definition of the co moving angular diameter , int roduced in the previous section , we obtain
aoRang(z ) l+z
(3.74)
3.3.3.3 R eciprocity theorem In the same way, we can define the angular distance from the source. It is defined using a geodesic bundle diverging from the source as the ratio between the physical transverse size of t he observer and the solid angle under which it would be observed from the source, phys _ .2 d n 2 dS o bs
-
rs
~ [,s o urc e'
154
The homogeneous Universe
It can be shown that if the tra jectories of the photons are null geodesics and if t equation for the geodesic deviation is valid, then there exists a relation between T s a To
(3.7
called the r eciprocity theorem (see Ref. [15] for a demonstration) . This relation cann be directly checked since Ts cannot be observed directly. 3 .3 .4
Luminosity distance
3.3.4.1
Defini tion
The luminosity distance relates the luminosity of a source, locat ed at a comoving rad dist ance X from the observer , to the observed flux as A.
_
'Po bs -
Lsource (X) 47rD[
(3.7
To relat e the luminosity of the source and the observed luminosity, notice that t luminosity of t he source is given by the emitted energy per unit of emission tim L source = !:::"Eem/ !:::"t em . Due to the expansion of the Universe, !:::" Eobs = !:::" Eem a/ and !:::"to b s = !:::"temaO /a (because !:::,.'rJobs = !:::"'rJem for two null geodesics) so that L obs L so u rce (l + z )-2 The flux received by the observer at X = 0 is given by
using
S (phys) = a6 s (com).
Identifying this with the definition (3.76), it follows t hat
I DL( z ) =
ao(1 + z )fJ( [X (z)].
I
(3.7
The luminosity of the source is indeed unknown. However , by comparing some sour to a reference source for which the redshift z. and the distance are known, we obta tha t
By extracting a family of astrophysical obj ects, called s tandard candles, wit h t he sa luminosity, the ratio of their fluxes can be used to measure the luminosity dist ance To finish , let us not e that deriving (3.77) allows us to extract the Hubble rat e a function of redshift as 1
H( z )
[
1 + DJ(oHg
(~) 2]-1/2~ (~) . 1+ z
dz
1+ z
Time and distances
,
" ... - - -
~ ~
155
15
... :..- . .......... .. ......... .
" ..... .
,''' " f
...
I,:
I :'
"
I:' I:'
2 3 Redshift z
4
5 Redshiftz
Fig. 3.10 (left): The angular distance D A (z) / DHo as a function of the redshift z for three cosmological models, defined by (n mo , n AO ) = (1,0), (0.05, 0) and (0.2,0.8), respectively, as plain, dotted and dashed lines. (right): The luminosity distance Ddz) / DHo as a function of the redshift z for the three same cosmological models.
3.3.4.2 Distances duality relation If the number of photons is conserved, which is usually the case if the Maxwell equations are valid, and if the absorption from the medium in which they propagate is small, then (for a proof, see Ref. [15]) DL
= rs(1 + z),
so that (3 .75) implies a duality relation between the angular and luminosity distances (3.78) Unlike (3 .75) , this relation can be tested experimentally [16]. 3.3.4.3
Distance modulus
The luminosity distance is usually expressed in terms of the distance modulus, m - M, defined such that it vanishes if the source is located conventionally 6 at 10 pc, m - M
= - 2.51og [¢(z)/¢(10pc)] .
(3.79)
Using (3.76) and noticing that at 10 pc, the luminosity distance is also 10 pc, we obtain m - M = 5 1og[DL(z)/1O pc]. Using the expression 10 pc = DHo/3 X 10 8 h , it can be deduced that m - M
= 25 + 5 log [3000 DL ] - 5 log h. DHo
(3.80)
6Note that the -2.5 factor is a rbitrary a nd was chosen to match the magnitudes of star s initia lly defined by Hipparcos .
156
The homogeneous Universe
m is the apparent magnitude and the absolute magnitude M is defined by comparis to the Solar luminosity M = - 2.5 log ( : 8 )
(3.8
+ 4.76
where L 8 ~ 3.8 x 10 26 W is the Sun luminosity and Mo = 4.76 its magnitude. Wi such a definition , the brighter an object is, the weaker is its magnitude.
3.3.4.4
Magnitudes
The luminosities considered previously were the luminosities integrated over the enti electromagnetic spectrum, defining the bolometric magnitude. It is difficult to measu these bolometric magnitudes and, in general, some filters are used, selecting a speci frequency band. The magnitude Mx in the band X is then defined by
Mx = -2.5 10g ( Lx ) L8X
+ Mo x.
(3 .8
An example of different frequency bands used in astronomy is given in the table belo Band
Central
Width (run)
MO
66
5.61
wavelength (nrn)
365
U (u ltraviolet)
B (blue)
445
94
5.48
V (visible)
551
88
4.64
R (red)
658
138
4.42
I (infra-red)
806
149
4.08
J
1200
213
3.64
K
2190
390
3.28
00
4.76
Bolometric
The flux detected in the frequency band 6.vx was emitted in the frequency ban (1 + z )6.vx . The flux received per frequency unit is thus A.
() - (1+ )L v [v(l+z)] z 47rDl '
'l'X v
(3.8
where Lv is the source luminosity per frequency band. It follows that
¢x (v)
=
(1 +D~) 47r L
r
Lv[v(l
+ z)]dv.
(3.8
} tlvx
The correction induced by the deformation of the spectrum does not appear when t source is at 10 pc so that the distance modulus in the band X defined by mx - Mx - 2.5 log[¢x/¢x(10 pc)], is given by
mx - Mx = 510g ( DL ) 10pc
+ K.
(3.8
Time and distances
157
The K-correction represents the distortion of the spectrum due to the cosmological expansion K
= -2.51og(1 + z) - 2.51og {
Lvx Lv[v(l
J
+ Z)]dV}
[]
D.vx Lv v dv
.
(3.86)
Finally, note that other effects of astrophysical origin, such as the absorption by the interstellar or intergalactic medium, can affect the apparent magnitude. We shall discuss them in the next chapter. 3.3.5
Volume and number counts
The geometric properties of space-time also playa role in the determination of the distribution of a family of objects (for instance, galaxies) in a given redshift band. Let us consider such a family with proper number density n(z) and proper radius r*. First, we can determine the probability for a line of sight to intersect such a galaxy with redshift lying between z and z+dz. This probability is proportional to the surface area of the galaxy, to the density, and to the distance light propagated in this redshift interval,
(3.87) The probability to intersect an object with redshift smaller than z , called the optical depth, is then given by
1 Z
T(Z)
=
2 7rr*DHo
o
n(z) (
dz) (). l+zEz
In particular, for galaxies diluted by the cosmic expansion, n(z) Universe with 0 = 1 and OA = 0 we find
(3.88)
= no(1 + z)3, in a
(3.89) If no rv 0.02h 3 Mpc~3 and r* rv 10h ~ 1 kpc, T rv 4% at z = 1 and 100% at z rv 20. The proper volume contained in a solid angle d0 2 and between the redshifts z and z + dz is the product of the area D~.d02 and the length D Ho dzj(l + z)E(z), so that
~ - D d0 2 dz -
Ho
(1
iI[x(z)] + z)3 E(z)'
(3.90)
The number of galaxies in a solid angle d0 2 and in a redshift band dz is then dN d02dz
iI[x(z)]
= DHon(z) (1 + z)3 E(z)'
Galaxies number counts are among the oldest cosmological tests (see Ref. [1]).
(3.91 )
158
The homogeneous Un iverse
3.4 3.4.1
Behaviour at small redshifts D ecelerat ion parameter
We can expand the scale factor around its value today as
a(t) with 0 < to - t
«
=
1 2 ao [ 1 + Ho(t - to) - 2qoHo(t - to) 2
+ ...] ,
(3.9
to. The factor qo is the deceleration parameter7 and is defined by qo
== -
a!2It=to '
(3 .9
so that the Universe accelerates if qo < 0 and decelerates otherwise. Using the Frie mann equations to express 0,0 / ao , we easily find t hat
for a ACDM model, since the contribution from radiation is negligible today. For a arbitrary matter composition, the deceleration parameter is given by
(3.9
Thus , in order to have qo < 0, there should be at least one cosmic fluid (dominatin today) with equation of state Wx < - 1/3 . We stress that t he expansion (3 .92) on relies on the hypothesis that the Universe is described by a Friedmann- Lemaitre spac time. In particular , it makes no assumptions on t he matter content of the Univers contrary to (3 .94). 3 .4.2
3.4.2.1
Expression of the time and distances
Small redshift expansions
At small redshifts, we can expand the function E(z) as
neglecting t he contribution of radiation. Thus, we conclude t hat the look-back t ime
6.t( z ) =
tHo
[1 - ~(qO + 2)Z] z + 0( z3 ).
(3.9
The radial distance takes the form
7The choice of sign is historical. At the time qO was introduced it was thought that the expansi of the Universe was d ecelerat ing so t hat qO > 0 was exp ected. C hapter 4 details why we now thi t h at qO < O.
Behaviour at small redshifts
159
the comoving angular distance,
Rang(Z)
=
DHo ao
[1 - ~(qO + I)Z] Z + O(z3), 2
(3.97)
the angular distance, (3.98) and the luminosity distance, (3.99) Locally (z « 1) all the distances reduce to DHoz and the deviations only depend on the value of the deceleration parameter. A distance-redshift diagram will thus be sensitive to Ho in its region z « 1 (slope of the diagram), to qo mainly in its intermediate region (z ~ 1) and to the full set of cosmological parameters for larger z. This illustrates the evolution of the degeneracy of the function E(z) represented in Fig. 3.7. 3.4.2.2
Time drift of the redshift
Suppose we observe the same galaxy at to and to redshift given by
+ Mo.
There will be a change in its
Now, null geodesics are straight lines in conformal coordinates so that br] = br]o Malao = btla from which we deduce that bzl(1 + z) = [Ho - H]br]o to first order in 61)0 and thus
bz = Ho [(1 uto
£
+ z)
- E(z)] ,
(3.100)
where E is defined by (3.39). This gives the time evolution of the redshift of any object at redshift z as a function of the cosmological parameters. At low redshift, it reduces to bzlbt = -qoHoz + O(z2). Indeed, this drift is extremely small and of the order of az I at ~ 10- 8 I century. However, it gives a direct information on E(z) and thus on the cosmological parameters (see Refs . [17,18]). Note that the redshifts are free of the evolutionary properties of the sources, and that a direct detection of their drift would represent a new (and yet never exploited) and direct approach in observational cosmology to constrain the evolution history of the Universe, alternative to those based on luminosity or diameter distances. It can be of importance in the study of the dark-energy problem (see Chapter 12).
160
3.5
The homogeneous Universe
Horizons
An horizon is a frontier t hat separates observable events from non-observable on T wo very different concepts of horizon have t o be distinguished in cosmology ( Refs. [10, 19]) . The different quantities defined in t his section are represented in Figs. and 3.12. 15
~
Geodesic of
>.
'"0
:::-
a particle _ entering into our particle horizon today _
10
~
0)
B
0. 8 0.6
(f'
:3
t)
"
. _ 0.4
.~
0)
0;
"
0
CIJ
U
- 0.2 0 0
10
20
40
30
50
Comovin g di stance, aoX, ( 109 light-years) 15
LO
~
>. 0
~
:::-
0. 8
IO
~
" E
~
"
.~
0.6
'" ..'": .9
~
"
5
0)
0;
"
CIJ
0
U
20
30
40
50
Physica l di stance, ax, (10 9 light-years)
Fig. 3.11 The particle horizon at a given time (3. 102) is defined at different moments the geod esic of the most distant observable comoving particles at this moment (plain verti lines). T his surface can be visualized as the intersection of the particle horizon (3.103) w a constant-time hypersurface . The equation of this surface is given by X = ¢(t) in comov coordinates (top) and by X = u(t) in physical coordinates . This diagram represents a U verse with t he following cosmological parameters (!lmo , !lAO) = (0. 3, 0.7) and h = 0.7. Fr Ref. [20].
3.5.1
Event horizon
For an observer 0 , the event horizon is the hypersurface that divides all events in two families: the ones that have been , are, or will be observable by and the on that are for ever outside the observational perimeter of 0. A necessary and sufficient condition fo r the existence of an event horizon is t h the integral OO dt
°
J
a(t)
Horizons
161
Physical distance (10 9 light-years)
Comoving distance, GoX (10 9 light-years) 60
~
50
;>,
,
lOpO
,,'
3.0
o~/
2.0
~~,
b-~~--~----~----:~r7~~-*~--~~____~__~~OT'~'______~1.0
40
0. 8
30
04
~
0
¥
'-'
oJ
.~
OJ
E = 0
<2
€
20
0.1
U
"5"
'"
10 LLL-_'------'L--'---_"----_~_-'.L-_
- 40
_"'____
__"__
__"__
_"__
- 20 20 o Como ving di stance, GoX ([0 9 light-years)
___L_"____L_
40
_i:>....:J
0.01 0.00 I
60
Fig. 3.12 Universe diagrams for a Friedmann- Lemaitre space with paramet ers OmO = 0.3, [lAO = 0.7 and h = 0.7 . The first two diagrams represent , respectively, the physical distance, a(t)x, and the comoving distance , X, in terms of the cosmic time, t (left scale) or in terms of the scale factor, normalized to 1 today (right scale). The last diagram represents the comoving distance in terms of the conformal time, 7). The dotted lines represent the worldlines of comoving observers and our world line is the central vertical line. Above each of these lines is indicated the redshift at which a galaxy on this world line becomes visible for the central observer. We represent the past light cone for the present central observer and the event horizon corresponding to a similar light cone originated from time-like infinity (plain bold line) . We also show t he Hubble sphere, defined by (3.63) (plain light line) and the particle horizon , defined by (3 .103) (clashed line) . From Ref. [20].
is convergent . If this integr a l converges , then at a ny time to , there exists a worldline
1
00
X = Xo =
to
dt
a(t) ,
such that the photon emitted at to in Xo towa rds the origin , reach es X
=
0 at t
= +00.
162
The homogeneous Universe
Any photon emitted at to in X > Xo never reaches the origin and any photon emitt at to in X < XO reaches the origin in a finite time. The de Sitter space, for which a = exp(Ht ), has such an event horizon, since
=
Xo
=
dt e- Hto exp H t = ~ <
1 to
00.
As a second example, let us consider Universes wit h scale-factor evolution of the for a(t ) = tn. The integral
J=
c ndt
converges if and only if n > l. Recalling that for a flat Universe (K = 0) n is relat to the parameter w of t he equation of st at e by 3n = 2/ (1 + w), we find that an eve horizon exist s if 1 (3 .10 w < - '3 {==} p + 3P < 0, i.e. if the strong energy condition is violated. 3.5.2
Particle horizon
For an observer 0 at to, t he particle horizon is t he surface of the hypersurface t = dividing all particles of the Universe into two non-empty families : the ones that ha already been observed by 0 at the time to and the ones that have not. For ea time to, it is thus t he intersection between the geodesics of the most dist ant comovi par ticles that can be observed, with the hypersurface t = to. Hence, it is a tw dimensional space-like surface, which reduces to a sphere of centre 0 for an isotrop and homogeneous Universe. A necessary and sufficient condition for the exist ence of a particle horizon is th the following integral be convergent:
· 1
dt
dt a(t) '
J_=
or
a a(t )
depending on whether or not a(t) continues for negative values of t . Indeed , at any time t o, any particle such that X > a - 1dt has not yet be observed by an observer 0 at the origin. The two-dimensional surface
J;o
X = ¢(to ) =
i
dt
to
a
-
a(t)
(3.10
defines t he particle horizon at a given time to and thus divides all particles into tw sub-families: the ones t hat have been observed at to or before to [X :s: ¢(to )] and th ones t hat have not yet been observed [X > ¢(to) ]. This surface is called the partic horizon of 0 a t to. It can be seen as the section at t = to of t he space-time surfa (J = ¢ (t ). We thus define the particle horizon as the hypersurface X
=
(J
= ¢(t ).
(3 .10
The hypersurface (3 .103) is the fu t ure light cone emitted from the position of t observer at t = O. Since a(t ) is a positive function , when ¢(t ) exist s, it is an increasi
Horizons
163
function of t so that as time elapses, more and more particles are visible from O. In conformal time, t he particle horizon is a cone and the part icle horizon at to is a sphere. If ¢(t ) is finite when t t ends t o infinity, then the Universe has an event horizon since only the particles with X ::; ¢ (oo) will be accessible to the observer O. This is represented in Fig. 3.11 where the vertical lines represent the particle horizons at various times, whereas the d ashed line represents the surface defined by X = ¢(t) . As an example, let us consider Universes wit h scale- factor evolution of the form a( t ) = tn. The integral
lC
n
dt
converges if and only if n < 1. Since for a flat Universe (K = 0) , 3n = 2/ (1 + w) , it follows that there exists a particle horizon if 1
w > -3
~ p
+ 3P > O.
(3.104)
From the conditions (3.101) and (3 .104), we thus conclude that a Universe containing a single fluid with constant equation of st ate can have either an event horizon or particle horizon, but not both at the same time. The two types of horizons are thus mutually exclusive in this particular case. The equation (3.102) gives the co moving radius of the particle horizon. Its physical diamet er at a time t 2 for a n event that occurred at tl < t 2 is thus (3.105) It can be checked that if t l and t 2 are two events from an era dominated by a fluid with const ant equation of st at e w , then _ 6(1 + w)
D p h (t 1 , t 2) -
[ 1 +3w t2 1 -
(h) t2
l
(1+3W / (3+3W l ]
.
(3.106)
If tl « t2 t hen t he horizon diameter is proportional to t he Hubble radius (3.63) at the time t 2
(3.107) The particle horizon is at t he origin of the 'horizon problem ' of the st andard Big-Bang model (see Section 4.5.2 of Chapter 4). 3.5.3
Global properties
To study the global structures, and in particular at infinity, of the cosmological spacetimes , we shall use the representation introduced by P enrose (see R ef. [10] for a general study). It is based on the idea of constructing, for any manifold M with metric g/J>v , another manifold ;\It with a boundary 3 and metric 9/J>v = W g/J>v such that M is conformal to the interior of ;\It , and so that the 'infinity' of M is represented by the 'finite' hypersurface 3. The last property implies that W vanishes on 3. All asymptotic properties of M can be investigated by studying 3 (see Ref. [21 ]) .
164
The homogeneous Universe
3.5.3.1
The Minkowski space-time as an example
The Minkowski metric (1.10) in spherical coordinates can be written in terms of t advanced and retarded null coordinates, respectively, defined by v = t + r and u = t as 1 ds 2 = - dvdu + 4(v - u) 2d0 2,
where v ?: u and v and u range from -00 to +00 . No terms of t he form dv 2 or d appear because the surfaces of constant v (or constant u) are null surfaces. We can make these coordinates vary in a finite interval by introducing tan V = v ,
tanU = u ,
so that - 71"/ 2 < U :S V < 71"/2. Then , introducing the coordinates T and R by
T = U + V,
R = V -U,
with - 71" < T + R < 71" ,
- 71" < T - R < 71" ,
(3. 10
the Minkowski metric turns out to be conformal to the metric 9 given by ds 2 = - dT 2 + dR 2 + sin 2 R d0 2,
with conformal factor W = {2 sin[(R + T) / 2] sin[(T - R) / 2]} - 2. The Minkowski spa time is thus conformal to the region (3.1 08) of the Einstein static space-time (a cyl der S3 x IR. that represents a st atic space-t ime with spherical spatial sect ions). T boundary of this region therefore represents the conformal structure of infinity of t Minkowski space-time. This boundary can be decomposed into - two 3-dimensional null hypersurfaces , .:7+ and .:7- defined by
(3 .10
or equivalently by T = ±( 71" - R) with R E [0,71"]. T he image of a null geode originates on .:7- and t erminates at .:7+, which represent future and past nu infinity. - two points i+ and i - defined by U = V =
±-=2'
(3 .11
or equivalently by R = 0 and T = ± 71". The image of a t ime-like geodesic origina at i - and terminates at i + . They represent future and past time-like infinity, th is, respectively, t he start- and end-point of all time-like geodesics. - one point iO defined by U = - V= --= (3.11 2' or equivalently by R = 71" and T = o. It is t he start- and end-point of all space-l geodesics so that it represents spatial infinity.
Horizons
165
The fact that i± and iO are single points follows from the fact that sin R = O. These are coordinate singularities of the same type as the one encountered at the origin of polar coordinates. The manifold Nt is regular at these points. J - is a future null cone with vertex i- and it refocuses to a point iO that is spatially diametrically opposite to i - . The future null cone of iO is J +, which refocuses at i+. Note that the boundary is determined by the space-time and is unique but that the conformal ext ension space-time (here the Einstein static space-time) is not fixed by the original metric and is not unique since another conformal transformation could have been chosen. For any spherically symmetric space-time, the region (3.108) can be represented in the (T, R) plane by ignoring the angular coordinates so that each point represents a sphere S2 In this representation the Minkowski space-time is a square lozenge (see Fig. 3.13) . Null geodesics are represented by straight lines at ±45 deg running from J - to J + .
i+
i+
J+
(1) =
+ on )
:
I
I I
I I I
I
I I
I
J -
(I) = 0)
J -
(I) = -
00.')
I
Fig. 3.13 Conformal diagrams of the Minkowski space-time (left) and Friedmann-Lemaitre space-times with Euclidean spatial sections with A = 0 and P > 0 (middle) and de Sitter space (right) .
3.5.3.2
Friedmann-Lemaltre space-times with K = 0
When written in terms of the conformal time, Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times with Euclidean spatial sections are conformal to Minkowski. It follows that they map on a part of region (3 .108) representing Minkowski space-time in the Einstein static Universe. The actual region is determined by the range of variation of 7]. For A = 0 and P > 0, 0 < 7] < 00 so that it is conformal to the upper half of the Minkowski diamond defined by T > 0 (see Fig. 3.13) with a singularity boundary, T = O.
166
The homogeneous Universe
3.5.3.3 de Sit ter space-time
The metric of t he de Sitter space-time is given by (3 .44) with t varying in R It spherical spatial sections and is conformal to the whole Einstein static space-time. study its infinity we define the coordinates
R =X,
T = 2 arctan
(eHt )
,
(3.1
with 0 < R < 7r and 0 < T < 7r. It is then conformal to a square region of the Eins static space with conformal factor W = H - 2 cosh2(Ht) (see Fig. 3.13). We see that this conformal diagram has a space-like infinity both for time-like null geodesics, in the future and in the past.
3. 5.3.4
Friedmann- Lem aitre space-times with K = ± 1
Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times wit h spherical spatial sections (K = + 1) are con mal to the Einstein static space-time (with 17 --7 T and X --7 R). They are thus map into the part of this space-time determined by the allowed values for 17· There are three general possibilities. When A = 0, 17 varies from 0 to 7r if P = 0 from 0 to a < 7r when P > O. The Friedmann-Lemaitre space-time is thus confor to a square region of the Einst ein st atic space-time so that both J + and J space-like and represent two singularities. When A i- 0, 17 can vary from 0 t o 00 the hesitating Universes (such as examples Nand M in Fig. 3.3) or from - 00 to for t he b ouncing Universes (such as examples G and H in Fig. 3.3). The Friedma Lem aitre space- time is thus conformal to either half of or the entire Einstein st space-time. As in the case of the de Sitter space, the conformal region will be a squ of the Einstein static space and J + and J - are also space-like but do not necess represent a singularity. In the case of Fr iedmann- Lemaitre space-times with hyperbolic spatial secti (K = -1 ), the metric can be shown to be conformal to part of t he region (3.108) means of the coordinat e transformation
T= R =
arctan [tanh ( 17 : arctan [tanh ( 17 :
X)] + arct an [t anh (17 ; X)] , X)] _arct an [t anh ( 17 ; X)] .
Again, the exact shape of this region depends on the matter content (equation of s and A). We see in these examples that some parts of the boundary correspond to the B Bang singularity a = O. When P > 0 and A = 0, the initial singularity is space-l which corresponds t o the existence of a particle horizon. When K = + 1 and A = the future boundary is space-like, which signals the exist ence of event horizons for fundamental observers. For most physically interesting space-times, J + and J - are either space-like null , which is closely related to the existence of one of the two types of horizon descri above.
Beyond the cosmological principle
167
If .]- is space-like, the worldlines of the fundamental observers do not all meet on .]- at the same point . For any particular observer and event on its worldline close to J -, the past light cone of this event will not intercept all the particles in the Universe before it reaches .]- and there will be a particle horizon. If .]- is null , it is expected that all the worldlines of the fundamental observers pass through the vertex i- so that the past light cone of a point P will intercept all the worldlines and there is no particle horizon. If .]+ is space-like, the worldline of any fundamental terminates on a point 0 of J+ and the past light cone of 0 divides the Universe into events that can be seen by the observer and events that he can never see; there is en event horizon. If .]+ is null , all the worldlines will pass through the vertex i+ , so that 0 = i+ and its past light cone is .]+ and there is no event horizon. In conclusion, .]- space-like <===>- existence of a particle horizon, .]+ space-like <===>- existence of an event horizon.
,....
J + {}I
0
=;: I
k
1
II
II I ;><
J+
...
( 1/ = + ,~ ,c- )
a
II ;><
1 1
1 ;>< 1 1 II
I
"1 1
..J.... I
J -
(II= 0 )
J+{ I/= +'X ·I I
I
....
1 1
..
(I I = 0 )
a
II
,,
, I
;><
1 1
;><
II "1
1 1
I I
J - (17 =
- cc· )
Fig. 3.14 Conformal diagrams of the Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times with spherical spatial sections with P > 0 for A = 0 (left), and A =F 0: hesitating case (middle) and bouncing case (right). T he dotted line represents a singularity. The three diagrams differ only by the nature of J±, even though they are all space-like surfaces .
3.6
Beyond the cosmological principle
The Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times have spatial sections with constant curvature, i.e. three-dimensional homogeneous and isotropic surfaces. These symmetries are characterised by six Killing vectors (Chapter 1) that completely fix the geometry of the spatial metric , up to a number, K. Reciprocally, we can construct some solutions by restraining the number of symmetries and by imposing the structure of their Lie algebra. Numerous solutions of Einst ein's equations are known in this case and have been classified [22- 24].
168
The homogeneous Universe
We give a general description of the classification of cosmological space-times cording to t heir symmetries and t hen we present two cosmological solutions in or to illustrate the richness that this provides. 3.6.1
Classifying space-times
Even t hough the previous discussion focused on a particular class of cosmological so tions with maximally symmetric spatial sections , most solutions of E instein's equati have no symmetry at all. This simplification was motivated by the cosmological pr ciple but it is important to have an idea of exact solutions with less symmetry particular to construct counterexamples to some conclusions or t est their robustne
3.6.1.1
Symmetries and Killing vectors
Symmetries of a given space are t ransformations of this space into itself leaving metric unchanged as well as all its geometrical properties . As explained in Chapte a continuous symmetry can be characterized by a Killing vector field , ~ , satisfying
The group of isometries of a Riemannian manifold forms a Lie group (that is a gro that is also a smooth m anifold with a group operation xy - l that is a smooth m into t he manifold itself; see Chapter 2). The set of Killing vector fields generators t hese isometries forms the associated Lie alge bra: it is a vector space, since t he lin combination of any two Killing vectors is also a Killing vector, of finite dimensio since the maximum number of Killing vectors for a space of dimension n is n(n + 1) reached for maximally symmetric spaces. The product operation is defined by commutator of two Killing vectors
(3 .1 of coordinates [~a, ~b]'" = (8f3~b) ~g [~a, [~b , ~cll
+
[~b, [~c,~all
+
[~c , [~a , ~b ll
-
(8f3~~n~f and it satisfies the J acobi ident
= O.
It is easily checked that if ~a and ~b are two Killing vectors then [~a, ~bl is als Killing vector (since £[l;a, l;blgj.LV = 8!L[~a , ~blv + 8v[~b,~al!L = 0). Considering a ba {~a}a = l..r of this algebra , any Killing vector can be decomposed on this basis a linear combination with constant coefficients. It follows t hat
(3 .1
C~b are t he structure constan ts of the Lie algebra. They are antisymmetr -Cba ' and must satisfy, from the J acobi ident ity C~[bC~d) = O. These relati are integrability conditions t hat ensure that t he Lie algebra is defined in a consist way.
where C~b =
3.6.1.2
Defini tions
T he action of a group of isometries defines orbits in the space where it acts and dimensionality of these orbits characterizes t he symmetries.
Beyond the cosmological principle
169
T he orbit of a point P is the set of all points into which P is transformed by the action of the isometries of the space. The orbits are thus invariant sets. An invariant variety is a set that is globally left invariant by the action of the group of isometries. It will be larger than all t he orbits it contains. T he orbits are t he smallest invariant subspaces (for all the isometries in the group) . An orbit that reduces to a single point is a fixed point. It is a point where all Killing vectors vanish. We distinguish general points where the dimension of Killing Lie algebra takes the value it has almost everywhere from special p oints, such as t he fixed points, where the dimension is lower. The group of isometries is transitive on a space S if it can move any point of S into any other point of S. Orbits are the largest spaces through each point on which the group is transitive and can be called surfaces of transitivity. Their dimension, s, has to be smaller than or equal to t he dimension of t he group of translation, s = dim(surfaceoftransitivity)
~
n.
The isotropy group, at a point P, is the subgroup of isometries letting that particular point be fixed. It is generat ed by the Killing vectors that vanish at P. Its dimension q is smaller t han the dimension of the group of rotations, n(n - 1) / 2, q
= dim(isotropygroup)
~
1 "2n(n -1).
The dimension of the group of isometries , r , is the sum of the dimensions of the isotropy group and of t he surface of transitivity. It follows t hat r has to be smaller t han the maximum dimension of the Killing Lie algebra, that is n( n + 1) / 2, that is for a space of constant curvature. r = dim(groupofisometries) = s
+ q ~ ~n(n + 1).
The group of isometries of a space is thus characterized by two of the t hree numbers (S, q,T) and by the structure constants of t he group (C~b)' 3.6.1.3
Classification of cosmological models
For an = 4 dimensiona l space-t imes, r ~ 10 and s can run from 0 to 4. The dimension of the group of isometries being a global property of t he space, r must not change over space. Indeed, the real Universe has no symmetry (r = 0). For cosmological spaces, we assume that p + P > 0, which implies that q E {3, I , O} because the congruence of t he worldline of the fundamental observers is invariant, so that the isotropy group at each point must be a subgroup acting orthogonally to uf.' and it can be shown t hat there is no subgroup of 0(3) of dimension 2. Furthermore, q can vary over space but not over an orbit and it can be greater at special points where s is smaller. The space will be said to be isotropic for q = 3 (this is the case of the Friedmann- Lemaitre spaces), locally invariant under rotation for q = 1 (there is a preferred spatial direction) and anisotropic for q = O. Table 3.2 summarizes all t he possibilities according to q and s. For more details, see Refs. [7,22- 24].
The homogeneous Universe
170
Table 3.2 Classification of cosmological models according to their isotropy and homogeneity properties . We recall that r = q + s :::; 10.
q= 6
8= 3
8= 2
spatially homogeneous
inhomogeneous
Minkowski , de Sitter anti-de Sitter
none
none
Einstein static
Friedma nn- Lemaitre
none
q= 1
Bianchi Kantowski- Sachs
Lemaitre- Tolman- Bondi
q= O
Bianchi
q= 3
3.6.2
8= 4 space-time homogeneous
Universe with non-homogeneous spatial sections
3.6.2.1 Lemaitre- Tolman-Bondi space-time
Among all the non-homogeneous spaces, the Lemaitre-Tolman- Bondi space-tim the simplest. It enjoys a spherical symmetry, so that s = 2, q = 1 and r = 3 (but n that the origin is a special point with q = 3 and s = 0). Its metric takes the gen form ds 2 = -dt 2 + S2(t , r)dr2 + R2(t , r)dS1 2. (3. 1 The Einstein equations for a fluid of dust (P = 0) reduce to 2
S (r, t)
= 1_
(R')2 K(r)r2
R? = 2M(r) _ K(r)r2
R M'(r) 47rG N P(r, t) = R2 R' '
(3.1
(3 .1
(3.1
where a prime and a dot represent the derivatives with respect to rand t , respectiv M(r) and K(r) are two integration functions. The Friedmann- Lemaitre space-ti correspond to the special case R = a(t)r and K(r) = K. These equations can integrated to give the solution
R(rJ , r)
=
M(r) d
M(r) t(rJ , r) - to(r) = (2E) 3/2
(3. 1
where 2E = (2E , 1, - 2E) ,
Beyond the cosmological principle
3.6.2.2
171
The Swiss-cheese model
This family of inhomogeneous space-times is constructed by cutting out spherical regions from a Friedmann-Lemaitre Universe and filling the voids by a spherically symmetric solution of the Einstein equation, for example, a Schwarzschild solution. The two space-times are then glued along a 3-dimensional time-like hypersurface. This implies constraints on the two space-times since they have to obey junction conditions for the total space-time to be well behaved (see Section 8.4.5 of Chapter 8 for a description of these conditions). For instance, it can be shown that it implies that the central mass of the Schwarzschild space-time, the density and scale factor of the Friedmann- Lemaitre space-time and the radius of t he spherical void must be related by MSchw = (471" /3)[ pa 3 R 3 ]FL . Thus, we can construct a spherical void with an overdensity at the centre. The junction conditions impose that the over- and underdensities average to the mean density of the Friedmann- Lemaitre space-time. It follows that the mass in the central void cannot have any effect on matter outside the void, and in particular on the expansion rate: its gravitational effect is screened. 3.6.3
Universe with homogeneous spatial sections
The Universe models with s = 3 are central in theoretical cosmology because they mathematically realize the cosmological principle (they have homogeneous spatial sections). We have described at length t he case of isotropic space-times (q = 3; r = 6) in this chapter . Two classes of non-isotropic space-times can be constructed: (i) the family of solutions with a local rotation symmetry (q = 1; r = 4), which contains the family of Kantowski- Sachs Universes and some Bianchi Universes, and (ii) the family of anisotropic solutions (q = 0; r = 3) , which contains the other Bianchi Universes. 3.6.3.1 Generalities on Bianchi Universes To classify all spaces with s = 3, we need to determine the structure constants, C~b' of the group t hat is simply transitive on space-like sections. The C~b have 9 independent components and can thus be mapp ed onto t he 3 x 3 matrix Nab defined by N cd =
~2 Cab Eabd , C
where cabd is the completely antisymmetric tensor. Splitting Ncd into its symmetric and antisymmetric parts as Ncd = ncd +E cdb A b , we obtain that the structure constants are C~b = Edab ncd + 6gAa - 6g A b· One can always choose the basis of the Lie algebra such that nab is diagonal [nab = diag(nl,n2 , n3)]. A rotation allows us to set Ab = (a,O,O) while keeping nab diagonal. The Jacobi identity implies that nab Ab = 0, so that we have one of the three possibilities: (i) a = and nl y'c 0, (ii) a y'c and nl = 0, or (iii) a = and nl = 0. By rescaling the Killing vectors, we can finally set the nonvanishing n a to ± 1 but in general it is impossible to rescale both a and na. In conclusion
°
°
°
(3.120)
172
The homogeneous Universe
Table 3.3 gives the eleven groups of isometries that are distributed among the ni Bianchi types I to I X. They are divided into two classes: class A if a = 0 and class otherwise. In some cases, these groups allow higher symmetry. For instance, Bianch and V I 10 can be isotropic (leading to K = 0 Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times) as w as Bianchi IX (leading to K = +1 Friedmann- Lemaitre space-times) and Bianchi and Bianchi VIla (leading to K = - 1 Friedmann-Lemaitre space-times).
Table 3.3 The structure constants of the 11 groups of isometries and the definition of the 9 associated Bianchi types . Class
A
B
Bianchi type
I
II
VIla
VIa
IX
VIII
V
III
IV
VIla
VIa
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
a
a
nl
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
n2
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
n3
0
1
1
-1
1
- 1
0
1
- 1
1
-1
3.6.3.2 Example: Bianchi I Universe
The simplest Universe with anisotropic expansion is the Bianchi I Universe. It is homogeneous space-time so that the projected gradient of any scalar function vanish 'V'vi = O. This implies, in the notations of Chapter 1, that aIL = 0 (because 'V' ILP = and the vorticity is also vanishing, w ILV = 0). It follows that it is completely describ by 8(t) , a(t) , p(t), and P(t). The Raychaudhuri equation (1. 73) gives
The spatial sections are assumed to be Euclidean so that t he generalized Friedmann equation (1.78) reduces to
(3) R =
0, which implies th
The shear evolution equation is derived from the Gauss-Codazzi relation, using t fact that (3) Rab = 0, and is given by
In terms of the cosmic time derivatives , this rewrites as
In co moving coordinates , the metric of this space-time takes the form
(3. 12
Beyond the cosmological principle
173
The average of the directional expansion rates is S = (XY Z)1/3 and is related to by 30 = S/ S. Factorizing S, t he metric can be recast as
e
(3 .122) and the metric on constant-time hypersurfaces can be decomposed as 'Y ..
-
i2J -
where the
f3i
have to satisfy
L
f3i =
O.
e2 (3i (t) u>tJ. . '
"tij
(3.123)
is traceless and related to the shear by
The equation of evolution of the shear implies that (3.124) where ~j a constant tensor . This implies that 0- 2 == (Jij (J i j = ~2 / S6, where ~2 = ~j~L and thus that the generalized Friedmann equation (l.78) takes t he form (3.125) For a fluid with equation of state P = wp , P IX S-3(w+l) . T his implies that for any value of ~, the shear always dominates the primordial evolut ion of the Universe. It can also be checked t hat the Raychaudhuri equation takes the form (3.126) The evolution of the three scale factors can be shown to be obtained by setting (3.127) with W(t) =
dt
J
(3.128)
S3 .
The coefficients Bi must satisfy the constraint (3. 129) This relation is trivially verified with 27r .
a·=a+ -3 2' t where a is a constant. For instance, if w = 0, we obtain the solution
(3.130)
174
The homogeneous Universe
5 = (
~Mt2 + /f2:.t )
1/ 3
w = - /[~ In (3M + 2V62:./ t) ,
,
(3
once setting Kp = M / 5 3. At lat e times, the Universe becomes more and more isot and t ends towards an E inst ein-de Sitter space-time, but close to the Big Bang shear dominat es, 5 ----> (V32:.t)1 /3 and
X(t)
---->
X ot (1+2s in O:J)/3,
Y(t)
---->
Yo t (1+ 2 sin O: 2 )/3 ,
Z(t)
----> Zot(1 + 2 s in O: 3 )/ 3
(3 If 0: i- 7r / 2, two of the powers are positive and the third one is negative. Si behaviours close to the singularity will be discussed in Section 13.4.1 of Chapte As another example, consider the case of a pure cosmological constant. Then Friedmann equation can take the form
It follows that
5(t)
=
5. [sinh(3H. t)]1/3 .
Again, at late time, it converges toward the de Sitter scale factor 5 at early time it behaves as t 1 / 3 .
rv
exp(H. t)
References [1] P.J.E. PEEBLES , Principle of physical cosmology, Princeton University Press, 1993. [2] S. WEINBERG , Gravitation and cosmology: principles and applications of the general theory of relativity, John Wiley and Sons, 1972. [3] J. RICH, Fundam entals of cosmology, Springer-Verlag , 200l. [4] E. HARISSON, Cosmology, Cambridge University Press, 1981. [5] B. RIDDEN, Introduction to cosmology, Addison Wesley, 2003. [6] R.c. TOLMAN, R elativity, thermodynamics and cosmology, Oxford University Press, 1934. [7] G.F.R ELLIS and H. VAN ELST, 'Cosmological models ', in Theoretical and observational cosmology, Kl uwer , Dordrecht, 1999. [8] J .P. UZAN , C. CLARKSON and G.F.R ELLIS, 'Time drift of the cosmological redshift as a test of the Copernican principle' , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100, 191303, 2008. [9] R. WALD, Gravitation, Chicago University Press, 1984. [10] S. HAWKING and G.F.R ELLIS , The large scale structure of space-time, Cambridge University Press, 1973. [11] A.D. CHERNIN, D.l. NAGIRNER and S.V. STARIKOVA , 'Growth rate of cosmological perturbations in standard model: explicit analytical solution ' , Astron. Astrophys. 399 , 19, 2003. [12] J. EHLERS and W. RI NDLER, 'A phase space representation of Friedmann- Lemaitre Universes containing both dust and radiation and the inevitability of a Big Bang', Month. Not. R. Astron. Soc. 238 , 503 , 1989. [13] G.F.R ELLIS and J . WAINWRIGHT (eds.) , The dynamical system approach to cosmology, Cambridge University Press, 1996. [14] J.-P. UZAN and R LEHOUCQ, 'A dynamical study of the Friedmann equations', Eur. J. Phys. 22 , 371 , 200l. [15] G.F.R ELLIS , 'Relativistic cosmology' , in R elativity and cosmology, RK SACHS (ed.) , Academic Press, 1971. [16] J.-P. UZAN, N. AGHANIM and Y. MELLIER, 'The distance duality relation from X-ray and SZ observartions of clusters', Phys. Rev. D 70 , 083533, 2004. [17] M. DAVIES and L. MAY, 'New observations of the radio absorption line in 3C 286, with potential application to direct measurement of cosmological deceleration', Astrophys. J. 219 , 1, 1978. [18] A. LO EB, 'Direct measurement of cosmological parameters from the cosmic deceleration of extragalactic objects ', Astrophys. J. L ett. 499 , Ll11 , 1998. [19] W. RINDLER, 'Visual horizons in world-models', Month. Not. R. Astron. Soc. 116, 622, 1953.
176
References
[20] T.M. DAVIS and C.H. LINEWEAVER, Expanding confusion: common miscon tions on cosmological horizons and the superluminal expansion of th e Univ [astro-ph/0310S0S] .
[21] R. PENROSE, 'Conformal treatment of infinity' , in Relativity, groups and topo Les Houches 1963, pp. 561 C. DE WITT, and B. DE WITT (eds.) , Gordon Breach, 1964. [22] A. KRASINSKY , Physics in an inhomogeneo us Universe , Cambridge Unive Press, 1996. [23] D. KRAMER, H. STEPHANI, M.A.H. MCCALLUM and E. HERTL, Exact solu of Einstein's field equations, Cambridge University Press, 1980. [24] M.P. RYAN, Homogeneous relativistic cosmologies, Princeton University P 1975.
4 The standard Big-Bang model This chapter is devoted to the description of the historical pillars on which the standard Big-Bang model stands. Starting from the cosmological solutions described in Chapter 3, we present the observations proving the expansion of the Universe and the various consequences of this expansion. We start , in section 4.1, by describing the observational evidences of the expansion of the Universe from Hubble's observations to the most recent ones. This will lead us to discuss the value of the Hubble constant and its relation with the age of the Universe. Elements of thermodynamics in an expanding space-time are sumarised in section 4.2. We will deduce that the Universe has a thermal history. In particular , we will show how the departures from thermodynamic equilibrium playa central role. A remarkable feature of the Big-Bang model comes from the proof by Alpher , Bethe and Gamow in 1948 [1] tha t light nuclei can be formed during primordial nuc1eosynthesis. T his is discussed in section 4.3. Gamow [2] also deduced the existence of a microwave background of photons, the temperature of which was calculated by Alpher and Herman [3] in 1948. Relying on an estimate of the helium abundance and of the baryon density, they concluded that this temperature should be around 5 K. Section 4.4 describes the properties of the isotropic component of this microwave background radiation. These physical ingredients transform the (mathematical) cosmological solutions of F'riedmann- Lemaitre into the Big-Bang model. We will argue in section 4.5 that this model is an excellent standard model for cosmology, even if it suffers some problems, on which we will focus our attention in the following chapters of this book.
4.1
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
If the Universe is expanding, galaxies must move away from one another (see Section 3.l.3; Chapter 3). The measurement of the systematic achromatic shift to longer wavelengths of the absorption or emission spectral lines gives access to the redshift z. For small redshifts , the recession velocity is given by vi c ~ z. As for distances , (3.99) shows that the luminosity and angular distances reduce to D A
~ D ~~z~ ~ L Ho Ho '
as long as z « l. In this regime, the slope of the curve of v as a function of D directly gives the Hubble constant Ho. For larger redshifts, this is no longer the case. First, the
178
The standard Big-Bang model
angular distance and the luminosity distance are no longer identical, and in addit other cosmological paramet ers also interfere in the determination of these distan (see Chapter 3). We describe the measurements for small redshifts in Section 4.1.1 and then th for supernOVffi that extend up to redshifts of order 1 in Section 4.1.2. We finish summarizing the methods allowing the age of the Universe to be determined in S tion 4.1.3 . 4 .1.1
The Hubble constant
The Hubble diagram is the most direct proof of the expansion of the Universe. T underlying idea is very simple and comes from the independent measurements of redshift and distance. These measurements must be performed at distances large enough for the pro velocity of the galaxies to be negligible. Typically, one should measure velocities lar than v rv 10 4 km· s-I, which corresponds to a redshift of z rv 0.03. The original measurements of Hubble, lie respectively, up to velocities of order 1000 km · S- l and then up to velocities of order v rv 20000 km · S-l (see Fig. 4.1). T analysis provided a value for Ho that was 10 times larger than the one adopted tod For a galaxy with recession velocity v rv 10000 km· s-l, the effect of its proper velo v rv 300 km . S- l leads to an uncertainty of approximatively 3%. This uncertainty be reduced by observing a large number of objects well distributed over the whole s Hubble (1929)
Hubble & Humason (1931)
~ ~
~
I
I
en
0
~ 1000 C 0
>
0
500
~
" en
0
0
0
0
10000
0 .;;;
0
en
<J) <J)
~
Jl,
"
0 .;;; 0
o
CIS 000 '0
'0 Q)
~ 20000
6
<J)
5000
0
'8
<J)
~
1 Distance (Mpc)
30
2 Distance (Mpc)
Fig. 4 .1 Observations by Hubble in 1929 (left) a nd by Hubble and Humason in 1931 (ri proving the expansion of the Universe. The first measurement of Ho included 18 gala for which both t he distance and the red shift were determined . Hubble concluded that H 500km · S - 1 . Mpc- 1 [4] .
4.1.1.1
Astronomical m ethods
The difficulty in constructing a reliable scale of distances [5] has limited progress in measurement of the Hubble constant. Thanks to the Hubble Space Telescope (HST is now possible to measure Ho with a precision of about 10%. In astronomy, distan cannot be measured directly. The parallax method , which is purely geometrical,
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
179
only be used to determine the distances of the closest stars in the Milky Way. The general method is then to measure the intrinsic luminosity of a class of objects for which it is either constant , or correlated to another physical parameter , whose value is thought to be independent of the distance, as a way to calibrate the relative distances. Various classes of objects have been used to this purpose (see Ref. [6] for a review). 1. Cepheids: cepheids are variable stars the external atmosphere of which pulses
with a period between 2 and 100 days. These young and bright stars are very abundant in the close spiral and irregular galaxies. The pulsation mechanism is well understood theoretically and it has been established empirically that the pulsation period, which is independent of the distance , is correlated to the intrinsic luminosity of the star. The dispersion of the period- luminosity relation is of the order of 20% in luminosity. Since the luminosity scales as the inverse of the square of the distance, this implies a precision of 10% on the determination of the distance. For a sample of 25 cepheids, the statistic uncertainty drops to 2%. The Hubble diagram obtained from cepheids by the HST Key Project [7] is presented in Fig. 4.2. The most precise calibration of the period- luminosity relation is performed on the Large Magellanic Cloud (LMC) and its distance has been determined with a precision of 10%. At the moment, the det ection of cepheids is limited to about 20 Mpc. To extend the scale, obj ects brighter than simple stars should be found . Their luminosity can be calibrated by identifying such objects in the nearby galaxies that also contains cepheids. 2. Type Ia supernova;: type Ia supernOVffi (SN Ia) are the most promising distance indicators for modern observational cosmology. The origin of SN Ia is the explosion of a white dwarf. Their luminosity is comparable to that of an entire galaxy, making them observable at distances of several hundreds Mpc. As will be shown later in Section 4.l.2 , their luminosity curve shows a strong correlation between the characteristic evolution t ime and the maximal luminosity. The uncertainty of this relation is of the order of 12% on the luminosity, which translates into an uncertainty of around 6% in t he determination of their distance. 3. The Tully- Fisher relation: the total luminosity of spiral galaxies is strongly correlated to the m aximal rotation velocity of the galaxy. This relation, detailed in Chapter 7, reflects the fact that a brighter galaxy, and thus a more massive one, must rotate faster to compensate the gravitational attraction. The rotation velocity can be measured by spectroscopic observations from the Doppler effect. The Tully- F isher relation has been measured for around a hundred galaxies and it can be shown empirically that it has a dispersion of the order of 30% in luminosity, which implies a precision of the order of 15% in the determination of the distance. 4. Fundamental plane: the intrinsic luminosity of elliptical galaxies is correlated to the velocity dispersion of their stars. This correlation is analogous to the TullyFisher relation. Elliptical galaxies occupy a 'fundamental plane' where their luminosity L is correlated to t he surface brightness 10 and to the velocity dispersion 0 7 (J, by a relation of the form L ex 10 . (J3 . This relation can be understood by the fact that elliptical galaxies are roughly
The standard Big-Bang model
180
2000 ::;'
1 500
I
OJ
-5 00L-~--~
o
• '" • • []
~ ~
I
en
E
__~__~__~__~~__~__~__~__~__~__L-~__-" 20 30 10 Distance (Mpc)
2· 104
6
~~
Tull y-Ficher (Bande I) Fundamental plane Surface brightness Supernovre Ia Supe rnovre II
'8 0
~
~
I
"0.
::E I'
'(l
E
6
10 4
0 100 80 60 40 0
100
200 Distance (Mpc)
300
400
Fig. 4.2 (top): Hubble diagram for cepheids obtained by the HST Key Project collab tion [7]. Data are spread up to distances of around 20 Mpc, just as the measurement of Hu and Humason (1931). (bottom): Different objects are used and thanks to type Ia supernO the diagram can spread up to around 300 Mpc.
self-gravitating syst ems with a mass-to-luminosity ratio more or less const The virial theorem (see Section 7.2.2) then imposes (J ex M I ro. Moreover, surface brightness is well described by I (r) = 10 exp [- (r I ro) 1/ 4 ], called the Vaucouleur law. This can be integrated as L ex Ior5. Assuming that the mass luminosity ratio is of the form MIL ex M X , we obtain that £l +x ex (J4 -4x Ig The empirical law is recovered for x rv 0.25 . The precision of this relation is of the order of 10- 20%, which implies a preci of the order of 5- 10% on the det ermination of the distance.
5. Fluctuation of the surface brightness: the resolution of stars with a CCD cam depends on the distance. The luminosity of each pixel is due to a given num of stars. One can show t hat the Poisson fluctuations from one pixel to ano
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
181
depend on the distance of the galaxy. This method has a precision of the order of 8% and is applied to redshifts up to z '" 0.02 . 4.1.1.2 S ummary of the m easurements These different methods have been put into application, mainly thanks to the HST, to construct a reliable astronomical distance scale. In particular , t his distance scale has been calibrated up to a level of 5% by cepheids. The results concerning the Hubble diagram are presented in Fig. 4.2. T he different values of the Hubble constant obtained by these various methods [7] are summarized in Table 4.1. Table 4.1 Value of the Hubble constant as measured by t he various methods d iscussed in t he text. Ho (km . s - 1 IMpc)
Method
71 ±2 ±6
SN Ia
71 ±3 ± 7
'TUlly- Fisher
70 ±5 ±6
surface brightness
72 ±9 ±7
SN II
82 ±2 ± 6
fundamental plane
72±8
combined methods
4.1.1.3 Physical methods In parallel with these astronomical methods , there exist at least three other methods to determine the Hubble constant, avoiding t he need to construct a scale of distances. 1. Expansion of the photosphere of SN II: the front of the SN II propagates at a velocity of order v / c '" 0.01 after t he explosion. This velocity can be measured
by the Doppler shift in t he supernova spectrum. The radius of the photosphere is then rphotosphere = v(t - texp losion) . If the angular diameter B under which the supernova is observed can be measured, then its distance can be deduced , D = v(t-texplosion )/B. Unfortunately, the angular diameter is difficult to measure directly for extragalactic supernOVffi. 2. Lensing effect: the arrival times of two gravitationally lensed images of the same point-like source depend on the path followed by light and on t he gravitational potentials along t hese paths (Chapter 7). The time delay between two light signals together with the angular separation between the two images of a variable quasar allow the Hubble constant to be deduced. However, this method has some problems. The gravitational lens is usually a galaxy, the mass distribution of which is not known independently. Thus, there is a degeneracy between the distribution of the lens mass and the Hubble constant. Ideally, we should need a measurement of the velocity dispersion as a function of the position. Only a dozen known systems, having both a favourable geometry and at least one variable source, is currently known . 3. Sunyaev- Zel 'dovich effect: the inverse Compton scattering of a microwave background photon (see Section 4.4) by t he ionized gas of a cluster , induces a distortion
182
The standard Big-Bang model
of the blackbody spectrum, known as the (thermal) Sunyaev- Zel'dovich effec The scattering probability P can roughly be expressed as a function of the cl diameter Dctuster and its average electronic density ne by P rv n e O"TDcluster being the Thomson scattering cross-section. The temperature and density of the hot gas can be obtained from an X emi map. Using the fact that the X flux , unlike the spectral distortion of the micro background, depends on the distance to the cluster, the latter can thus be dedu The main uncertainties of this method come from the heterogeneities of the distribution (which tend to lower the measured value of H o), from the proj ec effects, and the hydrostatic equilibrium hypothesis.
To conclude, it is reassuring to notice that methods based on very different phy principles lead to consistent values of the Hubble constant (see table 4.2), thems in agreement with those obtained by astronomical methods. Table 4.2 Measurement of the Hubble constant by physical methods. Ho (km . S - 1 / Mpc)
4.1.2
Method
73 ± 15
photosphere
72 ±7 ±15
lensing effects
60 ±20
lensi ng effects
60 ±4
Sunyaev- Zel'dovich effect
72 ±5
WMAP
Reference Schmidt et al. (1994) Tonry and Franx (1998) Fassnacht et al. (2 000 ) Reese et al. (2002) Spergel et al. (2003 )
The contribution of supernovre
As illustrated in section 4.1.1, SN Ia represent to date the most competitive candid to extend the Hubble diagram to large redshifts , for which the luminosity dista redshift relation is no longer linear. This offers the opportunity to measure cosmolo parameters other than the Hubble constant.
4.1.2.1 Distant supernovre
There exist two families of supernovre. Those for which the optical spectrum incl hydrogen traces are called type II, whereas those lacking hydrogen are of type 1. M over, type I supernovre are subdivided into three very different sub-families (a, SN Ib and Ic, just as SN II , are created by the explosion of massive stars (c Wolfe-Rayet) and lead to a residual black hole or neutron star. The mass lost by progenitor is more significant for the Ic than for the Ib so that the latter still ha layer of helium. SN la, on the other hand, appear in binary systems where one o two stars is a white dwarf that accretes the mass of its companion. When it rea the critical Chandrasekhar mass, 1.4 M G , the white dwarf collapses and explodes supernova. It has been established , thanks to the study of close supernovre, that luminosity curve could be calibrated using an empirical relation between the peak the width of the luminosity curve. Thus, SN Ia seem to be good standard candles can be observed up to large redshifts.
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
183
Two teams have worked in parallel on the search for dist ant supernovre: the Supernova Cosmology P roj ect (SCP ) [9] and the High-Z Supernova Search Team (HZT) [10]. In 1998, they independently published t he Hubble diagram of type Ia supernovre (see Fig. 4.3 ). The SCP group used a catalogue of 42 SN Ia composed of 18 SN Ia with z < 0.101 and 24 SN Ia with 0.1 80 < z < 0. 830. T he analysis of t he HZT group relies on 34 close SN Ia and 16 SN Ia with 0.16 < z < 0. 62. Figure 4.3 summarizes t he observations of both t eams. Since then , the number and the maximal redshift of the observed supernovre have increased greatly. 3
44 • I-Iigh-Z SN Sea rch team ~I o Supernova Cosmology Proj ect o 42
i
..2'" 40 ::l
2
"0 0
- I-Iigh-Z SN Search team - - Supernova Cosmology .. Proj e~~.... ·····
E 38
t::
lS
is'"
= 0 .3 , QAO = 0. 7 = 0.3, QAO = 0.0 QmO = 1.3, Q AO = 0 .0
-
36
QmO
.. ... QmO - -
34
\.\0 <:> ..••••.•
o
6
J" l. n
~ O. o
.
~E O O~~~~~~~~tt~~~~Ir.~~ 1 fI -o. ~
f ~
0 .01
0 .10
1.00
- lLLww~~~~~~~~~~WWW
0.0
z
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2 .5
Q mO
Fig. 4.3 The Hubble d iagram for the supernovre of b oth HZT and SCP t eams compared with the predictions of t hree ACDM models. The bot tom panel shows the differ ence between the data and a Universe with (Dmo, DAD ) = (0.3 , 0). (right): T he constraints on the cosmological parameters (Dmo , Dl\o) obtained by b oth exp eriments, compared with t hose obtained from the cosmological background (see Chapter 6) based on t he observat ions of MAXIMA and BOOMERanG balloons. Adapted from Ref. [11].
4.1.2.2 Implication for the cosm ological p aram eters As soon as t he redshift is not too small, t he relat ion between t he distance luminosity and the redshift becomes non-linear and t he next-t o-leading order term is proportional to ~( 1 - qO )z2 [see (3.99) ]. The analysis of both t eams proves t hat the deceleration parameter satisfies (4.1 ) qo < 0
> O. T his conclusion follows from the parameterizat ion (3 .92) t hat does not make any hypothesis on the material composition
at 2.80- with no other hypot hesis than Dmo
184
The standard Big-Bang model
of the Universe and relies only on the hypothesis that the Universe can be describ by a Friedmann- Lemaitre space-time. We can thus consider the fact that the Unive is accelerating to be a robust conclusion of the analysis of SN Ia data. l In a ACDM Universe, this relation mainly gives information on the two cosmol ical parameters n mo and nAO, as indicated by (3.94), and the constraint (4.1) imp that nAO > ~nmo. Figure 4.3 summarizes the supernovre constraints. These data ply t hat the cosmological constant must be nonvanishing and positive. The ellipses constraints of Fig. 4.3 can be roughly summarized as
(4
For tighter constraints, one should combine the data of other observations such as th from the cosmological microwave background. The latter indicates that the Unive is almost fiat , n mo + nAO c:::: 1.02 ± 0.02 according to the analysis of WMAP ( Chapter 6). Thus, for a ACDM Universe,
nmO
rv
0.3.
(4
The order of magnitude of this analysis is confirmed by precise statistical analysis
4.1.2.3
Robustness of the conclusion
The greatest uncertainty lies in the hypothesis that distant supernovre are stand candles and can be calibrated in the same way as close supernovre. Three effect s sho be quantified with precision in order to know if this effect is real or if it is an artefa
- The behaviour of supernovre could vary with cosmic time, mainly due to change of metallicity, i. e. of their chemical composition beyond helium-4. If dist supernovre have a luminosity peak systematically weaker than closer ones, conclusion nAO > 0 would be softened. If the explosions of SN Ia are strong then the conclusion would be reinforced. It is difficult to obtain information the intrinsic luminosity and one can more easily study other parameters of light curve. If two families (close and distant) are in all aspects identical, it however , highly probable that their luminosity is also the same. - The absorption by the interstellar medium could give the illusion that dist supernovre are systematically dimmer. The analysis of the light curve in seve colours can give an estimate of this dimming. The effects of gravitational lens could also soften the luminosity. - The possibility of an observational bias should also be considered.
The increasing number of observed supernovre provides a better understanding of th physics and current studies tend to prove that the acceleration of the Universe can be explained by anyone of these effects [ll]. Figure 4.4 compares the astrophysi and cosmological effects .
lWe emphasize that this conclusion can now b e reached by the combination of other da ta ( eMB a nd weak lensing) witho ut taking the SN Ia into account.
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
185
0.5
~
5" ¥I
0.0 ... '.
r
-0 .5
Q = O
_. - .....
Absorption by interstellar medium or evolution QmO = 0.35, Qi\O = 0.65 QmO = 0.35, Qi\O = 0.0 QmO = 1.0, Qi\O = 0.0
.... "
.
...... ..... .
z
Fig. 4.4 Hubble diagram for type Ia supernovce compared to the one for an empty Universe (OmO,OAO) = (0,0). The measurement of the SN Ia at z = 1.7 is incompatible with some astrophysical effects that could mimick an acceleration of the Universe at lower redshifts . Adapted from Ref. [11] .
4.1.2.4
Cosmological constant or dark energy
The previous results assume that only a cosmological constant and ordinary matter dominate. However , any kind of matter with equation of state W < -1/3 can lead to qo < 0 [see (3.94)]. It is legitimate to wonder whether it can be checked from the data that the matter responsible for the acceleration of the Universe is indeed a cosmological constant, i.e. a component with an equation of state w = - l. Figure 4.5 presents the constraints on the pair of parameters (w, D l11o ) for a flat Universe if w is assumed to be constant. For Dmo ~ 0. 3 we obtain w < - 0.6. (4.4) The constraints on the equation of state depend on which data have been combined and on the parameterization of the equation of state. Figure 4.5 compares the constraints obtained by combining the observations from the microwave backgroud (WMAP) , galaxy catalogues (SDSS), the supernovre, and from the Lyman-a forest in various ways. It is currently conventional to call dark energy the component responsible for the acceleration of the Universe. This d ark energy could be a cosmological constant but other candidates also exist (see Chapter 12 for a more detailed discussion). The majority of these candidates have a dynamical equation of state. The constraints on the equation of state of the dark energy change very rapidly with the flow of new observations. Let us cite, for instance, a constraint [12] on a parameterization of t he form W= Wo + waz/(l + z); it leads to +0.193 Wo = - O.981 -0. 193'
wa
=
0.83 O. 05 +-0.6 5'
(4.5)
186
The standard Big-Bang model - 0.2,-------- - - - - - - , _
D D - 0.4
WMAP + gal + SN WMAP + gal + bias + Lyman - a \VMAP + gal + SN + bias + Lyman - a
- 0.8
-1.0
- 1.2
- 1.4
-1.6 ~~--~--~~--~--~--L-~--~
0.6
0.20
0.24
0.28
0.32
0.36
Fig. 4.5 (left): Constraints on a const ant equation of state of dark energy as a functio 12mo for a fiat Universe. Adapted from Ref. [9J. (right) : Same thing by combining various of observa tion (contours at 68% and 95%) , cosmological microwave background (WMA galaxies (SDSS) , supernOV ffi and Lyman-a forest , in different ways. Adapted from Ref.
at 1 a . The determination of the nature of this dark energy is one of the impor challenges of modern cosmology and will be discussed in the final chapters of book. 4.1.3
The age of the Universe
A constraint on the cosmological parameters can also be obtained from the meas ments of the age of t he Universe. A lower bound on this age can then be set that sh be compatible with t he dynamical age of the Universe computed from the Friedm equations. Dat a from supernovce imply that the dynamical age of t he Universe f flat ACDM model is I
t = 14.9+ 14 ( - ' o - l.l 0.63
)-1
X
10 9 years
h
'
to = 14.2! 6g ( 0.63
)-1 X
109 years ( '
using data, respectively, from SCP [9] and HZT [10].
4.1.3.1
A ges in the Milky Way
The oldest obj ects in the Milky Way are low metallicity 2 stars and are locate the halo of the Milky Way. T here are three methods to determine the age of t stars [13].
1. Nuc1eochronology: conceptually, this is t he simplest method , analogous to radi t ive dating methods, and it represents the most direct way to date the Unive
2By m etallicity, we mean here t he content in chemica l elements beyond helium-4 . The ra tio [F traces t his met a liicity.
The Hubble diagram and the age of the Universe
187
tu . The age of the stars is estimated from the abundance of long-lived radioactive
nuclei for which a half-life is known (for details , see Ref. [14]). The radioisotope 23 2Th (thorium) with half-life of 14 million years has been used to date t he age of the stars of the Galaxy (in particular t he star CS 22892) but its abundance is only halved on a period equal to the age of the Universe. In principle, 238U is a better indicator since its half-life is 4.5 million years . The abundance of this isotope was derived by observing the star CS31082-001 8 [15], 10g(U /H) = - 13. 7 ± 0.14, which corresponds to an age of (12.5 ±3) x 10 9 years . 2. Cooling of white dwarfs: white dwarfs are t he terminal stage of the evolution of stars with mass smaller t han around 8M0 . As t hey get old, white dwarfs get cooler and dimmer. Using a model of their cooling, their cooling rate, and thus the age of t he Universe, can be calculated. Unfortunately, since they are not very bright , white dwarfs are very difficult to observe so that the studies are reduced to white dwarfs in the neighbourhood of the Solar System and enable us to estimate the age of the local disk to approximatively 9.8 ::: 6:~ x 109 years. 3. Main sequence: theoretical models of stellar evolution make it possible to understand the posit ion of a star in the temperat ure~lumino sity plane. During the main sequence, which corresponds to the longest part of their life, stars burn their hydrogen to produce helium. At the end of t his period, the luminosity of the star increases and its surface temperature decreases. It can be shown that t he luminosity of the stars at this transit ion of t he main sequence is the quant ity least sensitive to errors in the t heoretical models and can be used to determine the age of globular clusters up to precision of 7~ 10 % . One should also determine the distance of the cluster that limits the precision of the method (an error of 10% on the distance translates into an error of 20% on the age!). Thanks to the satellite Hipparcos a better calibration of the local distance scale was possible. The age of globular clusters is roughly is the r ange (11 - 14) x 109 years.
Table 4 .3 Summary of the main constraints on t he age of the Universe. Age (109years)
Method
Reference
15.2 ±3 .7
nucleochronology (star CS 22892)
Sneden et al. ( 1996)
12.5 ±3
nucleochronology (star CS 31082-0018)
Cayrel et al. (2001)
11. 5±1.3
5 methods (glob ular clusters)
1l.8 ± 1.2
main sequence (globula r clusters)
14 ± 1.2 13.7 ± 0.2
+ binary) + la rge-scale structure
main sequence (globu lar clusters WMAP
C h ab oyer et al. ( 1998) Gratton et al. (1997) Pont et al. (1998) Spergel et al. (2003)
4.1 .3.2 Age of the Universe To conclude, the minimum age of our Universe can be estimated by specifying the ages of the oldest object s in our Galaxy. To obtain the age of t he Universe, the t ime taken to form these objects should also be estimated. Unfortunately there is no robust theory
188
The standard Big-Bang model
for the beginning of stellar-formation processes. The beginning of star formati estimated at z rv 5 - 20, which corresponds to a period of (0.1 - 2) x 10 9 years. allows us to conclude (see Table 4.3) that 9.6 < 9 tu S; 15.4. - 10 years
4.1.3.3
Compatibility between the Hubble constant and the age of the Univers
Having measured the Hubble constant, the dynamical age of the Universe ca obtained from (3.66) which only depends on the cosmological parameters Dmo DAO (the duration of the radiation era being negligible). To understand if the constraints on the Hubble constant and on the measurem of the age of the Universe are compatible, we first present a comparison between from supernovre and the theoretical computation of the dynamical age of the Uni (Fig. 4.6). We t hen compare Hotu with Hoto(Dmo, DAO ), assuming that Ho and t known up to 10%. These measurements are consistent if the cosmological constant not vanish , as independently indicated by the results from supernovre. An E inste Sitter Universe is marginally excluded (up to 1.50-) by these measurements.
4.2
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
The previous sections have convinced us t hat the Universe is expanding. Since radi scales as a- 4 while pressureless matter scales as a- 3 , the Universe was dominate radiation in the past for redshifts larger than
obtained by equating the matter and radiation energy densities and where 8 TCMB/2.725K [see (4.137) below]. Since t he temperature scales as (l+ z ), the tem ature at which the matter and radiation densities were equal is Teq = TCMB(l + which is of order
Above this energy, the matter content of the Universe is in a very different form that of today. In particular, when the temperature T becomes larger t han twic rest mass m of a charged particle, the energy of a photon is large enough to pro particle- antiparticle pairs. Thus, when T » m e, both electrons and positrons present in the Universe, so that the particle content of the Universe changes d its evolution, while it cools down. Here, we describe this phase and first fo cus on the particle distribution in librium and then on some out-of-equilibrium processes leading, for instance, t production of thermal relics. 4.2.1
Equilibrium thermodynamics
For a description of thermodynamics in the relativistic context and in cosmology can refer to Refs. [16- 18] .
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
h
=
0.7 , tu
=
189
12.10 9 yrs
2.0
1.5 + 20 - + 10
1.0
- -10 . - -20
0.5 +--+------~~------~~--rQ~h-=~O---+--(h = 0.5 , tu = 12.10 9 yrs) 0.0
l..---'1..._ _- ' - -_ _L..----'-_ _-'------"'-----'-_ _...L..----'_ _....IL----'
o
1
Fig. 4.6 Comparison bet ween t he constraints on the product of the Hubble const ant and the age of the Universe, H ot u , and the product of the Hubble const ant and the dynamical age of the Universe, H oto. The latt er depends on the cosmological paramet ers. We have fixed h = 0.7 and tu = 12 X 109 years. T he dark curve represents a flat Universe (D mo + DM = 1) in which case the abscissa is D hO . T he light curve is for a Universe wit h no cosmological const ant (OAO = 0), for which the abscissa is then D ruo. T he grey regions indicat e t he areas at 1 and 20" for Hotu and the plain horizontal line is the case where h = 0. 5. The circle corresponds to an Einst ein- de Sitter Universe for which H otu = 2/3. From Ref. [6]. 4.2.1.1
Dis tribu tion fun ctions and thermody namical quantities
To describe physical processes during t he radiation-dom inated era, the distribution function f i (P , T ) of the p a rticles present in the Universe should be d etermined.
Distribution functions P art icle interactions are mainly cha r acterized by a r eaction rate f . If t his rea ction rate is much lar ger tha n the Hubble expa nsion r a t e, then it can m a intain these pa rticles in thermodyn amic equilibrium a t a temper ature T. P articles can thus b e treated as perfect Fermi- Dirac a nd B ose- E instein gases with distribut ion 3
(4.10)
3The distri but ion function dep ends a priori on (x , t) and (p , E ) b ut the homogeneity hypothesis implies t hat it does not dep end on x a nd isotropy implies that it is a function of p2 = p 2. Thus , it follows from t he cosm ological principle tha t f (x , t, p , E) = f eE , t) = f [E, T (t )] .
190
The standard Big-Bang model
where 9i is the degeneracy factor, /-Li is the chemical potential and E2 = p2 + m 2 . T normalization of Ii is such that Ii = 1 for the maximum phase-space density allow by the Pauli principle for a fermion. Ti is the temperature associated with the giv species and, by symmetry, it is a function of t alone, Ti (t). Interacting species have same temperature. Among these particles, the Universe contains an electrodynam radiation with blackbody spectrum [see Section 4.4] at a temperature of 2.725 K tod Any species interacting with photons will hence have the same temperature as th photons as long as r i » H. The photon t emperature T-y = T will thus be called temperature of the Universe.
If the cross-section behaves as (J rv En rv Tn (for instance, 11, = 2 for electrowe interactions) then the reaction rate behaves as r rv n(J rv T n +3 ; the Hubble const behaves as H rv T2 in the radiation period. Thus, if 11, + 1 > 0, there will always a temperature below which the interaction decouples while the Universe cools dow The interaction is then no longer efficient; it is said to be frozen , and can no lon keep the equilibrium of the given species with the other components. This prope is at the origin of the thermal history of the Universe and of the existence of rel This mechanism, during which an interaction can no longer maintain the equilibri between various particles because of the cosmic expansion , is called decoupling. particle will be said to be coupled if r ~ H and decoupled if r H. This crite of comparing the reaction rate and the rate H is simple; it often gives a corr order of magnitude , but a more detailed description of the decoupling should be ba on a microscopic study of the evolution of the distribution function. As a concr example, consider Compton scattering. Its reaction rate, rCompton = ne(JTC, is of or 3 rCompton rv 1.4 X 10- Ho today, which means that, statistically, only one pho in 700 interacts with an electron in a Hubble time today. However, at a redsh z rv 10 3 , the electron density is 10 3 times larger and the Hubble expansion rate is order H rv HoJOmo(l + z)3 rv 2 x 104Ho so that r Compton rv 80H. This means th statistically at a redshift z rv 103 a photon interacts with an electron about 80 tim in a Hubble time. This illustrates that backward in time densities and temperatu increase and inter actions become more and more important. Note that if the thermal equilibrium can be maintained by interactions withi cosmic plasma, by causality, these interactions cannot establish such an equilibri between two causally disconnected regions that would have different initial tempe tures. The hypothesis of the homogeneity of space implies that the Universe is assum to be initially in thermal equilibrium. The justification of this state will be discus in Chapter 8.
:s
Thermodynamical quantities
The distribution function (4.10) can be used to define macroscopic quantities su as the particle number density, 11" energy density, p and pressure, P, for each spec 'i' , as 4
4Since E2 - m 2 41TV E2 - m 2 EdE.
p2 implies that pdp
EdE a nd, b ecause of isotropy, d 3 p = 41Tp 2 dp
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
191
(4.11) (4.12) (4.13) These three quantities can be expressed in terms of the integrals I (m,n) ( i
.
.)
=
X t , Yt -
1
00
Xi
m( U 2
2)n/2 d U exp [U(- )Yi] ± 1 '
U
-
Xi
(4.14)
with Yi
!-Li ==, T
(4.15)
as (4.1 6) Table 4.4 summarizes the expression of these quantities within various limits for fermions (F) and bosons (B), where ((3) ~ 1.202 is the value of the Riemann zeta function at 3.
Table 4.4 Summary of the main limits of the thermodynamical quantities (4.11)- (4. 13) for fermions (F) and bosons (B). particles
Limit
p
n
P
B
g«((3) /1r 2 )T3
(1r2/3 0 )gT4
p/3
F
(711"2/8
p/3
F
g(3(3) /41r 2 )T3 gJ.L3 / 61r 2
T»m,J.L < - T
B,F
(g /1r 2 )el"/TT 3
gJ.L3/81r 2 (3g/1r 2 )el"/TT4
T«m
B ,F
g(mT / 21r)3 /2 eCI"-=) /T
(m +3T/2)n
T »m, J.L J.L » T »m
X
30)gT 4
p/3 p/3 nT
4.2.1.2 Number of relativistic degrees of freedom The radiation density at a given temperature T can be computed from these expressions (see Table 4.4) (4.17) 9. represents the effective number of relativistic degrees of freedom at this t emperature ,
g.(T)
=
L i=bosons
Ti ) 4 7 gi ( T +8
L i=fermions
gi
(Ti)4 T
(4.18)
192
The standard Big-Bang model
The factor 718 arises from the difference between the Fermi and Bose distributio In this regime, the matter content is dominated by radiation and the curvatur negligible, so that the Friedmann equation is of the form 2
(7r30 )
H2 = 87rG N 3
g.
T4.
(4.
Numerically, this amounts to H(T)
1/2
rv
T2
= 1.66g. lVI'
(4.
p
or equivalently,
t(T)
~ 0 .g. 3 -1/2 Mp T2
-
obtained by integrating H = 4.2.1 .3
rv
2 42 .
- 1/2
g.
(_T_) 1 MeV
-2
s,
(4 .
- TIT.
Chemical potential and particle- antiparticle aBymmetry
Inelastic scattering processes such as Brehmsstrahlung e + p f----+ e + p + 'Y im that the number of photons is not conserved and thus t heir chemical potential sho vanish (4. /L, = O.
This implies that photons must have a Planck distribution. Any particle, A, kept in chemical equilibrium with its antiparticle by a reaction the form A + A f----+ 'Y + 'Y must then satisfy the constraint /LA
+ /LA = O.
(4.
As long as T» mA , using (4.11) , this implies an asymmetry nA _ nA
~ g;~3 [7r 2(~) + (~) 3]
between particles and antiparticles. At lower temperatures (T is exponentially suppressed nA - nA
~ 2g A (m;:) 3/2 e-
mA
/
T
sinh
«
(4.
mA) this asymme
C"J; ).
(4.
When T becomes smaller than mA , A and A annihilate and only this small exc survives. This is, for instance, the case for the electrons. Note t hat the electrical neutrality of the Universe implies that the number protons np is equal to n e -ne . Using the constraint npln, rv 5 X 10- 10 [see Section (4.142)]' we obtain n 9 7r 2 I/. --..E. rv ---'=---~ rv 10- 8 (4. n, g, 6((3) T ' so that 1.34/Le1T rv 6.5 can thus be neglected .
X
10-
10
.
The chemical potential of the electrons and positr
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
4.2.1.4
193
Entropy
In order to follow t he evolut ion of the processes, it is convenient to have conserved quantities such as the entropy. Combining t he conservation equation (3.27) , rewritten in the form d(pa 3) = - Pda 3 , and the derivative of the pressure (4.13) with respect to the t emperature,
we get that t he quantity 5 p + P - np, (4.27) T satisfies 6 the equation d (sa 3 ) = -(p, / T)d(na 3). Thus, the product sa 3 is constant (i) as long as matter is neit her destroyed nor created , since t hen na 3 is constant , or (ii) for non-degenerate relativistic matter , p,/ T « 1. We thus deduce that in the cases relevant for cosmology, (4.28)
s ==
'------=-----''---
To interpret this quantity, let us consider t he expression (4.27) which implies t hat Td( sa 3) c::: d (pa 3 ) + Pda 3 , in t he limit p,/ T « 1. We recognise S = sa 3 as the entropy and thus s is the entropy density. Hence, (4.28) implies that s ex: a- 3 as long as p,fT « 1. T hen, using (4.27), the entropy can be expressed as (4.29) where q* is defined by q. (T) =
L
L
Ti ) 3 7 gi ( T + "8
i = bosons
gi
(Ti T
)3
(4.30)
i= ferm io ns
If all relativistic particles are at the same temperature, Ti = T, then q. = g•. Note also that s = q*7T 4 / 45((3)n, ~ 1.8q.n" so that the photon number density gives a measure of the entropy. SIn the case of a vanis hing chemical potential, th is expression can b e easily derived by starting from the general expression of t he entropy of a system as TdS = dE + Pdll. If we choose T and V as our variables to describ e the thermodynamical state of the system t hen, since they a re intensive quantit ies, P and p are functi ons of T alone; p(T) a nd P(T). It foll ows that dE = d(pll) = pdll + lI(dp/dT) dT. Thus,
+ ~ dp dT. T TdT We deduce that (8S/8V)T = (p + P) /T a nd (8S/8T)v = (1// T )(dp/ dT ). T he integra bility condit ion then implies that dp /dT = (p + P )/T. Plugging these expressions in dS we deduce that d S = P + P dll
dS = d
[ ~(p + P)]
,
from wh ich we get the expression of the entropy up to a n addit ive constant . 6S tarting from TdS = dE + Pdll - /-LdN and us ing t h at 11 ex a 3 , so t hat E ex pa3 , and Sex sa 3 we deduce that Td( sa 3 ) = d (pa 3 ) + Pda 3 - /-Ld (na 3 ). Tak ing into account that the first two terms of the r.h.s. cancel, we deduce t he evolutio n equation of sa 3 .
194
The standard Big-Bang model
The number of particles in a given volume, N ex na 3 , is constant if no matt created or annihilated. The relation (4.28) thus implies that
y= ~ s
(4
represents the number of particles per co moving volume. For relativistic particles, quantity remains constant during the evolution. It can be easily computed in limiting cases
(4
(4
4.2.1.5
Decoupled species
If at a given time , the interaction rate is no longer high enough to maintain thermodynamic equilibrium of the species i, i. e. if f i ;S H , then this species evo independently from the others . If this species was in thermodynamic equilibrium be decoupling, then its distribution function at the time of decoupling, tD , is 1
f i(P, tD)
=
exp [(E - f.L i)/Ti(tD)]
(4
±1
After decoupling, particles propagate freely and the form of the distribution functio conserved. Only the momentum is redshifted by the expansion as p(t) = p(tD)aD/ It follows that the distribution function at any t > tD is given by
f i(P, t)
a(t) ] fi [ aD p, tD .
=
(4
Thus, if a species was in thermodynamic equilibrium at a given time in the histor the Universe , one can determine its distribution at any time. If the decoupling occurred when the particle was relativistic, (T » m , f.L), then distribution function (4.35) takes the simple form 1
(4
fi(P, t > tD) = exp [E/Ti(t) ] ± l '
where TD = T(tD). The temperature of this decoupled species always decrease a - 1 and its entropy Si is conserved separately. If this particle becomes non-relativ after t NR » tD , we have E(t) c::::: m for any t > t NR but the distribution function k the form (4.36). If the decoupling occurred when the particle was non-relativistic (T « m) , E c::::: m + p2/2m and the distribution function is given by
f ,(p , t > tD) o
= e-(m - I-' )/T De -
p 2 /2mTi
(t) ,
T (t) i
=
T
D
[aD] 2 a(t)
(4
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
195
Thus, everything goes as if the particles had an effective chemical potential , J.-l( t) m+ [J.-lD - mJT(t) / To. We then obtain ni
4.2.1.6
~
gi
(
mTO -)
3/ 2
271"
(a--O)3e - m / To . a
(4.38)
Temperat ures and their evolution
Temperature of the Universe Since the total entropy is constant, q. (T)T3a 3 remains constant during the evolution of the Universe . If, moreover , a species i decouples from the cosmic plasma at temperature To then the entropy of this species is conserved on its own so that and
S,
=
271"2
3 3
-q·(T)T a 45 ' "
(4 .39)
are both constant. The entropy, S - Si = (271"2/45 )q, (T)T 3 a 3 , of the particles in thermal equilibrium with the photons, is t hus also constant. We thus conclude that the temperature of the Universe varies as (4.40) where q, is given by the relation (4.30) but only summing over the relativistic particles that are in thermal equilibrium with the photons. Temperature of a decoupled species As long as the number of relativistic species does not vary, the temperature decreases as a - I . When a species becomes non-relativistic, its entropy is transferred to the other relativistic pa rticles remaining in thermal equilibrium and therefore see their temperature suddenly increase (q. is a decreasing quantity) as
T(+) =
[q,(_)] q, (+)
1/3
T( - ),
(4.41 )
where + and - refer, respectively, to quantities evaluated after and before the decoupIing. At the time of decoupling T = Ti = To so that comparing the quantities (4.39) at temperatures To and T < To, we get that the temperature of the decoupled species is related to that of the Universe by (4.42) This expression generalizes (4.36) to the case where qi(T) is not constant. In particular, qi(T) can vary if the species i has a new interaction allowing it to annihilate to produce another particle that does not interact with the cosmic plasma.
196
The standard Big-Bang model
4.2.1.7 Neutrinos as an example
Neutrinos are in equilibrium with the cosmic plasma as long as the reactions v + D + e + e and v + e +----> v + e can keep them coupled. Since neutrinos are not charg they do not interact directly with photons. The cross-section of weak interactions is given by u rv E2 ex: T2 as long the energy of the neutrinos is in the range m e « E « mw. The interaction rate thus of the order of r = n(uv) c:::: G;T5 . We obtain that
G;
r
c::::
G;
(_T_) H
(4.
3
1 MeV
'
where we have used (4.20). Thus, close to To rv 1 MeV, neutrinos decouple from cosmic plasma. For T < To , the neutrino temperature decreases as Tv ex: a- 1 a remains equal to the photon temperature. Slightly after decoupling, the temperature becomes smaller than me . Between and T = m e there are 4 fermionic states (e -, e+, each having ge = 2) and 2 boso states (photons with g-y = 2) in thermal equilibrium with the photons. We thus h that 7 11 (4. q-y (T > me) = 8 X 2 X 2 + 2 = 2· For T < m e only the photons contribute to q-y and hence
q-y (T < me) The conservation of entropy implies that after the neutrinos and the photons are related by
(4.
= 2.
e-
e annihilation, the temperatures
_ (11) 4 1/3 Tv.
(4.
T-y -
Thus, the temperature of the Universe is increased by about 40% compared to neutrino temperature during the annihilation. Since nv = (3/11)n-y, there must ex a cosmic background of neutrinos with a density of 112 neutrinos per cubic centime and per family, with a temperature of around 1.95 K. The energy density of th neutrinos, as long as they are relativistic, is Ov = (7/ 8) (4/11 )4/ 30-y per family neutrino. Using the value (4.141) of O-yo, we conclude that today r. 2 HvO h =
1.68
X
10 -5
(Nv) :3 84 -
(4.
2.7'
if their mass is smaller than 10- 4 eV.
4.2.1.8
Number of relativistic degrees of freedom
The e - e annihilation is the last annihilation to happen , so that knowing Tv / T-y gi the values of g. and q. today 7
g.o = 2 + 3 x - x 2 x
8
( 4 ) 4/ 3 -
11
= 3.36,
if there are 3 families of massless neutrinos.
q.o = 2+3 x
~ x 2x
C
4 1) = 3.91 (4.
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
197
The functions q* (T) and g* (T) depend on the particle content of our Universe. As an example, Table 4.5 and Fig. 4.7 summarize their evolution in the context of the standard model of particle physics, discussed in Chapter 2.
Table 4.5 Particle content of the Universe as a function of the t emperature in the context of the standard model of particle physics. ~ 150-400 MeV characterizes the quark- hadron phase transition, which is assumed to be adiabatic. The thermodynamic history of this transition is not yet well understood. This table also assumes that the Higgs boson has a mass larger than the mass of the W ±, ZO bosons and of the top quark (t). The last three lines of this table are not certain since the Higgs sector and the electroweak transition are not well understood. At larger temperatures, 9* depends greatly on the theoretical model for the fundam ental interactions. For instance, for a minimal SU(5) grand unification model, 9* (T > TG UT ) = 647/4 and in the case of the minimal supersymmetric model, 9*(T < Tsusy) = 915/4 since the number of degrees of freedom is almost doubled.
T:r
Threshold (GeV)
T
< me
0 .511
X
10 -
Relativistic particles
"( (+
3
g*
2
+ e±
11/2
TD(V) - ml-'
0.106
v start to interact
43/4
mJ-L - mW
0.135
+ J.L ±
57/4
+ rr±, rro
69/4
m e - TD(V)
(2 - 4)
X
mrr - T:!h
T2h -
ms
0.194
10-
3
,,(, 3v's, e±, J.L± U, d ,
U,
ms - me
1.27 ± 0.05
+ s,
d, 8
S
205/4
g 's
247/4
mC-mT
1.78
+ c, c
289/4
m T - mb
4.25 ±0.1O
303/4
mb-mW
80.3 ±0.3
mW-mt
180 ± 12
+ T± + b, b + W±, ZO +
t, t
423/4
+ HO
427/4
mt - mHO mHO -
4.2.2
3 decoupled v)
T;:w
300 (7)
345/4 381/4
Out-of-equilibrium thermodynamics
The evolution of a decoupled species can thus easily be described . However, the description of the decoupling , or of a freeze-out of an interaction, is a more complex problem that requires us to go beyond the equilibrium description that has been developed previously.
198
The standard Big-Bang model
q
1
10-5
10--4
10- 3
10- 2
10-1
1
T (GeV)
Fig. 4 .7 Evolution of the functions 9. and q. as a function of the temperature in the s dard model of p article physics SU(3)c x SU(2)L x U(l)y with two hypotheses concerning critical temperature of the quark~hadron transition, Tcqh .
4.2.2.1
Boltzmann equation
Evolution of the distribution function
The evolution of the distribution function is obtained from the Boltzmann equat
L[jl = C[f]'
( 4.
where C describes the collisions and L = d/ds is the Liouville operator, with s length along a worldline. The operator L is a function of eight variables taking explicit form
a - r'"{3-yP{3P-y ap"" a L[fl -- P'" ax'" In a homogeneous and isotropic space-time, time, f(E , t) , so that
f
L [f l = E af _ H
at
( 4.
is only a function of the energy 2
af . aE
(4.
p Using the definition (4.11) of the particle density, and integrating this equation w respect to the momentum p , we obtain 7 71n order to evaluate the second term of (4.5 1), we use that
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
199
( 4.52) The difficult part lies in the modelling and the evaluation of the collision term . Here, we restrain ourselves to the simple case of an interaction of the form i+j ~ k+l,
for which the collision term can be decomposed as Ci
(4.53)
= Ckl ->ij
- Cij -> kl
with
(4.54) with a + sign for bosons and a - sign for fermions. IMlij->kl are the matrix elements describing the interaction. The Dirac delta function imposes the conservation of momentum and of energy. This form also shows that the probability for i to disappear is proportional to fdj , i.e. roughly to the density of the interacting species. 8 The factors (1 ± fk) arise from quantum mechanics and are related to the Pauli exclusion principle for fermions a nd to stimulated emission for bosons. If CP invariance holds, as we assume here , then Ckl->ij and Cij->kl involve a unique matrix element, 1M 12 , determined by the physical process. Indeed , this invariance implies t hat the process we consider is reversible and thus that i + j -+ k + I a nd k +1-4 i + j have the same matrix elements. It follows that
(4.55) Equation (4.52) thus involves three sources of evolution for the number density ni, namely dilution (3H ni), creation (C i = Ckl ->ij ) and destruction (C i = Cij->kl). Evolution of the particle density In cosmologically interesting situations, E - p, » T. Quantum effects can thus be neglected and 1 ± f c::: 1. Equation (4 .52) then takes the form
J
afd 3 p = -3 -p2 E aE
J
fd 3 p
by integrating by parts.
8For this reason , we may decompose C ij -> kl as Cij->kl = n i njCij->kl. Since Cij_kl has dimensions of a volume divided by a time , we can interpret it as the average cross-section multiplied by the relative speed of the interacting particles, that is C ij->k l = (aij_kIVij) . If we define the reaction rate by rij~kl = nj ( a ij _ kl Vij) then (4.52) takes the form
200
The standard Big-Bang model
(4
In this limit, the distribution functions are of the form f ex exp[(/1 - E)IT ] so the particle density (4. 11) can be expressed as a function of that at /1 = 0 as
(4 Furthermore, t he conservation of energy implies t hat Ek term !kfl - fdj takes the form
+ El = Ei + E j
such t hat
The Boltzmann equation (4.56) can t hus be written as
nn ) n + 3Hn = -(uv ) ( n·n· t J - ~nknl _ _ nknl 1.
1.
,
(4
where (uv) is defined as
(4
This equation is very general, but to go further we should know the form of the ma element IM I. We simply note t hat when nj (uv) » H , we recover t he fact that (4 can only be satisfied if the term in brackets cancels, i.e. if
(4
The system is then in chemical equilibrium. This equality is broken as soon as system is out of equilibrium.
4.2.2.2 Frozen interactions and relic particles
A massive particle X is in thermodynamic equilibrium with its antiparticle X temperatures larger than its mass. Assuming this particle is stable, then its den can only be modified by annihilation or inverse annihilation
If this particle had remained in t hermodynamic equilibrium until today, its density, n ex (mIT)3/2 exp( - miT) would be completely negligible. The relic den of t his massive particle, i. e. the residual density once the annihilation is no lo efficient , will actually be more important since, in an expanding space, annihila cannot keep particles in equilibrium during the whole history of the Universe. T particle is usually called a relic.
Thermodynamics in an expanding Universe
201
To evaluate the factor (Jxfx - fLfr) , note that land [ are in thermal equilibrium so that , after neglecting their chemical potentials, fL = exp( - EI I T) and fr = exp ( -ErIT). Conservation of energy imposes Ex + Ex = El + Er, so that
fdr = exp ( -
- E x+ Ex) T = fxix·
The Boltzmann (4.58) now t akes the simplified (integrated) form
+ 3Hnx =
nx
- (O"v) (n~ - n~) ,
(4.61 )
where (O"v ) is defined by (4.59). The conservation of entropy implies that nx + 3Hnx = sYx , where Yx = nx I sis the number of X particles per co moving volume, so that (4.61 ) can be written as (4.62 ) Y.x = -(O"V)s (Y x2 - Y-2) x . Using the variable x [see (4.15) for its definition] and the fact that dx /dt equation can be rewritten as
x = - (O"V)s (2 Y - Y-x2) . dx Hx x
-dY
= Hx, this (4.63)
During the radiation era, H ex: x - 2 , so tha t introducing ~ == Yx - Yx , and expressing H and s, respectively, by (4.19 ) and (4.29) , it t akes the final form
d~ dx
-
dYx
=- - - - AX
dx
with A = (O"V)
- 2
~
(
- ) ~+2Yx ,
rrr ~*/ 2mMp. V45 g*
To go further , we need the form of (O"v) and the value of mechanism in the next section. 4.2.3
4.2.3.1
(4.64)
(4.65)
Yx- We illustrate this
Two limiting cases
Cold relics
For a cold relic, the decoupling occurs when the particle is non relativistic. Using our previous results to express nx [(4 .11)] and s [(4.29)]' we get that
Y- x -_ -45ji9X - - x 3/ 2 e - x . 27r4 8 q*
(4.66)
The quantit ies (O"v ) and A depend a priori on the velocity. In general, (O"v) ex: v 2 n with n = 0 (annihilation of s waves) or n = 1 (annihilation of p waves). This quantity can be parameterized in a gener al way as
(O"V) = O"of( x) ,
(4.67)
where f (x) is a function of m i T only since (v 2 ) ex: T. Equation (4.64) can be integrated numerically, but the main properties of its solutions can be obtained analytically.
202
The standard Big-Bang model
Before decoupling, (1 < x « xd , Y x rv Yx and .6. and its derivative remain v small. Thus, (4.64) has the approximate solution .6.
2
rv _
Since d In Yx / dx
-
1_ _ x_ d In Yx 2>'0 f(x) dx '
_
= - 1 + 3/ 2x
(4.6
»
1, we get that before decou pling
1
x2
-1 for x
rv
.6.
rv
(4.6
__
- 2>'0 f(x)·
After decoupling (x » xd, Yx decreases exponentially and becomes negligible comparison to Y rv .6.. Equation (4.64) then takes the form .6. 2
d.6.
-
= - >'0---2
dx
Integrating this equation between .6. -1
f(x)x
and x =
Xf
_
00
.6. f
>. 0
1 =
00,
1
f(x) dx 2·
>'0
Xf
f(x)
(4.7
X
[ 1 7 ]-1 00
Yoo c:::
we get
00
Xf
It follows that
(4.7 ·
(4.7
dx
Xf should now be determined. The decoupling happens when Y x differs significan from Y x , i.e. when .6.(xd = cYx(xd, c being a number of order unity that can determined by comparison with a numerical integration . By estimating .6.(xd with value (4.69), Xf is the solution of
(4.7 A similar expression is obtained using the criteria f(xd
= H(xr), which gives
(4.7
From today's entropy density [see (4.140)], we can deduce the relic density of t particle X, nxo = sOYoo
(4.7
Thermodynamics in an ex panding Universe
203
To give an estimate of t his relic density, let us assume that f(x) = x- n and that q*(xf) ~ g*( xt) . Since px o = mnxo and Dx = Px / Pcrit , we get
D
xo
h 2 ~ 0.31 g* [
(
-1 / 2
(n
Xf )]
100
1
+ 1) xn+1 f
( q*o ) 8 3 (
3.91
2. 7
ao
10 - 38 cm2
)-
(4.76)
Since X f depends only weakly on the mass , these expressions give a good estimate of the relic density as a function of the particle 's mass and cross-section. Figure 4.8 depicts the numerical integration of t he Boltzmann equation (4.64). We recover both asymptotic regimes discussed in this section. 1 10- 2 ~
.~ I: '"
10-4
Q)
"Cl
....
Q)
10- 6 increasing
.D
E ;:l to:
'OJ)
~
10- 8
to:
.;;:
~
0
E 0
y"
- - --
U
~
---
10-1 2
10- 14 10 1
1
103
10 2 Time
miT
-+
Fig. 4.8 Numerical integra tion of (4.64). We recover b oth asymptotic regimes a nd the d ependence in (cyv ) of the relic density Yx.
4.2.3.2 Ho t relics
A hot relic decouples from the plasma while it is relativistic, so t hat
(4.77) where cFB = 1 (boson) or 3/4 (fermion). The interaction is no longer efficient when Yx is constant , so t hat the relic density is simply given by its value at equilibrium
Ycxo =
-
Yx(xr)
45((3)
gx
= -2 4 CFB-(-). 7f
q*
Xf
(4. 78)
204
The standard Big-Bang model
If the evolution of the Universe remains adiabatic after this transition then nXO
=
SOYoo
q.o ) CFBgx 8 - - (-) 3.9 1 q. Xf
= 776.8 ( - -
3 2.7
cm
-3
.
(4
If this particle is still relativistic today, then it behaves as the massless neutrino cussed in Section 4.2.1.6. If its mass is greater than the temperature of the cur cosmic background, i.e. m > 1.7 x 10- 4 eV, then the associated energy densi pxo = mxsoYoo, so that using (4.140) , its density is 2 ( q.o ) ( mx ) cFBgx nxoh = mxsoYoo = 0.739 3.91 10 eV q.(xd·
(4
The constraint n x h 2 < 1 implies that m < 13.5q.(xd/cFBgx eV. The precise v of this constraint depends on the value of q. at decoupling. For instance, for slightly massive neutrinos, or for particles with a small mass decouple at around 1 MeV, q. (xd = 10.75, and we get
n
xo
h2
_ mx -91.5 eV '
(4
which gives a constraint on the particle mass. The relic density is inversely proporti to q. (xd. A relic will thus be less abundant if it decouples early. For instance, if particle decouples at around 300 GeV then q.(xd cv 107, so that
n
xo
h2 =
mx 910eV'
(4
So, a particle decoupling while q.(xd » 1 will have a very small relic abundance t emperature compared to the photons of the cosmic background. These are usu called warm relics.
4.3
Primordial nucleosynthesis
For temperatures above or of the order of 100 MeV, the Universe is dominated relativistic particles in equilibrium: electrons, positrons, neutrinos and photons , the nuclear reactions can be activated. The contribution from neutrons and prot which are then non-relativistic, is negligible in the mass budget. The weak interact between neutrons, protons and leptons, Ve
+n
f---+
p
+ e,
(4
and the interactions between electrons and positrons,
(4
maintain all these particles , together with non-relativistic baryons, in thermodyna cal equilibrium.
Primordial nucleosynthesis
4.3.1
205
Main stages o f the mechanism
The synopsis of primordial nucleosynthesis (usually referred to as Big-Bang nucleosynthesis, BBN) can be decomposed into three main stages:
(1) T» 1 MeV, the components of the Universe are in thermodynamic equilibrium. Radiation dominates the Universe and 9* = 10.75. Thus, the neutron to proton ratio is approximatively given by its value at equilibrium
Q=
mn - mp = 1.293 MeV. The fraction of each atomic nucleus can then be obtained from purely thermodynamical considerations.
(2) T rv 1 - 0.7 Me V , weak interactions can no longer maintain the equilibrium. Neutrinos decouple and the nip ratio deviates from its equilibrium value. At the freeze-out temperature, Tf rv 0.8 MeV , it is of the order of 1 rv
-
5 Free neutrons then decay into protons while atomic nuclei remain in thermodynamic equilibrium. In terms of time, this stage starts roughly round t rv 1 s [see
(4.21)J. (3) T
rv 0.7 0.05 MeV, the nuclear thermodynamic equilibrium can no longer be maintained. Electrons and positrons have annihilated each other and reheated the photon bath. 9* is then 3.36 . The atomic nuclei are then formed by a series of two-body reactions. For that , deuterium needs to be synthesized (p+n --7 D +,,(), which is possible only when the radiation density is low enough so that the inverse reaction , the photodissociation of deuterium , is negligible. This determines the temperature TNuc obtained by no/n"{ rv 1, i.e.
T) 2
exp
(ED) ---
rv
1.
TNuc
Around T Nuc , (n/p)Nuc = (n/p)f exp( - t Nuc/Tn) rv 1/ 7. All neutrons are then bound in helium-4 nuclei, with abundance (in mass with respect to the total number of nucleons, nb = n + p) of the order of
2(~)NUC
1+ -n) ( P
rv
0.25,
Nuc
because the number density of helium-4 is n/2 so that it accounts for a mass 4 x n/2 = 2n in nuclear units. The increase of the Coulomb barrier for nuclei of larger atomic mass together with the drop in the temperature and density (and hence in the probability of two- body reactions) associated with the absence of stable atomic
206
The standard Big-Bang model
nuclei of m ass A = 5 and A = 8 explain why primordial nucleosynthesis does p roduce any nuclei b eyond helium in a ny significant amount . BBN roughly st when T ~ 0.05 MeV , which corresponds to t ~ 530 s [see (4.21) ]. Key parameters
In this mechanism , departure from thermodyn amic equilibrium is crucial, since nucleons would otherwise b e in t he form of iron if the equilibrium was maintai during the entire nucleosynthesis. The a bundances predicted by primordial nucleos thesis dep end m ain ly on a few pa ra meters .
- 9. : the number of relativistic degrees of freedom. 9. determines the radiation d sity a nd thus the value of the freeze-out t emperature Tf. This paramet er depe on the number , N v , of neutrino fa milies. The tempera ture Tf is roughly obtai from the Friedma nn equation
O;Tl ~ VON9.Tl. -
T n: t he neutron lifetime det ermines the ratio (n / p) Nuc a t the beginning of nu osynthesis from its freeze-out value. Tn dep ends on various fundamental const a
- 1
Tn
636 2 2 ) 5 )- 1 = 1.27r . 3 0F (1 + 39A m e = (887 ± 2 s
- T/: t he number of b ar yons p er photon T/ == nb/ n, ~ (5 - 6) x 10- 10 [see (4.14 This quantity is not directly measurable with a great accuracy as it is difficul determine which fr action of da rk matter is in baryonic form. BBN thus offe way to m easure this paramet er. - The fundamental constants: ON and OF are involved in the determination t he freeze-out temperature. The fine structure const a nt 0: det ermines Q and reaction r at es , since it enters the value of the Coulomb ba rriers.
This chapter will detail these main lines. To obtain precise results , one sho integra t e numerically the network of nuclea r reactions in an expanding sp ace-ti We refer to the original papers [1- 3, 19, 20] a nd reviews [21- 25]